Module Data en en-US

Preface
General specifications 1
Rack 2
SIMATIC
Power supply modules 3
S7-400
S7-400 Automation System Module 4
Digital modules
Data
Analog modules 5
Reference Manual
Interface modules 6
S5 interface IM 463-2 7
PROFIBUS DP master
interface IM 467/IM 467 FO 8
Cable duct and fan
subassemblies 9
RS 485 repeater 10
Parameter sets of signal
modules A
Diagnostic data of signal
modules B
Accessories and spare parts C

Directive on handling
electrostatic sensitive D
devices (ESD)
List of abbreviations E
Ausgabe 11/2016
A5E00850736-08
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG A5E00850736-08 Copyright © Siemens AG 2016.

Division Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 11/2016 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Purpose of this manual

The information contained in this manual can be used as a reference for operating, for
descriptions of the functions, and for the specifications of the signal modules, power supply
modules and interface modules of the S7-400.
How to configure, assemble and wire these modules in an S7-400 system is described in the
installation manuals for each system.
Basic knowledge required

This manual requires general knowledge of automation engineering.
In addition, you are required to know how to use computers or devices with similar functions
(e. g. programming devices) under Windows 2000 or XP operating systems. Since S7-400 is
configured with the STEP 7 basic software, you have to have a good working knowledge of
the software. You can acquire this knowledge in the manual "Programming with STEP 7". Read
the notes on the safety of electronic controllers in the appendix of the Installation manual –
especially when using an S7-400 in safety-relevant areas.
Target group
This manual is aimed at people with the required qualifications to commission, operate and
maintain the products described.
Scope of the manual

The manual applies to the S7-400 automation system.
Changes compared to the previous version

The following changes have been made compared to the previous version of this manual
S7-400 Automation System; Module Specifications, Edition 05/2007 (A5E00850735-04):
The revision of the ATEX standard was taken into consideration in chapter Standards,
certificates and approvals (Page 13).
Approvals
You can find details on the certificates and approvals in the chapter General specifications
(Page 13)“General specifications.”
S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08 3
Preface
Position in the information landscape

This manual forms part of the S7-400 documentation.
System Documentation package

S7-400 ● S7-400 automation system, installation
● S7-400 automation system, module specifications
● S7-400 automation system, CPU specifications
● S7-400 instruction list
Further Information
You can find further and additional information on the topics in this manual in the following
manuals:
Programming with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/18652056)
Configuring Hardware and Communication Connections with STEP 7 (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/18652631)
System and Standard Functions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
1214574)
PROFINET system description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
19292127)
Isochrone mode (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15218045)
Recycling and disposal

The S7-400 is environmentally friendly and is thus recyclable. For environmentally compliant
recycling and disposal of your discarded device, please contact a company certified for the
disposal of electronic waste.
Additional support
If you have any questions relating to the products described in this manual and cannot find the
answers in this documentation, please contact your Siemens partner at the appropriate office
or sales and service location.
You will find information on who to contact at:
Contact partners (http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner)
A guide to the technical documents for the various SIMATIC products and systems is available
at:
Documentation (http://www.automation.siemens.com/simatic/portal/html_76/techdoku.htm)
You can find the online catalog and order system under:
Catalog (http://mall.automation.siemens.com/)

4 Reference Manual, Ausgabe 11/2016, A5E00850736-08
Preface
Training center
We offer a range of relevant courses to help you to get started with the SIMATIC S7 automation
system. Please contact your regional training center or our central training center in 90327
Nuremberg, Germany for details:
Training (http://www.sitrain.com/index_en.html)
Technical support
You can contact Technical Support for all Industry Automation products using the Web form
for Support Request
Support Request (http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request)
Additional information about our technical support is available on the Internet at
Technical Support (http://support.automation.siemens.com)
Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer a comprehensive knowledge base online on the
Internet at:
Service & Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support)
There you will find:
● Our newsletter containing up-to-date information on your products.
● The latest documents via our search function in Service & Support.
● An international forum where users and specialists can exchange their experiences.
● Your local contact partner for automation and drive technology in our contacts database.
● Information about on-site service, repairs and spare parts. Much more can be found under
"Services".
● Applications and tools for optimizing operations with SIMATIC S7. Performance
measurements for DP and PN, for example, are also published here.

Preface

Table of contents
Preface.........................................................................................................................................................3
1 General specifications................................................................................................................................13
1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals....................................................................................13
1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility.................................................................................................20
1.3 Shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries......................................23
1.4 Mechanical and ambient conditions for S7-400 operation.....................................................24
1.5 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection............................26
2 Rack...........................................................................................................................................................27
2.1 Function and design of the racks...........................................................................................27
2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2 (6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0).........................29
2.3 UR2-H Rack 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0).....................................................................................31
2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0).......................................................................................33
2.5 Rack CR3 (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0)......................................................................................35
2.6 Racks ER1 (6ES7403-1TAx1-0AA0) and ER2 (6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0)...............................36
3 Power supply modules...............................................................................................................................39
3.1 Common characteristics of the power supply modules..........................................................39
3.2 Redundant power supply modules.........................................................................................41
3.3 Backup battery (option)..........................................................................................................43
3.4 Operator controls and indicators............................................................................................45
3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs.............................................................................................48
3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)..................................................54
3.8 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 10A R
(6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0)........................................................................................................60
3.9 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 10A R
(6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)........................................................................................................63
3.10 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)................................................66
3.14 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R
(405-0KR00-0AA0).................................................................................................................74

Table of contents
3.15 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R
(405-0KR02-0AA0).................................................................................................................76
4 Digital modules...........................................................................................................................................83
4.1 Module overview....................................................................................................................83
4.2 Steps in selecting and commissioning the digital module......................................................85
4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules...............................................................................85
4.3.1 Parameters.............................................................................................................................85
4.3.2 Parameters of digital input modules.......................................................................................87
4.3.3 Parameters of digital output modules.....................................................................................88
4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules..............................................................................................88
4.4.1 General information about diagnostic messages...................................................................88
4.4.2 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules..........................................................................90
4.4.3 Causes of errors and remedies for digital modules................................................................91
4.5 Interrupts of the digital modules.............................................................................................93
4.6 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs.............................................................................95
4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)..............................97
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)............................100
4.8.1 Features...............................................................................................................................100
4.8.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V.......................................................105
4.8.3 Behavior of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V............................................................................107
4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0)..........................109
4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0).......................112
4.10.1 Features...............................................................................................................................112
4.10.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V..................................................116
4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0)..................119
4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)...................122
4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)............................126
4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)................129
4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0).......132
4.15.1 Features...............................................................................................................................132
4.15.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A.....................................136
4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)...............137
4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)...............140
4.17.1 Features...............................................................................................................................140
4.17.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A............................................144
4.17.3 Behavior of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A................................................................145
4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)...........145
4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0).........149

Table of contents
4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)..........153

4.20.1 Features...............................................................................................................................153
4.20.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A........................................157
4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)....158
5 Analog modules........................................................................................................................................163
5.1 General information..............................................................................................................163
5.2 Module overview..................................................................................................................164
5.3 Steps for commissioning analog modules............................................................................167
5.4 Representation of analog values..........................................................................................167
5.4.1 General information..............................................................................................................167
5.4.2 Representation of analog values of analog input channels..................................................169
5.4.3 Binary representation of input ranges..................................................................................170
5.4.4 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..........................................172
5.4.5 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges......................................174
5.4.6 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors.............................................176
5.4.7 Representation of analog values for resistance thermometer ............................................177
5.4.8 Representation of analog values for thermocouples............................................................180
5.4.9 Representation of analog values for analog output channels..............................................185
5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels..................................189
5.6 Behavior of the analog modules...........................................................................................192
5.6.1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................192
5.6.2 Effect of supply voltage and operating mode.......................................................................193
5.6.3 Effect of the value range for analog values..........................................................................194
5.6.4 Effect of operational limit and basic error limit.....................................................................195
5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules......................................196
5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules............................................................................199
5.8.1 General information about parameter assignment...............................................................199
5.8.2 Parameters of analog input modules...................................................................................201
5.8.3 Parameters of analog output modules.................................................................................203
5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs...................................................................................204
5.10 Connecting voltage sensors.................................................................................................207
5.11 Connecting current sensors.................................................................................................208
5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors.............................................................212
5.13 Connecting thermocouples..................................................................................................215
5.14 Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs.....................................................................219
5.15 Connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs....................................................................220
5.16 Connecting loads/actuators to current outputs.....................................................................222
5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules.............................................................................223
5.18 Interrupts of analog modules................................................................................................227
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)..................................229
5.19.1 Features...............................................................................................................................229

Table of contents
5.19.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit............................................................................235

5.19.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit..................................236
5.20.1 Features...............................................................................................................................237
5.21.1 Features...............................................................................................................................253
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)...............................264
5.22.1 Features...............................................................................................................................264
5.22.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit..........................................................................270
5.22.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit................................271
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)...............................273
5.23.1 Features...............................................................................................................................273
5.23.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit..........................................................................284
5.23.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit................................288
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)......................292
5.24.1 Features...............................................................................................................................292
5.24.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit.................................................................299
5.24.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit.................302
5.25.1 Features...............................................................................................................................303
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0).............................316
5.26.1 Features...............................................................................................................................316
5.26.2 Commissioning the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit..........................................................................322
5.26.3 Output ranges of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit .......................................................................323
6 Interface modules.....................................................................................................................................325
6.1 Common features of the interface modules.........................................................................325
6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0 (6ES7
461-0AA01-0AA0)................................................................................................................330
6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1
(6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)......................................................................................................333
6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3
(6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)......................................................................................................337
6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4;
(6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)......................................................................................................340
7 S5 interface IM 463-2...............................................................................................................................345
7.1 Using SIMATIC S5 expansion units in an S7-400................................................................345
7.2 Rules for connecting S5 expansion units.............................................................................347
7.3 Operator controls and indicators..........................................................................................348

Table of contents
7.4 Installing and connecting the IM 463-2................................................................................350

7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314..........................................................................352
7.6 Configuring S5 modules for operation in the S7-400...........................................................355
7.7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable........................................................................................357
7.8 Terminating connector for IM 314........................................................................................359
7.9 Specifications IM463-2 (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0) ................................................................361
8 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO................................................................................363
8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO............................................................363
8.1.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................363
8.1.2 Indicators and the mode selector.........................................................................................366
8.2 Configuration........................................................................................................................368
8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP..............................................................................................368
8.3.1 Connection options .............................................................................................................368
8.3.2 Bus connector......................................................................................................................369
8.3.3 Optical connection to PROFIBUS DP..................................................................................371
8.3.4 Connecting a fiber-optic cable to the IM 467 FO..................................................................372
8.4 Specifications.......................................................................................................................374
8.4.1 Specifications of the IM 467 (6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0))........................................................374
8.4.2 Specifications of the IM 467 FO (6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0) ...................................................376
9 Cable duct and fan subassemblies...........................................................................................................377
9.1 Features...............................................................................................................................377
9.2 Fan monitoring in the fan subassemblies.............................................................................378
9.3 Cable duct (6ES7408-0TA00-0AA0)....................................................................................380
9.4 The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0).............................................381
9.5 The 24 V DC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TA01-0XA0)....................................................384
10 RS 485 repeater.......................................................................................................................................387
10.1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................387
10.2 Applications and features (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0).............................................................388
10.3 Design of the RS 485 repeater (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)....................................................389
10.4 RS 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation....................................................390
10.5 Specifications.......................................................................................................................392
A Parameter sets of signal modules............................................................................................................395
A.1 How to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program...............................395
A.2 Parameters of digital input modules.....................................................................................397
A.3 Parameters of digital output modules...................................................................................400
A.4 Parameters of analog input modules...................................................................................403

Table of contents
B Diagnostic data of signal modules............................................................................................................405

B.1 Evaluating diagnostic data of signal modules in the user program......................................405
B.2 Structure and contents of diagnostic data bytes 0 and 1.....................................................406
B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2.....................................................407
B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2...................................................412
B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2....................................................420
C Accessories and spare parts....................................................................................................................429
C.1 Accessories and spare parts................................................................................................429
D Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD).....................................................................433
D.1 ESD: What are the directives for handling electrostatic sensitive devices?.........................433
D.2 Electrostatic charging of persons.........................................................................................434
D.3 Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge..................................................435
E List of abbreviations..................................................................................................................................437
E.1 List of abbreviations.............................................................................................................437
Glossary...................................................................................................................................................441
Index.........................................................................................................................................................455

General specifications 1
1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals
Information on the type plate
Note
You will find the current approvals on the type plate of the respective product.
WARNING
Open Equipment
Death, serious injury or substantial material damage can occur.
S7 400 modules are classified as open equipment, This means that the S7 400 should only
be installed in an enclosure or cabinet.
Access to the enclosures or cabinets should only be possible with a key or with a tool, and
access should only be permitted for trained or approved personnel.
IEC 61131-2
The S7-400 automation system meets the requirements and criteria of standard IEC 61131-2
(Programmable Controllers, Part 2: Equipment Requirements and Tests.)
CE marking
Our products meet the requirements and protective objectives of the following EU Directives
and comply with the corresponding European standards (EN):
● Directive 2014/35/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 February 2014
on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to the making available on
the market of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits (Low
Voltage Directive)
on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive)
on the harmonisation of the laws of the Member States relating to equipment and protective
systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres (ATEX Directive)

General specifications
The EC Declaration of Conformity can be downloaded from the Customer Support Internet
pages (keyword "declaration of conformity").
EMC directive
SIMATIC products are designed for industrial applications.
Table 1-1 Use in industry
Area of application Noise emission requirements Noise immunity requirements

Industry EN 61000-6-4: 2001 + A1:2011 EN 61000-6-2: 2005
Low voltage directive

The products in the following table meet the requirements of EU Directive 2014/35/EU "Low
Voltage Directive". Compliance with this EU directive has been checked in accordance with
DIN EN 61131-2 (corresponds to IEC 61131-2).
Table 1-2 Products that fulfill the requirements of the low-voltage directive
Name Order number

Digital input module SM 421;DI 32 x UC 120 V 6ES7 421-1EL00-0AA0
Digital input module SM 421;DI 16 x UC 120/230 V 6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0
Digital output module SM 422;DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5A 6ES7 422-1FF00-0AA0
Digital output module SM 422;DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2A 6ES7 422-1FH00-0AB0
Relay output module SM 422;DO 16 x UC30/230 V/Rel5A 6ES7 422-1HH00-0AA0
Digital input module SM 421;DI 16 x UC 120/230 V 6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0
The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly 6ES7 408-1TB00-0XA0
PS 407 4A 6ES7 407-0DA01-0AA0
6ES7 407-0DA02-0AA0
PS 407 10A 6ES7 407-0KA01-0AA0
6ES7 407-0KA02-0AA0
PS 407 20A 6ES7 407-0RA01-0AA0
6ES7 407-0RA02-0AA0
PS 407 10A R 6ES7 407-0KR00-0AA0
6ES7 407-0KR02-0AA0
Note
In the new releases, some of the devices listed above fulfill the requirements of the explosion
protection guidelines instead of those of the low-voltage directive. Please note the information
on the type plate.

ATEX Directive
In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres;

Type of Protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres
- Part 0: General requirements)
II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4..T6 Gc
Marking for Australia and New Zealand
Our products meet the requirements of standard EN 61000-6-4.
cULus approval
Note
The marks on the rating plate indicate which cULus approvals have been issued for your
product.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with

● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
or cULus approval, Hazardous Location
HAZ. LOC.
CULUS Listed E248953 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.

● ISA 12.12.01 (Hazardous Location)
● CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)

APPROVED for Use in

● Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D T4A
● Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4
Note the following information.
or cULus Approvals, Hazardous Location for Relay Modules
HAZ. LOC.
CULUS Listed E223122 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.

● UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
● CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for Use in
● Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D T4A
● Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4
● Cl. 1, Zone 2, AEx nC IIC T4
Note the following information.
Note
This product must be installed according to the NEC (National Electric Code) stipulations.
When used in environments according to class I, division 2 (see above), S7-400 must be
mounted in an enclosure that corresponds to at least IP54 according to EN 60529.
You can find information about the use of S7-400 in hazardous areas of zone 2 in a separate
document, which is included in this documentation package.

WARNING
Installation Instructions according cULus
WARNING – Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known
to be non-hazardous.
WARNING – Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class
I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C or D; Class I, Zone
2, Group IIC, or non-hazardous locations only.
CuULu requirements for hazardous location on the battery power supply for CPUs
The backup voltage for a CPU must be supplied over a non-incendive plug connection. The
figure below shows such a plug connection.
1 2
(1) Battery or supply voltage

(2) CPU with "Ext. Batt." connector
Figure 1-1 Back-up voltage supply
The following conditions apply to the performance characteristics of this connection:
Voc (no load voltage) = 15 V Vmax = 15 V

Isc (short-circuit current)= 50 mA Imax = 50 mA
Ca = Battery/voltage supply capacity Ci = 25 nF maximum
La = Battery/voltage supply inductance Li = 2 mH maximum
The battery/power supply that powers the non-incendive connection must comply with the
following ratings:
Battery/Power supply CPU input "Ext. Batt." with cable

Voc ≤ Vmax (15 V)
Isc ≤ Imax (50 mA)
Ca ≥ Ci + Cc (25 nF + Cc)
La ≥ Li + Lc (2 mH + Lc)
Cc = Cable capacity
Lc = Cable inductance
Note
If you do not know the capacity and inductance of the cable, you can use the following values:
Cc = 197 pF/m (60 pF/ft.), Lc = 0.66 mH/m (0.2 mH/ft)

Example
The Varta 4022 battery together with a 1.5 m long cable and a Leonhardy 02-02.1500 plug
meet these conditions.
FM Approval
Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I, Division 2,

Group A, B, C, D.
Temperature class: T4 at 60° C ambient temperature
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage can result.
In hazardous areas, personal injury or property damage can result if you create or break an
electrical circuit during operation of an S7-400 (for example, by means of plug-in connections,
fuses, switches).
Do not create or break live electrical circuits unless you are certain there is no danger of
explosion.
When used in FM conditions, the S7-400 must be fitted in an enclosure that corresponds to
at least IP54 in accordance with EN 60529.
NEC (National Electric Code) and CEC (Canadian Electric Code) requirements for Hazardous
Locations for battery power supply for CPUs
The backup voltage for a CPU must be supplied over a non-incendive plug connection. The
figure below shows such a plug connection.
1 2
(1) Battery or supply voltage

(2) CPU with "Ext. Batt." connector
Figure 1-2 Back-up voltage supply
The following conditions apply to the performance characteristics of this connection:
Voc (no load voltage) = 15 V Vmax = 15 V

Isc (short-circuit current)= 50 mA Imax = 50 mA
Ca = Battery/voltage supply capacity Ci = 25 nF maximum
La = Battery/voltage supply inductance Li = 2 mH maximum

The battery/power supply that powers the non-incendive connection must comply with the
following ratings:
Battery/power supply CPU input "Ext. Batt." with cable

Voc ≤ Vmax (15 V)
Isc ≤ Imax (50 mA)
Ca ≥ Ci + Cc (25 nF + Cc)
La ≥ Li + Lc (2 mH + Lc)
Cc = Cable capacity
Lc = Cable inductance
Note
The concept of non-incendive field wiring allows the interconnection of devices with non-
incendive field wiring using any wiring method approved for unclassified sites.
If you do not know the capacity and inductance of the cable, you can use the following values:
Cc = 197 pF/m (60 pF/ft.), Lc = 0.66 mH/m (0.2 mH/ft)
Marine Approvals
Classification societies:
● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
● BV (Bureau Veritas)
● DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
● GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
● LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
● Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
Safety requirements for installation

The S7-400 automation system is "open-type equipment" in accordance with standard
IEC 61131-2 and therefore EU Directive 2014/35/EU (Low Voltage Directive), and "open type"
in accordance with UL/CSA certification.
To fulfill requirements for safe operation with regard to mechanical stability, flame retardation,
stability, and shock-hazard protection, the following alternative types of installation are
specified:
● Installation in a suitable cabinet
● Installation in a suitable housing
● Installation in a suitably equipped, enclosed operating area.

1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
Introduction
This section provides details of the immunity of S7-400 modules and information on RFI
suppression.
All components of the S7-400 automation system meet the requirement of the standards
applicable in Europe provided the system is installed in accordance with all applicable
regulations (see Installation manual, sections 2 and 4).
"EMC" definition
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical device or system to operate
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without affecting that environment.
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage can result.
Installing expansions that are not approved for the S7-400 can breach the requirements and
regulations governing safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.
Pulse-shaped interference
The table below shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the modules with pulse shaped
interference. The system S7-400 system must meet the requirements and guidelines for
electrical assembly.
Table 1-3 Pulse-shaped interference
Pulse-shaped interference Test voltage Corresponds to

immunity test lev‐
el
Electrostatic discharge Air discharge: ±8 kV 3
in accordance with IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: ±6 kV
Burst (electrical fast transient) in accord‐ 2 kV (power supply line) 3
ance with IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV (signal line >30 m)
1 kV (signal line <30 m)

Pulse-shaped interference Test voltage Corresponds to

immunity test lev‐
el
Surge 3
in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5
● Asymmetrical connection 2 kV (supply line) DC with protective
components
2 kV (signal line/data line only > 30 m),
where applicable with protective compo‐
nents
● Symmetrical connection 1 kV (supply line) DC with protective
components
1 kV (signal line only > 30 m), where ap‐
plicable with protective components
Sinusoidal interference
The table below shows S7-400 module EMC for sinusoidal interference.
Table 1-4 Sinusoidal interference
Sinusoidal interference Test values Corresponds

to immunity
test level
High frequency radiation (electromagnetic 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4 GHz to 2 GHz
fields) 10 V/m with 80 % amplitude modulation
in accordance with IEC 61000-4-3 at 1 kHz 3
2 GHz to 2.7 GHz
3 V/m with 80 % amplitude modulation
at 1 kHz
HF currents on cables and cable shielding Test voltage 10 V with 80 % amplitude 3
in accordance with IEC 61000-4-6 modulation of 1 kHz in a range of 10 kHz
to 80 MHz
Emission of radio frequency interference

Emissions from electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 61000-6-4.
Emissions over main AC supply in accordance with 61000-6-4.
Line harmonics
The AC power modules for S7-400 comply with the following standards for line harmonics:
Harmonic current: EN 61000-3-2
Voltage supply fluctuations and flicker: EN 61000-3-3

Additional measures
If you want to connect an S7-400 system to the public network, you must ensure compliance
with class B pursuant to EN 55032.
Appropriate additional measures are to be taken if you need to increase the immunity of the
system in the light of high external interference.

1.3 Shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries
1.3 Shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries
Shipping and storage of modules

S7-400 modules surpass the requirements of IEC 61131-2 with respect to shipping and storage
requirements. The following details apply to modules shipped and/or stored in their original
packing.
Climatic conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage and IEC 60721-3-2,
Class 2K4 for transportation.
Mechanical conditions are compliant with IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2.
Table 1-5 Shipping and storage conditions for modules
Permissible range
Free fall ≤ 1m (to 10 kg)
Temperature -40 to +70° C
Barometric pressure 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to an elevation of -1000 to 3500 m)
Relative humidity (at +25° C) 5 to 95%, without condensation
Sinusoidal vibration in accord‐ 5 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
ance with IEC 60068-2-6 9 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock in accordance with IEC 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks
60068-2-29
Shipment of backup batteries

Backup batteries should always be shipped in their original package. No special measures are
required for the transport of the backup batteries used in the S7-400 system. The lithium
component of the backup battery is less than 0.5 g.
Storing backup batteries

Always store backup batteries in a cool and dry place. The batteries have a maximum shelf
life of 10 years.
WARNING
Risk of injury, material damage, release of hazardous substances.
Lithium batteries can explode if handled improperly. Their improper disposal may result in
the release of hazardous substances. Strictly adhere to the following instructions:
Do not throw a new or low battery into an open fire and do not perform any soldering work
on the cell casing (max. temperature 100° C). Do not recharge the battery - risk of explosion!
Do not open a battery. Replace a faulty battery only with the same type. Replacement
batteries can be ordered from SIEMENS (for order numbers, refer to the "Module
Specifications" reference manual, in Appendix C (Page 429)).
Always try to return low batteries to the manufacturer or deliver these to a registered recycling
company.

1.4 Mechanical and ambient conditions for S7-400 operation
Operating conditions
S7-400 systems are designed for stationary use in weather-proof locations. The S7-400 fulfills
the requirements for use in accordance with IEC 60721-3-3:
● Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
● Class 3K3 (climatic ambient conditions)
Use with additional measures

The S7-400 may not be used under the conditions outlined below without taking additional
measures:
● at locations with a high degree of ionizing radiation
● in aggressive environments caused, for example, by
– the development of dust
– corrosive vapors or gases
– strong electric or magnetic fields
● in installations requiring special monitoring, for example
– elevators
– electrical plants in potentially hazardous areas
An additional measure would be to install the S7-400 in a cabinet or housing.
Mechanical ambient conditions

The mechanical ambient conditions for S7-400 modules are listed in the following table in the
form of sinusoidal vibrations.
Table 1-6 Mechanical ambient conditions
Frequency range in Hz Test values

10 ≤ f < 58 0.075 mm amplitude
58 ≤ f < 500 1 g constant acceleration
Reducing vibrations
If your S7-400 modules are exposed to severe shock or vibration, take appropriate measures
to reduce acceleration or the amplitude.
We recommend the installation of the S7-400 on damping materials (for example, rubber-metal
vibration dampers.)

Testing mechanical ambient conditions

The table below provides important information with respect to the type and scope of testing
of mechanical ambient conditions.
Table 1-7 Test for mechanical ambient conditions
Condition tested Test standard Remarks

Vibrations Vibration test in accord‐ Type of vibration: frequency sweeps with a rate of
ance with IEC 60068-2-6 change of 1 octave/minute.
(sinusoidal) 10 Hz ≤ f < 58 Hz, constant amplitude 0.075 mm
58 Hz ≤ f < 500 Hz, constant acceleration 1 g
Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis
in each of three axes perpendicular to each other.
Shock Shock test in accordance Type of shock: half-sine
with IEC 60068-2-29 Severity of shock: 10 g peak value, 6 ms duration
Direction of shock: 100 shocks in each of the 3 axes
arranged vertically to each other.
Climatic ambient conditions

The S7-400 may be operated under the following climatic ambient conditions:
Table 1-8 Climatic ambient conditions
Ambient conditions Permissible range Remark

Temperature 0 to +60° C
Temperature change Max. 10° C / h
Relative humidity Max. 95% at +25° C No condensation
Barometric pressure 1080 to 795 hPa (corresponds to an elevation of
-1000 to 2000 m)
Concentration of pollutants SO2: < 0.5 ppm; Test: 10 ppm; 10 days
RH < 60%, no condensation Test: 1 ppm; 10 days
H2S: < 0.1 ppm;
RH < 60%, no condensation
ISA-S71.04 severity level G1; G2; G3 -

1.5 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection
1.5 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of

protection
Test voltages
Where required, insulation resistance is proved in routine testing with test voltages in
accordance with IEC 61131-2.
Protection class
Protection class I in accordance with IEC 61140, i.e. protective conductor connection to power
module required!
Protection from foreign objects and water

IP20 in accordance with IEC 60529, i.e. protection against contact with standard probes.
There is no water ingress protection.

Rack 2
2.1 Function and design of the racks
Introduction
The racks for the S7-400 have the following functions:
● They physically hold the modules.
● They supply the modules with operating voltage.
● They connect the individual modules to each other via the signal busses.
Design of the racks

A rack consists of the following elements:
● Mounting rail with threaded bolts for fixing the modules and lateral cutouts for mounting the
rack
● Plastic parts that function, among other things, as guides when swinging the modules into
place
● A backplane bus, an I/O bus and, if necessary, a communication bus with bus connector
● Connection for local ground
The following figure shows the mechanical configuration of a rack (UR1).
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Figure 2-1 Configuration of a rack with 18 slots
(1) Mounting rail

(2) Plastic parts

Rack
2.1 Function and design of the racks
(3) Bus connector (covered when shipped)

(4) Connection for local ground
UL/CSA note
Special requirements should be taken into consideration in the area of influence of the UL/
CSA; these may be fulfilled by installing the system in a cabinet.

Rack
2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2 (6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0)
2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2

(6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0)
Order number
The "x" variable has the following meaning for order numbers 6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0 and
6ES7400-1JAx1:
● x=0: Mounting rail made of sheet steel
● x=1: Mounting rail made of aluminum
Introduction
The UR1 and UR2 racks are used for assembling central racks and expansion racks. The UR1
and UR2 racks have both an I/O bus and a communication bus.
Suitable modules for UR1 and UR2

You can use the following modules in the UR1 and UR2 racks:
● When the UR1 or UR2 is used as a central rack:
All S7-400 modules except for receive IMs
● When the UR1 or UR2 is used as an expansion rack:
All S7-400 modules except for CPUs and send IMs
Special case: Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461-1 receive
IM.
Design of the UR1 and UR2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2
290 mm 190 mm
4 3
40 mm
465 mm 240 mm
482,5 mm 257,5 mm
(1)+(2) I/O bus

(3)+(4) Communication bus
Figure 2-2 UR1 rack with 18 slots and UR2 with 9 slots

Rack
2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2 (6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0)
Specifications of the UR1 and UR2 racks
Rack UR1 UR1 UR2 UR2

6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7
400-1TA01-0AA0 400-1TA11-0AA0 400-1JA01-0AA0 400-1JA11-0AA0
Number of single-width slots 18 18 9 9
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5x 290 x 27.5 482.5x 290 x 27.5 257.5x 290 x 27.5 257.5x 290 x 27.5
Material of the mounting rail Sheet steel Aluminum Sheet steel Aluminum
Weight (in kg) 4,1 3,0 2,15 1,5
Busses I/O bus and communication bus

Rack
2.3 UR2-H Rack 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0)
Order number
The "x" variable has the following meaning for order number 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0:
Introduction
The UR2-H rack is used for assembling two central racks or expansion racks in one rack. The
UR2-H rack essentially represents two electrically isolated UR2 racks on the same mounting
rail. The main area of application of the UR2-H is in the compact structure of redundant
S7-400H systems (two devices or systems in one rack).
Suitable modules for UR2-H

You can use the following modules in the UR2-H rack:
● When the UR2-H is used as a central rack:
All S7-400 modules except for receive IMs
● When the UR2-H is used as an expansion rack:
All S7-400 modules except for CPUs, send IMs, the IM 463-2, and the adapter module
IM.
Design of the UR2-H

The following figure shows the design of the UR2-H rack with 2x9 slots.
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
290 mm 190 mm
40 mm
465 mm
482,5 mm
Figure 2-3 Rack dimensions

Rack
(1) System I
(2) System II
CAUTION
Danger of damage to equipment.
If you insert the power supply module in a slot that is not intended for power supply modules,
the module may be damaged. Slots 1 to 4 are permitted, whereby power supply modules
starting from slot 1 must be inserted without leaving gaps.
Make sure that power supply modules are only inserted in permitted slots. Take particular
notice of the option of swapping modules in slot 1 on rack II and slot 9 on rack I.
Specifications of the UR2-H rack
Rack UR2-H UR2-H

6ES7 400-2JA00-0AA0 6ES7 400-2JA10-0AA0
Number of single-width slots 2x9 2x9
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5 x 290 x 27.5 482.5 x 290 x 27.5
Material of the mounting rail Sheet steel Aluminum
Weight (in kg) 4,1 3,0
Busses Segmented I/O bus,
segmented communication bus

Rack
2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0)
2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0)
Introduction
The CR2 rack is used for the design of segmented central racks. The CR2 has both an I/O
bus and a communication bus. The I/O bus is split into two local bus segments with 10 or 8
slots.
Suitable modules for the CR2

You can use the following modules in the CR2 rack:
● All S7-400 modules except for receive IMs
Design of the CR2
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
5 3
290 mm 190 mm
40 mm
465 mm
482,5 mm
Figure 2-4 CR2 rack
(1) Segment 1
(2) Segment 2
(3) I/O bus segment 2
(4) Communication bus
(5) I/O bus segment 1
Specifications of the CR2 rack
Rack CR2
Number of single-width slots 18
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5 x 290 x 27.5
Material of the mounting rail Sheet steel
Weight (in kg) 4,1

Rack
2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0)
Rack CR2
Busses Segmented I/O bus,
full-length communication bus
Only one power supply module required

Rack
2.5 Rack CR3 (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0)
2.5 Rack CR3 (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0)
Introduction
The CR3 rack is used for the design of central racks in standard systems (not in fault-tolerant
systems). The CR3 has both an I/O bus and a communication bus.
Suitable modules for the CR3

You can use the following modules in the CR3 rack:
● All S7-400 modules except for receive IMs
● You can only operate only one CPU 41x-4H at a time.
Design of the CR3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
290 mm 190 mm
40 mm
115 mm
132 mm
Figure 2-5 CR3 rack
Specifications of the CR3 Rack
Rack CR3
Number of single-width slots 4
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 132 x 290 x 27.5
Material of the mounting rail Sheet steel
Weight (in kg) 0,75
Busses I/O bus and communication bus

Rack
2.6 Racks ER1 (6ES7403-1TAx1-0AA0) and ER2 (6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0)
2.6 Racks ER1 (6ES7403-1TAx1-0AA0) and ER2

(6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0)
Order number
The "x" variable has the following meaning for order numbers 6ES7403-1TAx0-0AA0 und
6ES7403-1JAx01-0AA0:
Introduction
The ER1 and ER2 racks are used for the design of expansion racks.
The ER1 and ER2 racks have only one I/O bus with the following restrictions:
● Interrupts from modules in the ER1 or ER2 have no effect since there are no interrupt lines
provided.
● Modules in the ER1 or ER2 are not supplied with 24 V. Modules requiring a 24 V supply
are not provided for use in the ER1 or ER2.
● Modules in the ER1 or ER2 are not backed up either by the battery in the power supply
module or by the voltage supplied externally to the CPU or the receive IM (EXT.-BATT.
socket).
There is therefore no advantage in using backup batteries in the power supply modules in
ER1 and ER2.
Battery faults and backup voltage faults are not reported to the CPU. The battery monitoring
function of a power supply module installed in the ER1 or ER2 should therefore always be
switched off.
Suitable modules for ER1 and ER2

You can use the following modules in the ER1 and ER2 racks:
● All power supply modules
● Receive IMs
● All signal modules provided the above-mentioned restrictions are observed.
IM.

Rack
Design of the ER1 and ER2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 1
290 mm 190 mm
40 mm
465 mm 240 mm
482,5 mm 257,5 mm
Figure 2-6 ER1 rack with 18 slots and ER2 with 9 slots
(1) I/O bus
Specifications of the ER1 and ER2 racks
Rack ER1 ER1 ER2 ER2

6ES7 6ES7 6ES7 6ES7
403-1TA01-0A 403-1TA11-0AA0 403-1JA01-0AA0 403-1JA11-0AA0
A0
Number of single-width 18 18 9 9
slots
Dimensions 482.5 x 290 x 482.5 x 290 x 27.5 257.5 x 290 x 27.5 257.5 x 290 x 27.5
W x H x D (in mm) 27.5
Material of the mount‐ Sheet steel Aluminum Sheet steel Aluminum
ing rail
Weight (in kg) 3,8 2,5 2,0 1,25
Busses Restricted I/O bus

Rack

Power supply modules 3
3.1 Common characteristics of the power supply modules
Functions of the power supply modules

The power supply modules of the S7-400 supply the other modules in the rack with their
operating voltages via the backplane bus. They do not provide load voltages for the signal
modules.
Common characteristics of the power supply modules

The power supply modules share the following characteristics in addition to their individual
specifications:
● Encapsulated design for use in racks of the S7-400 system
● Cooling via natural convection
● Plug-in connection of the supply voltage with AC - DC coding
● Protection class I (with protective conductor) in accordance with IEC 61140; VDE 0140,
Part 1
● Limitation of the inrush current in accordance with NAMUR Recommendation NE 21
● Short-circuit-proof outputs
● Monitoring of both output voltages. If one of these voltages fails, the power supply module
signals a fault to the CPU.
● Both output voltages (5 VDCand 24 VDC) share a common ground.
● Primary clocked
● Battery backup as option. The parameters set and the memory contents (RAM) are backed
up via the backplane bus in the CPUs and programmable modules. In addition, the backup
battery enables you to carry out a restart of the CPU. Both the power supply module and
the backed up modules monitor the battery voltage.
● Operating and fault/error LEDs on the front plate.
Note
A mains disconnecting device must be provided when installing AC power supply modules.
Switching the line voltage Off/On

The power supply modules have an inrush current limiter in accordance with NAMUR.

Power supply modules
3.1 Common characteristics of the power supply modules
Power supply module in invalid slot

If you insert the power supply module of a rack in an invalid slot, it will not power up. In this
case, proceed as follows to start up the power supply module correctly:
1. Disconnect the power supply module from the mains (not just the standby switch).
2. Remove the power supply module.
3. Install the power supply module in slot 1.
4. Wait at least 1 minute and then switch the line voltage on again.
CAUTION
If you insert the power supply module in a slot that is not intended for power supply
modules, the module may be damaged. Slots 1 to 4 are permitted, whereby power supply
modules starting from slot 1 must be inserted without leaving gaps.
Make sure that power supply modules are only inserted in permissible slots.

3.2 Redundant power supply modules
Order numbers and function
Table 3-1 Redundant power supply modules
Type Order number Input voltage Output voltage See section

PS 407 10A R 6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0 85 to 264 VAC or 88 to 5 VDC/10 A and 3.8 (Page 60)
300 VDC 24 VDC/1 A
PS 407 10A R 6ES7 407-0KR02-0AA0 85 to 264 VAC or 88 to 5 VDC/10 A and 3.9 (Page 63)
300 VDC 24 VDC/1 A
PS 405 10A R 6ES7405-0KR00-0AA0 19.2 to 72 VDC 5 VDC/10 A and 3.14 (Page 74)
24 VDC/1 A
PS 405 10A R 6ES7 405-0KR02-0AA0 19.2 to 72 VDC 5 VDC/10 A and 3.15 (Page 76)
24 VDC/1 A
Redundant operation
Using two power supply modules of type PS 407 10A R or PS 405 10A R, you can design a
redundant power supply for a rack. We recommend this if you want to increase the availability
of your programmable controller, particularly if you are operating it on an unreliable power
system.
Designing a redundant power supply

Redundant operation is possible with any of the S7 CPUs and racks described in this manual.
STEP 7 as of V4.02 is also required.
To design a redundant power supply, insert a power supply module into slots 1 and 3 of the
rack. You can then insert as many modules as can be supplied by a single power supply
module. In other words, in redundant operation all the modules can only draw a total of 10 A.
Features
The redundant power supply of an S7-400 has the following characteristics:
● The power supply module features an inrush current in accordance with NAMUR.
● Each of the power supply modules can take over the supply of power to the whole rack if
the other one fails. There is no loss of operation.
● Each of the power supply modules can be exchanged while the system is in operation. No
loss of power and no peak stress occurs with the effective voltages when the modules are
removed or inserted.
● Each of the power supply modules monitors its function and sends a message if it fails.
● Neither of the power supply modules can generate an error which affects the output voltage
of the other power supply module.

● A redundant battery concept (backup concept) is only provided when two backup batteries
are used in each of the power supply modules. If only one battery is used in each module,
only non-redundant backup is possible, since both batteries are being used at the same
time.
● The failure of a power supply module is registered via a plug and remove interrupt (default
STOP). If used in the second segment of the CR 2 no message is sent if the power supply
module fails.
● If two power supply modules are inserted but only one is switched on, there is a power-up
delay of up to one minute when the line voltage is switched on.
Note
The check box "Startup if preset configuration not equal to actual configuration" should be
activated in the "Properties" dialog box of the CPU.

3.3 Backup battery (option)
Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 have a battery compartment for one or two backup
batteries. Use of these batteries is optional.
Function of the backup batteries

If backup batteries have been installed, the parameters set and the memory contents (RAM)
will be backed up via the backplane bus in CPUs and programmable modules if the power
supply module is turned off or the supply voltage fails. The battery voltage must be within the
tolerance range.
In addition, the backup battery enables you to carry out a restart of the CPU after power-on.
Both the power supply module and the backed up modules monitor the battery voltage.
Insert backup battery

Activate battery monitoring once you have installed one or two backup batteries. Make sure
that neither the respective LED BATT1F or BATT2F nor the LED BAF are illuminated. Only
then is the backup battery working properly and backup guaranteed as described above.
Note
Insert the power supply module in the rack and switch it on before you insert the backup battery
for the first time. This will increase the service life of the backup battery.
Power supply modules with two backup batteries:

Some power supply modules contain a battery compartment for two batteries. If you use two
batteries and set the switch to 2BATT, the power supply module defines one of the two batteries
as the backup battery. This assignment remains in force until the battery is empty. When the
backup battery is completely discharged, the system switches to the reserve battery which is
then in turn used as the backup battery for the duration of its life. The status "backup battery"
is also stored in the event of a power failure.
Battery type
You may only use batteries certified by Siemens! (see Appendix C: Spare parts (Page 429)).
The batteries can form a passivation layer. Depassivation takes place when the batteries are
inserted in the power supply module.

Specifications of the backup battery
Backup battery
Order number 6ES7971-0BA00
Type 1 x lithium AA
Nominal voltage 3.6 V
Nominal capacity 2,3 Ah
Backup times
The maximum backup time is based on the capacity of the backup batteries used and the
backup current in the rack. The backup current is the sum of all individual currents of the
inserted backed-up modules as well as the requirements of the power supply module when
the power is switched off.
Example for the calculation of backup times

The capacity of the batteries is listed in the technical specifications of the power supply. The
typical and maximum backup current of the backed-up module is listed in the technical
specifications of the module.
The typical backup current of a CPU is an empirically determined value. The maximum backup
current is a worst-case value that is calculated based on the corresponding manufacturer
specifications for the memory blocks.
The following technical specifications produce backup times for a CR with a PS 407 4A
(6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0) and a CPU 417-4 (6ES7417-4XT05-0AB0) as the only backed-up
module:
● Capacity of the backup battery: 2,3 Ah
● Maximum backup current (including own requirement at power off) of the power supply:
100 µA
● Typical backup current of the CPU 417-4: 225 µA to 40° C.
A nominal capacity of less than 100% is to be assumed when calculating the backup time
because the backup battery is also affected at power on by regular depassivation.
A battery capacity of 63% of the nominal capacity produces the following values:
Backup time = 2,3 Ah * 0.63 / (100 + 225) µA = (1,449 / 325) * 1 000 000 = 4458 h
This produces a maximum backup time of 185 days.

3.4 Operator controls and indicators
Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 have essentially the same controls and indicators.
The main differences are:
● Power supply modules with a backup battery have an LED (BATTF) that indicates an empty,
defective, or missing backup battery.
● Power supply modules with two redundant backup batteries have two LEDs (BATT1F and
BATT2F) to indicate empty, defective or missing backup battery.
Operator controls and indicators

The figure shows you an example of a power supply module (PS 407 20A) with two (redundant)
backup batteries. The LEDs are at the top left of the module front plate.
36$
;

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
5$$$
,17)
%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)%$77)9
%$77)
%$77)
'&9 '&9'&
'&9
)05 )05EXWWRQ)DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW

6WDQGE\VZLWFKGRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV
8QGHUFRYHU
%$77 %$77

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
Figure 3-1 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 20A power supply module
Meaning of the LEDs

The meaning of the LEDs on the power supply modules is described in the tables below. The
following section contains a list of the faults indicated by these LEDs and notes on how to
acknowledge the faults.

LEDs INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC
Table 3-2 LEDs INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC
LED Color Meaning

INTF Red Lights up in the event of an internal fault
5 VDC green Lights up as long as the 5 V voltage is within the tolerance limits
24 VDC green Lights up as long as the 24 V voltage is within the tolerance limits
LEDs BAF, BATTF

Power supply modules with a backup battery have the following indicators:
Table 3-3 LEDs BAF, BATTF
LED Color Meaning

BAF Red Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low and the
BATT.INDIC switch is at the BATT position
BATTF Yellow Lights up if the battery is empty, if the polarity is reversed, or if the battery
is missing, and the BATT.INDIC switch is at the BATT position
LEDs BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

Power supply modules with two backup batteries have the following indicators:
Table 3-4 LEDs BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F
LED Color Meaning

BAF Red Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low and the
BATT.INDIC switch is at the 1 BATT or 2 BATT position
BATT1F Yellow Lights up if battery 1 is empty or if the polarity is reversed or if the battery
is missing, and the BATT.INDIC switch is at the 1 BATT or 2 BATT position
BATT2F Yellow Lights up if the battery 2 is empty, if the polarity is reversed, or if the battery
is missing, and the BATT.INDIC switch is at the 2 BATT position
Backup voltage to the backplane bus

The backup voltage is either supplied by the backup battery or fed externally into the CPU or
receiver IM. In its normal state, the level of the backup voltage is between 2.7 V and 3.6 V.
The backup voltage is monitored at the lower limit. Violation of the lower limit is indicated by
the BAF LED and reported to the CPU.

BAF lights up if the backup voltage on the backplane bus is too low. Possible causes of this
include:
● Battery (batteries) empty or battery polarity has been reversed.
● External supply via CPU or receive IM is defective or supply from secondary power supply
module is defective or missing.
● Short-circuit or overload on the battery voltage.
Note
Due to internal capacities, if you remove the battery or switch off the external supply, some
time may elapse before BAF, BATT1F, or BATT2F lights up.
Function of the operator controls of the power supply modules
Table 3-5 Function of the operator controls of the power supply modules
Control Function
FMR button For acknowledging and resetting a fault indicator after correcting the fault
Standby switch Switches the output voltages (5 V VDC24 VDC) to 0 V by intervening in the
control loop (no mains disconnection).
● Output voltages at nominal value
● Output voltage 0 V
Switches Used for setting LEDs and battery monitoring
BATT.INDIC Where one battery can be used (PS 407 4A, PS 405 4A):
● OFF: LEDs and monitor signals inactive
● BATT: BAF/BATTF LEDs and monitor signals active
Where two batteries can be used (PS 407 10A, PS 407 20A, PS 405 10A, PS
405 20A):
● OFF: LEDs and monitor signals inactive
● 1 BATT: Only BAF/BATT1F LEDs (for battery 1) active.
● 2 BATT: BAF/BATT1F/BATT2F LEDs (for batteries 1 and 2) active.
Battery compart‐ For backup battery (batteries)
ment
Power connection 3-pin connector for the power main
(do not pull and plug under power)
Cover
The battery compartment, battery selector switch, voltage selector switch and power
connection are housed under one cover. The cover must remain closed during operation in
order to protect these operator controls and to prevent static electricity from affecting the
battery connections.
Discharge your body before you start taking any measurements on a module. Do so by
touching grounded metallic parts. Always use grounded measuring instruments.

3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs
Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 indicate module faults and backup battery faults via
LEDs on the front plate.
Overview of the error messages of the power supply modules
Table 3-6 Error messages of the power supply modules
Type of fault/error LED

Module error INTF
5 VDC
24 VDC
Backup battery fault Power supplies with 1 backup battery:
BAF
BATTF
Power supplies with 2 backup battery:
BAF
BATT1F
BATT2F

INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC LEDs

The following table shows the faults indicated by the INTF, 5 VDC, and 24 VDC LEDs and lists
how to remedy the faults. The status of the BAF, BATTF, BATT1F, and BATT2F LEDs is not
relevant here.
Table 3-7 INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC LEDs
INTF LED LED Cause of fault Remedy

LED DC5V DC24V
D D D Standby switch in position Set standby switch to the | posi‐
tion
Line voltage missing Check line voltage
Internal fault, power supply module Replace power supply module
defective
Cutoff after overvoltage on 5 V or Disconnect from mains and recon‐
non-permissible external supply nect after approximately 3 mi‐
nutes; if necessary, remove exter‐
nal supply
Power supply module operated in Install the power supply module in
wrong slot the correct slot (slot 1)
Short-circuit or overload on 5 V Switch off the power supply mod‐
ule, remove the source of the
short-circuit; after approximately 3
seconds, the power supply mod‐
ule can be switched on with the
standby switch or via the power
system.*
D H D Overvoltage on 24 V Check if there is an external sup‐
ply; if not, replace power supply
module.
H D* D Short-circuit or overload on 5 V and Check the load on the power sup‐
24 V and overheating ply module. Remove module if
necessary. Wait 5 minutes before
switching the power supply mod‐
ule again.
H H D If the standby switch is set to the Remove all modules; determine
position, illegal external supply on which module is faulty.
5V
If the standby switch is set to the | Check the load on the power sup‐
position, short-circuit or overload on ply module. Remove module if
24 V. necessary.
D B H Voltage restored after short-circuit or Press FMR button: Flashing
overload on 5 V if faults occur in op‐ changes to steady light
eration
Dynamic overload on 5 V Check load on the power supply
module. Possibly remove mod‐
ules.
D B B Voltage restored after short-circuit or Press FMR button: Flashing
overload on 5 V and 24 V if faults oc‐ changes to steady light
cur in operation

INTF LED LED Cause of fault Remedy

LED DC5V DC24V
D B B Dynamic overload on 5 V and 24 V Check load on the power supply
module. Possibly remove mod‐
ules.
D = LED is dark; H = LED lights up; B = LED flashing;
* If the power supply module does not start up again after a few seconds once the overload
has been removed, remove power to the module for 5 minutes and then switch it on again. If
the module stills does not start up, you must replace it. This applies to the following power
supply modules:
● 6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0, Release 3
● 6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0, Release ≤ 5
● 6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0, Release ≥ 10
● 6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0
● 6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0
● 6ES7405-0KR02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0
● 6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0
The same characteristic is displayed by the built-in overtemperature protection is triggered.
If either the 5 VDC or 24 VDC LEDs remains dark after switching on, the system has not
powered up.
If either of the 5 VDC or 24 VDC LEDs of the PS 407 10AR remains dark for longer than 1 or
2 seconds after it is switched on, the power supply module will not start up.
The following power supply modules will switch off in the event of a short-circuit or overload
after 1 to 3 seconds. The module will try to restart after no more than 3 seconds. If the error
has been eliminated by then, the module will start up. This applies to the following modules:
Modules
PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA01-0AA0) PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)
PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0) PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)
PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0),
release ≥5
PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0)
PS 405 10A R (6ES7405-0KR00-0AA0) PS 407 10A R (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0),
release ≥7
PS 405 10A R (6ES7405-0KR02-0AA0) PS 407 10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)
PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA01-0AA0) PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)
PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0) PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)

Overload at 24 V
In the event of overload at 24 V the output current is electronically limited to a value between
100% and 150% of the rated value. If the voltage then goes below the undervoltage threshold
of 19.2 V (-0/+ 5% corresponds to 19.2 V to 20.16 V), the modules respond as follows:
● For the power supply modules, the 24 V voltage is disconnected and reconnected at a
repeat rate of approx. 0.5 to 1 seconds until there is an output voltage that exceeds the
undervoltage threshold.
● For the power supply modules 6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0, 6ES740x-0KR00-0AA0 and
6ES740x-0KR01-0AA0, the voltage reaches the level determined by the load impedance,
the module is in the characteristic operating range.
After the overload has been eliminated, the voltage returns to the nominal range and the green
24 V LED flashes. The CPU sets the EXTF LED (external fault) and saves the fault in the
diagnostic buffer. You can trigger other responses, such as CPU STOP or a message to a
control room, in OB 81 (power supply error). If OB 81 is not configured, the CPU continues as
normal.
Overload at 5 V
In the event of an overload at 5 V, the power supply modules with 10 A or 20 A output current
can retain an output current of 16 A or 26 A for 300 ms. The power supply modules with 4 A
output current can retain an output current of 6 A for 300 ms. The CPU will then go to DEFECT
afterwards. If the 5 VDC LED flashes on the power supply and can be reset with the FMR
button, you will be able to perform a restart. The CPU will remain in STOP afterwards and will
then require a memory reset.
BAF, BATTF
The following table applies to power supply modules with one battery if the BATT.INDIC switch
is set to the BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the faults.
Table 3-8 BAF, BATTF; BATT.INDIC LEDs on BATT
LED LED Cause of fault Remedy

BAF BATF
H H Battery empty or missing. Insert new battery. Press FMR button.
No external backup voltage available
D H Battery is empty or missing. Insert new battery. Press FMR button.
Battery stored too long. Depassivate battery (see Installation Man‐
External backup voltage available. ual).
H D Battery in order. ● Fault after plugging in a module:
No backup voltage available (short-cir‐ Plugged-in module defective
cuit)
● Fault after switching on: Remove all
modules and plug in individually
D D Battery OK. -
External backup voltage available.
D = LED is dark; H = LED lights up;

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

The following table applies to power supply modules with two batteries if the BATT.INDIC
switch is set to the 1BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the
faults.
Nothing is indicated about the condition of any second battery that may be in use.
Table 3-9 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT.INDIC LEDs on 1BATT
LED LED LED Cause of fault Remedy

BAF BATT1F BATT2F
H H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in compartment 1.
No external backup voltage Press FMR button.
available.
D H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in compartment 1.
External backup voltage avail‐ Press FMR button.
able.
Battery stored too long. Depassivate battery (see Installation
External backup voltage avail‐ Manual)
able.
H D D Battery 1 OK. ● Fault after plugging in a module:
No external backup voltage Plugged-in module defective
available (short-circuit)
● Fault after switching on: Remove
all modules and plug in
individually
D D D Battery 1 OK. -
External backup voltage avail‐
able.
BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

The following table applies to power supply modules with two batteries if the BATT.INDIC
switch is set to the 2BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to remedy the
faults.
Table 3-10 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT.INDIC LEDs on 2BATT

BAF BATT1F BATT2F
H H H Both batteries are empty or Insert new batteries in compart‐
missing. ments 1 and 2 Press FMR button.
No external backup voltage
available
D H H Both batteries are empty or Insert new batteries in compart‐
missing. ments 1 and 2 Press FMR button.
able


BAF BATT1F BATT2F
H H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in compartment 1.
available (short-circuit or over‐ ● Fault after plugging in a module:
load) Plugged-in module defective
individually
D H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new batteries in compart‐
ments 1 and 2 Press FMR button.
Battery has been stored for too Depassivate battery (see Installation
long Manual).
able
H D H Battery 2 empty or missing Insert new battery in compartment 2.
available (short-circuit or over‐ ● Fault after plugging in a module:
load) Plugged-in module defective
individually
D D H Battery 2 empty or missing Insert new batteries in compart‐
ments 1 and 2 Press FMR button.
Battery has been stored for too Depassivate battery (see Installation
long Manual).
able
H D D Both batteries in order. ● Fault after plugging in a module:
No external backup voltage Plugged-in module defective
available (short-circuit)
individually
D D D Both batteries in order. -
able

3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA01-0AA0)
Function
The power module PS 407 4A is designed for connection to an 85 to 264 V AC network or an
88 to 300 V DC network, and supplies DC 5 V/4 A and DC 24 V/0.5 A at the secondary side.
PS 407 4A operator control and monitoring elements

36$
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
;

'$$$
,17)
%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77)
'&9 9'&9'&
'&9
)05EXWWRQ)DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW

)05
8QGHUFRYHU
%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW
%$77,1',& 6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$77
2))
%$77
2))
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
Figure 3-2 PS 407 4A operator control and monitoring elements
Mains connection
An AC power plug is used with PS 407 4A for connection to an AC network and for connection
to a DC network.
Reverse polarity of L+ and L-

Reverse polarity of L+ and L with a supply voltage of DC 88 V to DC 300 V does not affect the
function of the power supply. The connection should comply with the instructions in the
installation manual.

PS 407 4A technical specifications
Dimensions, weight and cable cross-sections

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x290x217
Weight 0.76 kg
Cable cross-section 3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule with insulating
sleeve; use hose line only)
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm
Input variables
Input voltage
● Rated value DC 120/240 V
AC 120/240 V
● Permitted range 88 to 300 V DC
85 to 264 V AC
(wide range input)
Line frequency
● Rated value 50/60 Hz
● Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz
Rated input current
● With 120 V AC 0.38 A
● With 120 V DC 0.37 A
● With 240 V AC 0.22 A
● With 240 V DC 0.19 A
Leakage current < 3.5 mA
Output variables
Output voltage
● Rated values 5.1 V DC/24 V DC
Output current
● Rated values 5 V DC: 4 A
24 V DC: 0.5 A
Parameters
Protection class pursuant to I, with protective conductor
IEC 60536
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Rated voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 V DC (secondary <-> PE)
150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V 2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Backup for power failures > 20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR recommendation
NE 21
Power consumption 240 V AC 52 W
Power loss 20 W
Backup current maximum of 100 µA when power off

Back-up battery (option) 1 x lithium AA, 3.6 V/2.3 Ah

Protective separation in accord‐ Yes
ance with IEC 61131-2

Function
The power module PS 407 4A is designed for connection to an 85 to 264 V AC network or an
88 to 300 V DC network, and supplies DC 5 V/4 A and DC 24 V/0.5 A at the secondary side.

36$
;

'$$$
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
,17)
%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77)
'&9 9'&9'&
'&9

)05
8QGHUFRYHU
%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW
%$77,1',& 6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$77
2))
%$77
2))
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
Mains connection
An AC power plug is used with PS 407 4A for connection to an AC network and for connection
to a DC network.

Reverse polarity of L+ and L with a supply voltage of 88 V DC to 300 V DC does not affect the
function of the power supply. The connection should comply with the instructions in the


Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x290x217
Weight 0.76 kg
Cable cross-section 3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule with insulating
sleeve; use hose line only)
Input variables
Input voltage
● Rated value 120/230 V DC
120/230 V AC
85 to 264 V AC
(wide range input)
Line frequency
Rated input current
● With 120 V AC 0.42 A
● With 120 V DC 0.35 A
● At 230 V AC 0.31 A
● At 230 V DC 0.19 A
Inrush current
● At 230 V AC Peak value 8.5 A
full width at half maximum 5 ms
● At 300 V DC Peak value 8.5 A
full width at half maximum 5 ms
Output variables
Output voltage
Output current
24 V DC: 0.5 A
Parameters
Protection class pursuant to I, with protective conductor
IEC 61140
Pollution degree 2
Backup for power failures > 20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR recommendation
NE 21
Power consumption 240 V AC 52 W

Power loss 20 W
Back-up battery (option) 1 x lithium AA, 3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation in accord‐ Yes
ance with IEC 61131-2

3.8 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0)
3.8 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA01-0AA0) and PS

10A R (6ES7407-0KR00-0AA0)
Function
The power modules PS 407 10A (standard) and PS 407 10A R (for redundant operation, see
Redundant power supply modules (Page 41)) are designed for connection to an 85-264 V AC
network or an 88-300 V DC network, and supply 5 V/10 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary
side.
PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R operator control and monitoring elements
36$

;

6HFXULQJVFUHZ
.$$$
/('GLVSOD\V,17)
,17)
%$)
%$77)
%$77) %$)%$77)%$77)
'&9
'&9'&9
'&9
)05

6WDQGE\VZLWFKQRGLVFRQQHFWLRQIURP
SRZHU
%$77 %$77
%HORZFRYHU

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',&
%$77
%$77,1',&VZLWFK
%$772))%$77
2))
%$77
SLQSOXJLQSRZHUVXSSO\FRQQHFWRU
6HFXULQJVFUHZ
Figure 3-4 PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R operator control and monitoring elements
Mains connection
An AC power plug is used with PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R both for connection to an AC
network and connection to a DC network.

Reverse polarity of L+ and L with a supply voltage of DC 88 V to DC 300 V does not affect the
function of the power supply. The connection must comply with the instructions in the

PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R technical specifications

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 50x290x217
Weight 1.36 kg
Cable cross-section 3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule with
Cable diameter insulating sleeve; use hose line only)
3 to 9 mm
Input variables
Input voltage
120/230 V AC
85 to 264 V AC
(wide range input)
Line frequency
Rated input current
● With 120 V AC 0.9 A
● At 110 V DC 1.0 A
● At 230 V AC 0.5 A
● At 230 V DC 0.5 A
Inrush current
● At 230 V AC Peak value 230 A, full width at half maximum
200 µs
peak value 63 A*, full width at half maximum 1 ms*
● At 300 V DC Peak value 230 A, full width at half maximum
200 µs
peak value 58 A*, full width at half maximum 1 ms*
Output variables
Output voltage
Output current
24 V DC: 1.0 A
Parameters
Protection class pursuant to IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor
Pollution degree 2

Backup for power failures > 20 ms

at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR recommen‐
dation NE 21
Power consumption 105 W, PS 407 10A from product version 5
105 W, PS 407 10A R from product version 7
95 W, PS 407 10A from product version 10
Power loss 29.7 W
20 W, PS 407 10A from product version 10
Back-up batteries (option) 2 x lithium AA,
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation in accordance with Yes
IEC 61131-2
*PS 407 10A: from product version 5
* PS 407 10A R: from product version 7


10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)
Function
The power modules PS 407 10A (standard) and PS 407 10A R (for redundant operation, see
Redundant power supply modules (Page 41)) are designed for connection to an 85-264 V AC
network or an 88-300 V DC network, and supply 5 V/10 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary
side.
36$

;

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
.$$$
/('V,17)%$)
,17)
%$)
%$77)
%$77) %$77)%$77)9
'&9
'&9'&
'&9
)05

%$77 %$77
8QGHUFRYHU

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
%$772))%$77
2))
%$77
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
Mains connection
An AC power plug is used with PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R both for connection to an AC
network and connection to a DC network.



Weight 1.2 kg
insulating sleeve; use hose line only)
Input variables
Input voltage
120/230 V AC
85 to 264 V AC
(wide range input)
Line frequency
Rated input current
● With 120 V AC 0.9 A
● With 120 V DC 1.0 A
● At 230 V AC 0.5 A
● At 230 V DC 0.5 A
Inrush current
● At 230 V AC Peak value 63 A, full width at half maximum 1 ms*
● At 300 V DC Peak value 58 A, full width at half maximum 1 ms*
Output variables
Output voltage
Output current
24 V DC: 1.0 A
Parameters
Pollution degree 2
Backup for power failures > 20 ms
at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR recommen‐
dation NE 21
Power consumption 95 W
Power loss 20 W


3.6 V/2.3 Ah
IEC 61131-2

3.10 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA01-0AA0)
Function
The power module PS 407 20A is designed for connection to an 85-264 V AC network or an
88-300 V DC network, and supply 5 V/20 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary side.

36$

;

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
5$$$
,17)
%$)
/('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77)
%$77)%$77)9
'&9
'&9'&
'&9
)05
8QGHUFRYHU
%$77 %$77

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
Figure 3-6 PS 407 20 A operator control and monitoring elements
Mains connection
An AC power plug is used with PS 407 20A both for connection to an AC network and for
connection to a DC network.



Weight 2.2 kg
Input variables
Input voltage
120/230 V AC
85 to 264 V AC
(wide range input)
Line frequency
Rated input current
● At 120 V AC/110 V DC 1.5 A
● At 230 V AC/230 V DC 0.8 A
Inrush current Peak value 88 A full width at half maximum 1.1 ms
Output variables
Output voltage
Output current
24 V DC: 1.0 A
Parameters
Pollution degree 2
Backup for power failures > 20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, meets NAMUR
recommendation NE 21
Power loss 44 W
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
IEC 61131-2

Function
The power module PS 407 20A is designed for connection to an 85-264 V AC network or an
88-300 V DC network, and supply 5 V/20 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary side.

36$
;

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
5$$$
,17)
%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)%$77)9
%$77)
%$77)
'&9 '&9'&
'&9

8QGHUFRYHU
%$77 %$77

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
Figure 3-7 PS 407 20A power module operator control and monitoring elements
Mains connection
An AC power plug is used with PS 407 20A both for connection to an AC network and for
connection to a DC network.



Weight 1.3 kg
Input variables
Input voltage
120/230 V AC
85 to 264 V AC
(wide range input)
Line frequency
Rated input current
● At 120 V AC/120 V DC 1.4 A
● At 230 V AC/230 V DC 0.7 A
Inrush current Peak value 88 A full width at half maximum 1.1 ms
Output variables
Output voltage
Output current
24 V DC: 1.0 A
Parameters
Pollution degree 2
Power loss 35 W
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
IEC 61131-2

Function
The PS 405 4A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line voltage of 19.2
to 72 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/4 A and 24 VDC/0.5 A on the secondary side.
Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 4A

36$
;
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
'$$$
,17)
%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77)
'&9 9'&9'&
'&9

8QGHUFRYHU
%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW
%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2)) %$772))
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
Figure 3-8 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 405 4A
Specifications of the PS 405 4A
Dimensions, weight, and cable cross-sections

Weight 0.76 kg
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire with wire end ferrule, use
component conductor or flexible sheath cable)
Input parameters
Input voltage
● Nominal value 24 VDC / 48 V / 60 V

● Permissible range Static: 19.2 to 72 VDC

Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 VDC
Nominal input current 2/1/0.8 A
Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN VDE 0160, curve B2
Output parameters
Output voltages
● Nominal values 5.1 / 24 VDC
Output currents
Nominal values 5 VDC: 4 A
24 VDC: 0.5 A
Electrical parameters
Protection class in accordance with IEC 60536 I, with protective conductor
Pollution degree 2
Nominal voltage Ue Test voltage
0 < Ue ≤ 50 V 700 VDC (secondary <-> PE)
150 V < Ue ≤ 300 V 2200 VDC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Buffering of power failures >20 ms at a repeat rate of 1 s, complies with the
NAMUR recommendation NE 21
Power consumption (24 VDC) 48 W
Power loss 16 W
Backup current Max. 100 µA at power off
Backup battery (option) 1 x Lithium AA,
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
Protective separation to IEC 61131-2 Yes

Function
The power module PS 405 4A is designed for connection to a 19.2 to 72 V DC network, and
supplies 5 V/4 A DC and 24 V/0.5 A DC at the secondary side.

36$
;
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
'$$$
,17)
%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77)
'&9 9'&9'&
'&9

8QGHUFRYHU
%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW
%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2)) %$772))
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Weight 0.76 kg
Cable cross-section 3x1.5 mm2 (stranded wire with wire end ferrule;
use single conductor or hose line)
Input variables
Input voltage

● Rated value 24 V/48 V/60 V DC

● Permitted range Static: 19.2 to 72 V DC
Dynamic: 18.5 to 75.5 V DC
Rated input current 2 A/1 A/0.8 A
Inrush current Peak value 18 A
Full width at half maximum 20 ms
Output variables
Output voltage
Output current
Rated values 5 V DC: 4 A
24 V DC: 0.5 A
Parameters
Pollution degree 2
Power consumption (24 V DC) 48 W
Power loss 16 W
Back-up battery (option) 1 x lithium AA,
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
IEC 61131-2

3.14 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA01-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R (405-0KR00-0AA0)

405 10A R (405-0KR00-0AA0)
Function
The power modules PS 405 10A (standard) and PS 405 10A R (for redundant operation) are
designed for connection to a 19.2-72 V DC network, and supply 5 V/10 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC
at the secondary side.
36$
;
0RXQWLQJVFUHZV

.$$$
/('V,17)%$)
,17)
%$)
%$77)
%$77) %$77)%$77)9
'&9
'&9'&
'&9
8QGHUFRYHU
%$77 %$77

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',&
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
%$77
2))
%$77
%$772))%$77
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZV

Weight 1.4 kg
Input variables
Input voltage


Rated input current 4.3 A/2.1 A/1.7 A
Output variables
Output voltage
Output current
24 V DC: 1.0 A
Parameters
Pollution degree 2
150 < Ue ≤ 300 V 2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Power loss 29 W
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
IEC 61131-2


405 10A R (405-0KR02-0AA0)
Function
The power modules PS 405 10A (standard) and PS 405 10A R (for redundant operation) are
designed for connection to a 19.2-72 V DC network, and supply 5 V/10 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC
at the secondary side.
36$

; 0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

.$$$
,17)
/('V,17)%$)
%$77)%$77)9
%$)
%$77)
%$77)
'&9'&
'&9
'&9
)05

8QGHUFRYHU
%$77 %$77

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',& 6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
%$77
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Weight 1.2 kg
Input variables
Input voltage


Output variables
Output voltage
Output current
24 V DC: 1.0 A
Parameters
Pollution degree 2
150 < Ue ≤ 300 V 2200 V DC (primary <-> secondary/PE)
Power loss 20 W
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
IEC 61131-2

Function
The power module PS 405 20A is designed for connection to a 19.2-72 V DC network, and
supplies 5 V/20 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary side.

36$
;

0RXQWLQJVFUHZV
5$$$
,17)
%$)
/('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77) %$77)%$77)9
'&9
'&9'&
'&9
)05

%$77 %$77
8QGHUFRYHU

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZV

Weight 2.2 kg
Input variables
Input voltage


Inrush current Peak value 56 A Full width at half maximum 1.5 ms
Output variables
Output voltage
Output current
24 V DC: 1.0 A
Parameters
Pollution degree 2
Power loss 51 W
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
IEC 61131-2

Function
The power module PS 405 20A is designed for connection to a 19.2-72 V DC network, and
supplies 5 V/20 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary side.

36$
;

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
5$$$
,17)
%$)
/('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77) %$77)%$77)9
'&9
'&9'&
'&9
)05

%$77 %$77
8QGHUFRYHU

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Weight 1.3 kg
Input variables
Input voltage


Inrush current Peak value 56 A Full width at half maximum 1.5 ms
Output variables
Output voltage
Output current
24 V DC: 1.0 A
Parameters
Pollution degree 2
Power loss 44 W
3.6 V/2.3 Ah
IEC 61131-2


Digital modules 4
4.1 Module overview
Characteristics of digital modules

The tables below summarize the essential characteristics of the digital modules. This overview
supports you in selecting a module to suit your requirements.
Table 4-1 Digital input modules: overview of features
Features SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421;

DI 32xDC DI 16xDC DI 16xAC DI 16xUC DI 16xUC DI 16xUC DI 32xUC
24 V 24 V 120 V 24/60 V 120/230 V 120/230 V 120 V
(-1BL0x-) (-7BH0x-) (-5EH00-) (-7DH00-) (-1FH00-) (-1FH20-) (-1EL00-)
Number of 32 DI; isolated 16 DI; isolated 16 DI; isolated 16 DI; isolated 16 DI; isola‐ 16 DI; isola‐ 32 DI; isola‐
inputs in groups of in groups of in groups of in groups of ted in ted in groups ted in groups
32 8 1 1 groups of of of
4 4 8
Nominal in‐ 24 VDC 24 VDC 120 VAC 24 to 60 VUC 120 VAC/ 120/230 VUC 120 VAC/DC
put voltage 230 VDC
Suitable Switches; 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
for...
Configura‐ No Yes No Yes No No No
ble
diagnostics
Diagnostic No Yes No Yes No No No
interrupt
Hardware No Yes No Yes No No No
interrupt at
edge transi‐
tion:
Adjustable No Yes No Yes No No No
input delays
Substitu‐ - Yes - - - - -
tion value
output
Special fea‐ High packag‐ Quick and Channel-spe‐ Interrupt ca‐ For high, var‐ For high, vari‐ High packag‐
tures ing density with interrupt cific isolation pability with iable voltag‐ able voltages ing density
capability low, variable es Input charac‐
voltages teristic curve
in accord‐
ance with IEC
61131-2

Digital modules
4.1 Module overview
Table 4-2 Digital output modules: overview of features
Features SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422;

DO 16xDC DO 16xDC DO 32xDC DO 32xDC DO 8xAC DO 16xAC DO 16xAC
24 V / 2 A 20-125 V/ 1.5 24 V / 0.5 A 24 V / 0.5 A 120/230 V/ 5 A 120/230 V/ 20-120 V/ 2 A
A (-1FF00) 2A (-5EH00)
(-1BH1x) (-5EH10) (-1BL00) (-7BL00) (-1FH00)
Number of 16 DO; isola‐ 16 DO; isola‐ 32 DO; isola‐ 32 DO; isola‐ 8 DO; isolated 16 DO; iso‐ 16 DO; isola‐
outputs ted in groups ted and re‐ ted in groups ted in groups in groups of 1 lated in ted in
of 8 verse polarity of of groups of groups of
protection in 32 8 4 1
groups of 8
Output cur‐ 2A 1.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 5A 2A 2A
rent
Nominal 24 VDC 20 to 125 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230 20 to 120
load voltage VAC VAC
Configura‐ No Yes No Yes No No Yes
ble
diagnostics
Diagnostic No Yes No Yes No No Yes
interrupt
Substitu‐ No Yes No Yes No No Yes
tion value
output
Special fea‐ For high cur‐ For variable High packag‐ Particularly For high cur‐ - For variable
tures rents voltages ing quick and with rents with currents
density interrupt capa‐ channel- spe‐ with chan‐
bility cific isolation nel-specific
isolation
Table 4-3 Relay output module: overview of features
Features SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

(-1HH00)
Number of outputs 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
Load voltage 125 VDC
230 VAC
Special features -

Digital modules
4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules
4.2 Steps in selecting and commissioning the digital module
Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to
commission digital modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier or
later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install, commission etc. other modules
in between times.
Overview of steps in selecting and commissioning the digital module
Step Procedure
1 Select the module. Section 4.1 (Page 83) and special sections for
modules beginning with Section 4.7 (Page 97)
2 Mount the module in the rack. "Installing" section in the Automation System
S7-400, Hardware and Installation manual
3 Assigning module parameters Section 4.3 (Page 85) and special sections for
modules beginning with Section 4.7
4 Commissioning the configuration "Commissioning" section in the Automation
System S7-400, Hardware and Installation
manual
5 Analyzing the configuration if commission‐ Section 4.4 (Page 88)
ing is not successful
4.3.1 Parameters
Introduction
Digital modules may have different features. You can configure the features of some modules.
Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to digital modules in STEP 7.
After you have defined all parameters, download these from your programming device to the
CPU. On a transition from STOP ＞ RUN mode, the CPU then transfers the parameters to the
individual digital modules.
Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.

Digital modules
Static parameters are passed to digital modules after a STOP ＞ RUN transition of the CPU,
as described above.
You may also edit dynamic parameters in the active user program of an S7 PLC using SFCs.
However, the parameters set in STEP 7 will be applied again after a RUN > STOP, STOP >
RUN transition of the CPU. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules
in the user program in the Appendix.
Configuration in RUN (CiR)

CiR (Configuration in RUN) is a method you can use to modify your system or edit the
parameters of individual modules. These changes are made while your system is in operation,
that is, your CPU will stay in RUN over a maximum of 2.5 seconds while these changes are
applied.
For detailed information on this topic, refer to the "Configuration in RUN by means of CiR"
manual. This manual is found, for example, as a file in PDF format on the STEP 7 CD supplied.

Digital modules
4.3.2 Parameters of digital input modules
Overview
The configurable digital input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values
listed in the table below, depending on functionality. For information on subsets "supported"
by specific digital modules, refer to the chapter dealing with the relevant module. Do not forget
that some digital modules have different input delays after parameter assignment.
The defaults apply if you have not set any parameters in STEP 7.
Table 4-4 Parameters of digital input modules
Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter Scope

type
Enable
● Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
● Hardware interrupt 1 Yes/no No
● Destination CPU for 1 to 4 - Static Module
interrupt
Diagnostics
● Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel
● No load voltage L+/sensor Yes/no No
supply
Hardware interrupt trigger
● Positive edge Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
● Negative edge Yes/no No
Input delay 0.1 ms (DC) 3 (DC) Static Channel
0.5 ms (DC)
3 ms (DC)
20 ms (DC/AC)
Reaction to error Set substitution SV Dynamic Module
value (SSV)
Keep last value
(KLV)
Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel 3
1
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines
are not available in ER-1/ER-2.
2
Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings and
without support from HWCONFIG.
3
Channels not selected for substitute value "1" are assigned substitute value "0".

Digital modules
4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules
4.3.3 Parameters of digital output modules
Overview
The configurable digital output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values
listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. For information on subsets "supported"
by specific digital modules, refer to the section dealing with the relevant module beginning with
section 4.7.
Table 4-5 Parameters of digital output modules
Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter type Scope

Enable
interrupt
Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a val‐ SV Dynamic Module
ue (SV)
Keep last value
(KLV)
Diagnostics
● Load voltage L+ Yes/no No
missing
● Short-circuit to M Yes/no No
● Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no No
● Fuse blown Yes/no No
Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel 3
1
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines
are not available in ER-1/ER-2.
2
Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings and
without support from HWCONFIG.
3
Channels not selected for substitute value "1" are assigned substitute value "0".
4.4.1 General information about diagnostic messages
Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

Using the diagnostics function, we make a distinction between programmable and non-
programmable diagnostic messages.

Digital modules
You only obtain programmable diagnostic messages if you have enabled the diagnostics using
the relevant parameters. You perform parameter assignment in the "Diagnostics" tab in STEP
7, see section 6.7.
Digital modules always return non-programmable diagnostic messages, irrespective of
diagnostics being enabled.
Reactions to diagnostic messages in STEP 7

Actions initiated by diagnostic messages:
● The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnostics of the digital module, forwarded to
the CPU and can be read out by the user program.
● The fault LED on the digital module lights up.
● If you have set "Enable diagnostic interrupt" in STEP 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered
and OB 82 is called, see section 5.5.
Reading diagnostic messages

You can read detailed diagnostic messages using SFCs in the user program (refer to the
appendix "Diagnostic data of signal modules").
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7 in the module diagnostics (refer to the online
help for STEP 7).
Diagnostics using the INTF and EXTF LEDs

Some digital modules indicate faults by means of their two fault LEDs INTF (internal fault) and
EXTF (external fault). The LEDs go out when all the internal and external faults have been
eliminated.
Refer to the specifications of the modules beginning with section 5.7 to find out which digital
modules have these fault LEDs.
See also
General information about parameter assignment (Page 199)
Interrupts of the digital modules (Page 93)

Digital modules
4.4.2 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules
Overview
The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the digital modules with
diagnostics capability.
You can find out which diagnostic message each module is capable of in the Appendix entitled
"Diagnostic data of the signal modules".
Table 4-6 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules
Diagnostic message LED Scope of diagnostics Programmable

Module error INTF/EXTF Module No
Internal error INTF Module No
External error EXTF Module No
Channel error INTF/EXTF Module No
External auxiliary voltage missing EXTF Module No
Front connector missing EXTF Module No
No module parameters INTF Module No
Incorrect parameters INTF Module No
Channel information available INTF/EXTF Module No
STOP mode - Module No
Internal voltage failure INTF Module No
EPROM error INTF Module No
Hardware interrupt lost INTF Module No
Parameter assignment error INTF Channel No
Short-circuit to M EXTF Channel Yes
Short-circuit to L+ EXTF Channel Yes
Wire break EXTF Channel Yes
Fuse blown INTF Channel Yes
Sensor supply missing EXTF Channel/channel Yes
group
Load voltage L+ missing EXTF Channel/channel Yes
group
Note
Prerequisite for detecting errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is an
appropriate configuration of the digital module in STEP 7.

Digital modules
4.4.3 Causes of errors and remedies for digital modules
Overview
Table 4-7 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules, causes of errors and remedies
Diagnostic message Possible cause of error Remedy

Module error Any, the module has detected an -
error.
Internal error Module has detected an error within -
the automation system.
External error Module has detected an error out‐ -
side of the automation system.
Channel error Indicates that only certain channels -
are faulty.
External auxiliary volt‐ Voltage required to operate the Supply missing voltage
age missing module is missing (load voltage,
sensor supply).
Front connector miss‐ Jumper between connections 1 and Install jumper
ing 2 in the front connector is missing.
No module Module requires information wheth‐ Message queued after power-on until
parameters er it should operate with default sys‐ parameter transmission by the CPU has
tem parameters or with your param‐ been completed; configure the module,
eters. as required.
Incorrect parameters One parameter, or the combination Reassign parameters to the module
of parameters, is not plausible.
Channel information Channel error; module can provide -
available additional channel information.
STOP mode No parameters have been as‐ If after rebooting the CPU all the input
signed to the module and the first values are in the intermediate memory,
module cycle has not been comple‐ this message is reset.
ted.
Internal voltage failure Module is defective Replace the module
EPROM error Module is defective Replace the module
Hardware interrupt The module cannot send an inter‐ Change the interrupt handling in the
lost rupt, since the previous interrupt CPU (change priority for interrupt OB;
was not acknowledged; possible shorten interrupt program).
configuration error.
Parameter assign‐ Incorrect parameters transferred to Reassign parameters to the module
ment error the module (for example, impossi‐
ble input delay); the corresponding
channel is deactivated.
Short-circuit to M Overload at output Eliminate overload
Short-circuit of output to M Check the wiring of the outputs.
Short-circuit to L+ Short-circuit of output to L+ Check the wiring of the outputs.

Digital modules

Wire break Lines interrupted Connect the cable
No external sensor supply Wire sensors with10 to 18 kΩ.
Channel not connected (open) Disable the "Diagnostics – Wire break"
parameter for the channel in STEP 7.
Wire the channel
Fuse blown One or more fuses on the module Remove the overload and replace the
has blown and caused this fault. fuse.
Sensor supply missing Overload at sensor supply Eliminate overload
Short-circuit of sensor supply to M Eliminate the short-circuit.
Load voltage L+ miss‐ Power supply L+ to module missing Feed in supply voltage L+.
ing Fuse in module is defective Replace the module

Digital modules
4.5 Interrupts of the digital modules
Introduction
This section describes the interrupt behavior of the digital modules. There are two types of
interrupt:
● Diagnostic interrupt
● Hardware interrupt
Note that not all digital modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable of a subset
of the interrupts described here. For information on the digital modules that support interrupts,
refer to their specifications.
For detailed information on the OBs and SFCs mentioned below, refer to the STEP 7 Online
Help.
Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset - in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter
assignment. Interrupts are enabled in STEP 7.
Special feature: The module is inserted in ER-1/ER-2
Note
If you use the digital module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set the parameters for enabling all the
interrupts to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2.
Diagnostic interrupt
When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, incoming error events (initial occurrence) and
outgoing error events (error is cleared) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts user program execution, and executes diagnostic interrupt OB82.
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic
information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is
exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
Hardware interrupt
A digital input module can trigger a hardware interrupt for each channel at a rising or falling
edge, or both, of a signal status change.
You perform parameter assignment for each channel separately. The parameters can be
changed at any time (in RUN mode in the user program.)

Digital modules
Pending hardware interrupts trigger hardware interrupt processing in the CPU (OB 40 to OB
47). The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or the priority classes with low
priority.
In the user program of the hardware interrupt OB (OB 40 to OB 47) you can specify how the
programmable controller is to respond to an edge change. The module acknowledges the
hardware interrupt when the program exits the hardware interrupt OB.
For each channel the digital input module can buffer an interrupt that has not been triggered.
If no run levels of a higher priority class are pending processing, the CPU processes the
buffered interrupts (of all modules) in the order of their occurrence.
Hardware interrupt lost

A "Hardware interrupt lost" diagnostics interrupt is generated, if a successive interrupt occurs
at the same channel before the CPU has processed the previously buffered interrupt.
The CPU does not register any further interrupts at this channel unless it has completed
processing of the stacked interrupts of the same channel.
Interrupt-triggering channels
The interrupt-triggering channels are stored in the local data of the hardware interrupt OBs (in
the start information of the corresponding OB). The start information is two words long (bits 0
to 31). The bit number is the channel number. Bits 16 to 31 are not assigned.
See also

Digital modules
4.6 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs
IEC 61131, type 1 and type 2

The IEC 61131 standard requires the following for the input current:
● In the case of type 2, an input current of ≥ 2 mA already at + 5 V
● In the case of type 1, an input current of ≥ 0.5 mA already at + 5 V
EN 60947-5-2, 2-wire BEROs

The standard for BEROs (EN 60947-5-2) specifies that there can be a current of ≤ 1.5 mA for
BEROs in the "0" signal state.
The input current of the module in the "0" signal state is decisive for the operation of 2-wire
BEROs. This must be in accordance with BERO requirements.

Digital modules
Input characteristic curve for digital inputs

As long as the current flowing into the module remains ≤ 1.5 mA, the module recognizes this
as a "0" signal.
Typ. switching threshold(9.5 V)
I E (mA) Resistance characteristic curve
7
I min to IEC 61131; type 2
6
BERO
standard
I < 1,5 mA
2 I min to IEC 61131; type 1

1,5
0,5
0 5 11 13 15 24 30 L+ (V)
- 30 V
“0” “1”
L+
1
2-wire BERO
0 --> “0” Signal
I < 1,5 mA
PLC input resistance
Figure 4-1 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs

Digital modules
4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)
Properties
Key properties of the SM 421; DI 32 x 24 V DC:
● 32 inputs, isolated in a group of 32
● Rated input voltage 24 V DC
● Suitable for switches and 2-/3-/4-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131; type 1)
The status LEDs indicate the process status.

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 32 x 24 V DC
Process Module
1
2
L+ 3
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3
8 4
9 5
10 6
11 7 M
12
13
14
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
20 5
Data register and bus control

21 6
22 7
23
24
25
26
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35
36
37
38
39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47
M 48 M
Figure 4-2 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 32 x 24 V DC
Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V
Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight ca. 500 g
Module-specific data

Digital modules
Number of inputs 32
Cable length
● unshielded Maximum 600 m
● shielded max. 1000 m
Voltage, current and potential
Rated supply voltage of electronics L+ Not required
Number of inputs that can be enabled simultaneously 32
Electrical isolation
● Between channels and backplane bus Yes
● Between channels No
Permissible potential difference
● Between different circuits 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)
Insulation tested at
● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+ 500 Vac or 707 Vdc (type test)
Current consumption
● from backplane bus (5 V) 20 mA maximum
Module power loss Typ. 6 W
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Substitute values can be connected No
Data for selecting a sensor
Input voltage
● Rated value 24 V DC
● For "1" signal 13 to 30 V
● For "0" signal -30 to 5 V
Input current
● For "1" signal 7 mA
Input delay
● For "0" to "1" 1.2 to 4.8 ms
● For "1" to "0" 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Input characteristic In accordance with IEC 61131-2; type 1
Connection of 2-wire BEROs Possible
● Permissible quiescent current Maximum 1.5 mA

Digital modules
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

(6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)
4.8.1 Features
Overview
SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC has the following properties:
● 16 inputs, isolated in 2 groups of 8
● Rapid signal processing Input filter from 50 µs
● Rated input voltage 24 V DC
● Suitable for switches and 2-/3-/4-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131-2; type 2)
● 2 short-circuit proof sensor supplies for 8 channels each
● External redundant supply for sensor supply possible
● Status display "Sensor voltage (Vs) O.K."
● Group fault display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)
● Configurable diagnostics
● Configurable diagnostic interrupt
● Configurable hardware interrupts
● Configurable input delays
● Configurable substitute values in the input range
Note
The module spare parts are compatible with SM 421 module; DI 16 x 24 V DC;
(6ES7 421-7BH00-0AB0)
To use the new function "Input delay 50 µs", you require STEP7 from V 5.2.

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC
INTF Front connector monitoring

1 Monitoring of external auxiliary voltage 1L+
2 EXTF
1L+ Monitoring of internal voltage
3 1L+ 1L+
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2
9
10 3
11
24 V 12
13 1Vs 1M
14 1L+
Backplane bus connection

Short-circuit
15 4
protection
16
17 5 Monitoring of encoder supply 1Vs
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
1M 1M
23 1M
24 1M Monitoring of external auxiliary voltage 2L+
2L+ 25 2L+ Monitoring of internal voltage
26 2L+ 2L+
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
24 V 35 2M
36
37 2Vs Short-circuit 2L+
protection
38
39 4
Monitoring of encoder supply 2Vs
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46
2M 47 2M
48 2M 2M
M
L+
24 V
Figure 4-3 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC

Digital modules
Connection diagram for redundant sensor supply

The image below shows how sensors can be supplied with a redundant voltage source over
Vs (e.g. through another module).
L+
1 L+
Short-circuit-
proof driver Vs
2 L+
Digital input M
module ±
to the sensors
Figure 4-4 Connection diagram for redundant sensor supply for SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC
Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC

Weight ca. 600 g
Number of inputs 16
Cable length
● Unshielded, input delay
0.1 ms 20 m maximum
0.5 ms 50 m maximum
3 ms 600 m maximum
● Shielded, input delay

0.1 ms 30 m maximum
0.5 ms 70 m maximum
3 ms 1000 m maximum

Rated supply voltage of electronics and sensor L+ 24 V DC
● Reverse polarity protection Yes
● Between channels and electronics power supply No
● Between channels Yes
in groups of 8
● channels against rear panel and load voltage L+ 500 V DC
● Between channel groups 500 V DC
Current consumption
● from backplane bus (5 V) 130 mA maximum

Digital modules
● from supply voltage L+ 120 mA maximum

Interrupts
● Hardware interrupt Configurable
● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable
Diagnostic functions
● Supply voltage monitoring for electronics Yes
● Load voltage monitoring Green LED per group
● Group fault display
for internal fault red LED (INTF)
for external fault red LED (EXTF)
● Channel fault display None
● Diagnostic information can be read out Yes
Monitoring for
● Wire break I < 1 mA
Substitute values can be connected Yes
Sensor supply outputs
Number of outputs 2
Output voltage
● loaded At least L+(-2.5 V)
Output current
● Rated value 120 mA
● Permitted range 0 to 150 mA
Additional (redundant) supply Possible
Short-circuit protection Yes, electronic
Input voltage
● Rated value 24 V DC
● For "0" signal -30 to 5 V
Input current
● For "1" signal 6 to 12 mA
● For "0" signal < 6 mA
Input characteristic In accordance with IEC 61131; type 2
● Permissible quiescent current 3 mA maximum
Time, frequency
Internal preparation time for
1

Digital modules
● Status recognition only

Input delay for channel groups 0.05 ms/0.05 ms Maximum 50 µs
Input delay for channel groups 0.05 ms/0.1 ms or
0.1 ms/0.1 ms Maximum 70 µs
Input delay for channel groups ≥ 0.5 ms
Maximum 180 µs
● Status recognition and hardware interrupt enable
Input delay for channel groups 0.05 ms/0.05 ms 2) Maximum 60 µs
Input delay for channel groups 0.05 ms/0.1 ms or
0.1 ms/0.1 ms Maximum 80 µs
Input delay for channel groups ≥ 0.5 ms
Maximum 190 µs
Internal processing time for diagnostics/diagnostic inter‐ Maximum 5 ms
rupt
Input delay
● Configurable Yes
● Rated value 0.05 / 0.1 /0.5 / 3 ms
● Input frequency < 2kHz
(with 0.1 ms delay time)
Values included in cycle and response times.
Sensor circuit
Sensor resistor circuit for wire-break monitoring 10 to 18 kΩ
1
The filter times for the selected input delay are added to the total runtime.
2
Substitute value function; diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt must not be selected.

Digital modules
4.8.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general configuration of digital modules in section 5.3.
Parameters of SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
The table below shows an overview of configurable parameters and their default settings for
SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V.
Table 4-8 Parameters of SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

type
Enable
● Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module
Diagnostics
● No load voltage L+/sensor supply Yes/no No Channel group
● Positive edge Yes/no - Dynamic Channel
● Negative edge Yes/no
Input delay 0.05 ms 3 ms Static Channel group
0.1 ms
0.5 ms
3 ms
Reaction to error Set substitution val‐ SV Dynamic Module
ue (SSV)
Hold last value (HLV)
Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
1
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in
ER-1/ER-2.
2
Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.
Allocating the sensor supplies to channel groups

The two sensor supplies of the module are used to supply two channel groups: Inputs 0 to 7
and inputs 8 to 15. You also configure diagnostics for the sensor supply at those two channel
groups.

Digital modules
Ensuring a wire break check is carried out

To ensure that a wire break check is carried out, you require an external sensor circuit using
a resistor of 10 to 18 kΩ. The resistor should be connected parallel to the contact and should
be arranged as closely as possible to the sensor.
This additional resistor is not required in the following cases:
● If 2-wire BEROs are used
● If you do no configure the "Wire break" diagnostics
Setting the input delay for channel groups

You can only set the input delay for each group of channels. In other words, the setting for
channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15.
Note
The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels (1 to 7 and 9 to 15) must be equal
to the value 0 or 8, otherwise those channels will be reported as being incorrectly configured.
Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after
acknowledgement.
Optimum signal propagation delays

You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings:
● Both channel groups are configured with an input delay of 50 µs
● All the diagnoses (load voltage error, wire break) are deactivated
● Diagnostic interrupt is not enabled
See also
Parameters (Page 85)

Digital modules
4.8.3 Behavior of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Effect of operating mode and supply voltage on the input values

The input values of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC depend on the operating mode of the CPU and
on the supply voltage of the module.
Table 4-9 Relationships of the analog input values on the CPU's operating state and on the L+ supply
voltage
CPU operating state Power supply L+ at digital module Input value of digital module
POWER ON RUN L+ present Process value
L+ missing 0 signal*
STOP L+ present Process value
L+ missing 0 signal*
POWER OFF - L+ present -
L+ missing -
* Depends on the parameter assignment
Reaction to failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC is always indicated by the EXTF
LED on the module. This information is also available on the module (entry in diagnostic data.)
Diagnostics interrupt triggering is based on parameter settings.
Short-circuit at the sensor supply Vs

The relevant Vs LED goes dark if a short-circuit is detected at the sensor supply Vs, irrespective
of parameter settings.
Effect of errors and parameter assignment on the input values

The input values of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC are affected by certain errors and the parameter
assignment of the module. The following table lists the effects on the input values.
You can find more diagnostic messages in the Appendix "Diagnostic Data of the Signal
Modules".
Table 4-10 Relationships between the input values of errors and the configuration
Diagnostic message "Diagnostics" "Reaction to Error" Input value of digital module

parameter parameter
No module parame‐ Cannot be disa‐ Not relevant 0 signal (all channels)
ters bled
Front connector miss‐ Substitute a value Configured substitute value
ing (SV)
KLV Last read, valid value

Digital modules
Diagnostic message "Diagnostics" "Reaction to Error" Input value of digital module

parameter parameter
Incorrect parameters Cannot be disa‐ Not relevant 0 signal (module/all incorrectly config‐
(module/channel) bled ured channels)
Internal voltage failure Cannot be disa‐ Substitute a value Configured substitute value
bled (SV)
Hardware interrupt Cannot be disa‐ Not relevant Current process value
lost bled
Wire break (for each Disabled - 0 signal
channel) Activated Substitute a value Configured substitute value
(SV)
Sensor supply miss‐ Disabled - 0 signal
ing (also activated via Activated Substitute a value Configured substitute value
"No Load Voltage L+") (SV)
No load voltage L+ Disabled - 0 signal, if the contact is connected via
(for each channel the sensor supply; process value for
group) the external sensor supply
Activated Substitute a value Configured substitute value
(SV)
Behavior when the input delay equals 0.1 ms or 0.05 ms and an error occurs
If you have set the following parameters:
● Input delay: 0.1 ms or 0.05 ms
● Reaction to error: "Keep Last Value" (KLV) or "Substitute Value" (SV)
● Set substitution value "1"
In the event of a fault on a channel that has a 1 signal, the following could occur:
● A 0 signal may be briefly output
● If configured, a hardware interrupt may be generated.
This occurs before the last valid value or substitute value "1" is output.

Digital modules
4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V (6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0)
4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V

(6ES7421-5EH00-0AA0)
Features
The SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V has the following features:
● 16 inputs, isolated
● Nominal input voltage 120 VAC
● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131; type 2)

Digital modules
Wiring diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V
Process Module
1
2
Byte 0 3
4 0 Adaptation
5 1N
6 1 Adaptation
7 2N
8 2 Adaptation
9 3N
10 3 Adaptation
11 4N
12
13
14
15 4 Adaptation
16 5N
17 5 Adaptation
18 6N
19 6 Adaptation

20 7N
21 7 Adaptation
22 8N
23
24
25
Byte 1 26
27 0 Adaptation
28 9N
29 1 Adaptation
30 10N
31 2 Adaptation
32 11N
33 3 Adaptation
34 12N
35
36
37
38
39 4 Adaptation
40 13N
41 5 Adaptation
42 14N
43 6 Adaptation
44 15N
45 7 Adaptation
46 16N
47
48
Figure 4-5 Wiring diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120
Specifications of SM 421; DI 16 x AC 120 V

Weight Approx. 650 g

Digital modules
Number of inputs 16
Cable length
● Unshielded 600 m
● Shielded 1000 m
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Number of simultaneously controlled inputs 16
● Between channels and the backplane bus Yes
In groups of 1
● Between Minternal and the inputs 120 VAC
● Between inputs of different groups 250 VAC
Isolation test voltage 1500 VAC
Current consumption
● From the backplane bus (5 V) Max. 100 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 3.0 W
Interrupts None
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
● Nominal value 120 V
● For "1" signal 72 to 132 VAC
● Frequency band 47 to 63 Hz
Input current
● With "1" signal 6 to 20 mA
Input delay
● At "0" to "1" transitions 2 to 15 ms
● With "1" to "0" 5 to 25 ms
Input characteristics In accordance with IEC 61131; type 2
Connection of 2-wire BEROs Supported
● Permissible quiescent current Max. 4 mA

Digital modules
4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)
4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

(6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)
4.10.1 Features
Overview
SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V has the following features:
● 16 inputs, individually isolated
● Rated input voltage UC 24 V to UC 60 V
● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
● Suitable as P-reading and M-reading input
● Configurable hardware interrupts
● Configurable input delays

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Process Module
1 INTF
Front connector jumper
2 EXTF
3
L 4 Input
0 Adaptation
N 5 Diagnostics
1N
L 6 Input
1 Adaptation Diagnostics
N 7
L 2N Input
8 2
N Adaptation Diagnostics
9 3N
L 10 Input
3 Adaptation Diagnostics
N 11 4N
12
13
14
L 15 Input
4 Adaptation
N 16 Diagnostics
L 5N
17 Input
5 Adaptation
N 18 Diagnostics
L 6N Input
19 6
20 7N
L 21 Input
7

22 8N
23
24
25
26
L 27 Input
0 Adaptation
N Diagnostics
28 9N
L 29 Input
1 Adaptation
N 30 Diagnostics
L 10 N Input
31 2
32 11 N
L 33 Input
3 Adaptation
N 34 Diagnostics
12 N
35
36
37
38
L 39 Input
4 Adaptation
N 40 Diagnostics
L 13 N
41 Input
5 Adaptation
N 42 Diagnostics
L 14 N Input
43 6
44 15 N
L 45 Input
7
46 16 N
47
48
Figure 4-6 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Weight ca. 600 g

Digital modules
Number of inputs 16
Cable length
● Unshielded, input delay
0.5 ms Maximum 100 m
3 ms Maximum 600 m
10 / 20 ms Maximum 600 m
● Cable length, shielded 1000 m

in groups of 1
● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+ 1500 V AC
● Between channels 1500 V AC
Current consumption
● from backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 150 mA
Interrupts
Diagnostic functions Configurable
for internal fault red LED (INTF)
for external fault red LED (EXTF)
● Channel fault display None
● Diagnostic information can be read out Possible
Monitoring for
● Wire break I > 0.7 mA
Input voltage
● Rated value UC 24 to 60 V
● For "1" signal 15 to 72 V DC
- 15 to -72 V DC
15 to 60 V AC
● For "0" signal DC - 6 to +6 V
AC 0 to 5 V
Frequency range DC/AC 47 to 63 Hz

Digital modules
Input current
● For "1" signal Typ. 4 to 10 mA
Input characteristic as IEC 61131-2 1)
● Permissible quiescent current Maximum 0.5 to 2 mA2)
Time, frequency
Internal processing time for
● hardware interrupt enable only Maximum 450 µs
● Hardware and diagnostic interrupt enable Maximum 2 ms
Input delay
● Rated value 0.5 / 3 / 10 / 20 ms
Values included in cycle and response times.
Sensor circuit
Sensor resistor circuit for wire-break monitoring
● Rated voltage 24 V(15 to 35 V) 18 kΩ
1
IEC 61131-2 does not specify any data for UC modules. The values were, however, adjusted as far
as possible to IEC 61131-2.
2
Minimum quiescent current is required for wire break monitoring.

Digital modules
4.10.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
You will find a description of the general configuration of digital modules in section 5.3.
Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

The following table contains an overview of the parameters you can set and their default
settings for the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V.
Table 4-11 Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Enable
● Hardware interrupt1 Yes/no No
Diagnostics
● Positive edge yes/no - Dynamic Channel
yes/no
● Negative edge
Input delay3 0.5 ms (DC) 3 ms (DC) Static Channel group
3 ms (DC)
20 ms (DC/AC)
1
ER-1/ER-2.
2
3
If you assign 0.5 ms , then you should not configure diagnostics because the internal processing time for diagnostic functions
can be > 0.5 ms.
Ensuring a wire break check is carried out

To ensure that a wire break check is carried out, you require an external sensor circuit using
a resistor of 18 to 56 kΩ. The resistor should be connected parallel to the contact and should
be arranged as closely as possible to the sensor.
This additional resistor is not required in the following cases:
● If 2-wire BEROs are used
● If you do no configure the "Wire Break" diagnostics

Digital modules
Setting the input delay for channel groups

You can only set the input delay for each group of channels. In other words, the setting for
channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15.
Note
The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels (1 to 7 and 9 to 15) must be equal
to the value 0 or 8, otherwise those channels will be reported as being incorrectly configured.
Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after
acknowledgement.
Optimum signal propagation delays

You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings:
● Both channel groups are configured with an input delay of 0.5 ms
● The diagnostics parameter is disabled
● The diagnostic interrupt parameter is disabled
Circuit as for active high or active low input
DI_x
Channel x of the
SM 421 DI 16xUC 24/60 V
DI_xN
U_s
Active high Source input

L+ L+
"1" "0"
U_s U_s
"0"
0V 0V
U_s
"1"
"1"
- L+ - L+
Input threshold
Figure 4-7 Circuit as for active high or active low input

Digital modules
See also

Digital modules
4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0)
4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7

421-1FH00-0AA0)
Features
The SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 is characterized by the following features:
● Nominal input voltage 120/230 VUC
● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches

Digital modules
Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V
Process 1 Module
2
3
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2

9
10 3
11
12
13 1N
14
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
23
24 2N
25
26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
35
36 3N
37
38
39 4
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46
47
48 4N
Figure 4-8 Wiring and block diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V
Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Number of inputs 16

Digital modules
Cable length
● Unshielded 600 m
● Shielded 1000 m
Number of simultaneously controlled inputs 16 at 120 V
8 at 240 V
16 with fan subassembly
In groups of 4
● between Minternal and inputs 230 VAC
● Between inputs of different groups 500 VAC
Insulation resistance 4000 VAC
Current consumption
Power loss of the module Typ. 3.5 W
Interrupts None
Sensor selection data
Input voltage
● Nominal value 120/230 VUC
● For "1" signal 79 to 264 V AC
80 to 264 V DC
● For "0" signal 0 to 48 V UC
● Frequency band 47 to 63 Hz
Input current
Input delay
● At "0" to "1" transitions 5 to 25 ms
● With "1" to "0" 5 to 25 ms
Input characteristics In accordance with IEC 61131-2; Type 1
Connection of 2-wire BEROs Supported
● Permissible quiescent current Max. 1 mA

Digital modules
4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)
4.12 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

(6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)
Properties
SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V has the following features:
● 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 4
● Rated input voltage UC 120/230 V
● Input characteristic in accordance with IEC 61131-2; type 2
● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs)

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V
Process 1 Module
2
3
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2

9
10 3
11
12
13 1N
14
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
23
24 2N
25
26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
35
36 3N
37
38
39 4
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46
47
48 4N
Figure 4-9 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V
Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Weight ca. 650 g
Number of inputs 16
Cable length
● unshielded 600 m

Digital modules
● shielded 1000 m
Rated supply voltage of electronics L+ None
in groups of 4
● Between Mintern and the inputs 250 V AC (reinforced insulation)
Test voltage:
4000 Vac (type test)
2400 AC (routine test)
● Between inputs of different groups 500 V AC (basic insulation)
Test voltage:
2400 Vac (routine test)
Current consumption
● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 80 mA
Interrupts None
Input voltage
● Rated value UC 120/230 V
80 to 264 V DC
-80 to -264 V DC
-40 to +40 V DC
Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
Input current
● For "1" signal (120 V) Typ. 10 mA AC
Typ. 1.8 mA DC
● For "1" signal (230 V) Typ. 14 mA AC
Typ. 2 mA DC
● For "0" signal 0 to 6 mA AC
0 to 2 mA DC
Input delay
● For "0" to "1" Maximum 20 ms AC
Maximum 15 ms DC

Digital modules
● For "1" to "0" Maximum 30 ms AC

Maximum 25 ms DC
Input characteristic In accordance with IEC 61131-2; type 2
● Permissible quiescent current Maximum 5 mA AC

Digital modules
4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)
4.13 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V

(6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)
Properties
SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V has the following features:
● Rated input voltage UC 120 V
● Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V
Process 1 Module
2
3
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3
8 4
9 5
10 6
11 7
12
13 1N

14
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
20 5
21 6
22 7
23
24 2N
25
26
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35
36 3N
37
38
39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47
48 4N
Figure 4-10 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V
Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V

Weight ca. 600 g
Number of inputs 32

Digital modules
Cable length
● shielded 1000 m
in groups of 8
● Between Mintern and the inputs 120 V AC (reinforced insulation)
● Between inputs of different groups 250 V AC (basic insulation)
Insulation tested at 1500 V AC
Current consumption
Module power loss Typ. 6.5 W
Interrupts None
Input voltage
● Rated value UC 120 V
80 to 132 V DC
● Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
Input current
Input delay
● For "0" to "1" 5 to 25 ms
● For "1" to "0" 5 to 25 ms
Input characteristic In accordance with IEC 61131; type 1
● Permissible quiescent current Maximum 1 mA

Digital modules
4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)
4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A;

(6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)
Properties
SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A has the following features:
● 16 outputs, isolated in two groups of 8
● Output current 2 A
● Rated load voltage 24 V DC
The status LEDs indicate the system state even if the front connector is not connected.
Special points to note when commissioning

Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, order number 6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0,
differs from digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, order number
6ES7422-1BH10-0AA0, in the following feature:
To commission the module, it is not necessary to supply each group of 8 outputs with load
voltage (e.g. connection of 1L+ and 3L+). The module is fully functional even if only one group
is supplied with L+.
Note
Any switch-off of all outputs by switching off a single L+ supply implemented with the previous
module 6ES7422-1BH10-0AA0 is no longer possible.

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A
Process Module
1
Front connector jumper 2
3 1L+
4 0
5
1st supply group 6 1
7
8 2
Data memory and bus control

9
2nd supply group
3
11
12
13 2L+
14 2L+
15 4
16
3rd supply group 17 5
18
19 6
4th supply group 20
21 7
22
23 1M
24
25 3L+
26 3L+
27 0
28
5th supply group 29 1
30
31 2
32
6th supply group 33 3
34
35
36
37 4L+
38 4L+
39 4
40
7th supply group
LED control
41 5
42
43 6
8th supply group 44
45 7
46
47 2M
48 2M
Figure 4-11 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A
Technical specifications for SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A

Weight ca. 600 g

Digital modules
Number of outputs 16
Cable length
● shielded 1000 m
Rated supply voltage of electronics L+ 24 V DC
Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC
Total current of outputs (1 to 2 outputs for each supply group)
● Up to 40°C Maximum 3 A
in groups of 8
● Between outputs of different groups 500 Vac or 707 Vdc (type test)
Current consumption
● Supply and load voltage L + (no load) Maximum 30 mA
Interrupts None
Data for selecting an actuator
Output voltage
● For "1" signal At least L+ (-0.5 V)
Output current
● For "1" signal
Rated value 2A
Permitted range 5 mA to 2.4 A
● For "0" signal (residual current) Maximum 0.5 mA
Output delay (with resistive load)
● For "0" to "1" Maximum 1 ms
Load resistance range 24 Ω to 4 kΩ
Lamp load Maximum 10 W
Connection of 2 outputs in parallel
● For redundant control of a load Possible (only outputs of the same group)
● For increasing the power Not possible

Digital modules
4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A (6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)
Control of a digital input Possible

Switching frequency max.
● With resistive load 100 Hz
● With an inductive load in accordance with IEC 0.2 Hz at 1 A
947-51, DC 13 0.1 Hz at 2 A
● With lamp load Maximum 10 Hz
(Internal) limitation of inductive switch-off voltage to Maximum -30 V
Short-circuit protection for output Clocked electronically2
● Response threshold 2.8 to 6 A
1
A supply group always consists of 2 neighboring channels, starting from channel 0. Channels 0 and
1, 2 and 3, ... 14 and 15 therefore each form a supply group.
2
Reclosing at full load is not guaranteed after a short circuit. Measures for dealing with this problem:
● Change the signal at the output or
● Interrupt the load voltage of the module
● Briefly disconnect the load from the output
4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

(6ES7422-5EH10-0AB0)
4.15.1 Features
Overview
The SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A has the following features:
● 16 outputs, each channel is fused; reverse polarity protection and isolated in groups of 8
● Output current 1,5 A
● Nominal load voltage 20 to 125 VDC
● Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)
● Programmable diagnostics
● Programmable diagnostic interrupt
● Programmable substitution value output

Digital modules
Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
Process Module
1
Front connector jumper
2
Byte 0 3
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2
9

10 3
11
12
-+ 13 L1+
14 L1+
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
23 M1
24
25
Byte 1 26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
35
36
-+ 37 L2+
38 L2+
39 4
40
41 5
42 LED control
43 6
44
45 7
46
47 M2
48 M2
Figure 4-12 Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A


Digital modules
Cable length
● Unshielded Max. 600 m
● Shielded Max. 1000 m
Nominal load voltage L1 20 to 138 V DC
● Reverse polarity protection Yes, with fuse
Total current of the outputs 1)
With fan subassembly

● Up to 40° C Max. 16 A 21 A
● Up to 60° C Max. 8 A 14 A
In groups of 8
● Between outputs of different groups 250 VAC
Isolation test voltage 1500 VAC
Current consumption
● From load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 2 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 10 W
Interrupts
● Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
● Group error display Configurable
for internal disruption Red LED (INTF)
for external disruption Red LED (EXTF)
● Diagnostic information dump Yes
Injection of substitution values Yes, programmable
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
● With "1" signal Min. L+ (-1.0 V)
Output current
● With signal "1"
Rated value 1.5 A
Permissible range 10 mA to 1.5 A
Permissible peak current Maximum 3 A (for 10 ms)
● With "0" signal (residual current) Max. 0,5 mA

Output delay (resistive load)
● At "0" to "1" transitions Max. 2 ms
● With "1" to "0" Max. 13 ms

Digital modules
Wiring two outputs in parallel

● For redundant load control Supported (only outputs of the same group)
● For performance increase Supported (only outputs of the same group)
Triggering a digital input Supported
Switching frequency
● With resistive load Max. 10 Hz
● With inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1, Max. 0.5 Hz
DC 13
Short-circuit protection of the output Electronically protected2)
● Threshold Typ. 04 to 5 A
Replacement fuses Fuse, 8 A/250 V, quick blow
1
To achieve maximum performance capability, distribute the high-current load between the two groups.
2
To reset a deactivated output, first set the output signal to 0 and then to 1.
If output signal 1 is written to a deactivated output and the short-circuit remains, additional interrupts
are generated (provided the diagnostic interrupt parameter was set).
Note
If the power supply is switched on by means of a mechanical contact, a voltage pulse may
occur at the outputs. The transient pulse lasts a maximum of 0.5 ms.
Changing fuses
WARNING
This can result in injury.
If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module, you could be injured
by an electric shock.
Consequently, always remove the front connector before you change the fuse.

Digital modules
4.15.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules
in the respective sections.
Parameters of the SM 421; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A

You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the SM
422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A in the following table.
Table 4-12 Parameters of the SM 421; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
Parameters Value range Default setting2 Parameter type Scope

Enable
Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a value (SV) SV Dynamic Module
Keep last value (KLV)
Diagnostics
● Load voltage L+ missing Yes/no No Static Channel group
● Short-circuit to M Yes/no No Static Channel
1
ER-1/ER-2.
2
Assigning the "No load voltage L+" diagnostics to channel groups

You can only set the "No load voltage L+" diagnostics separately for each channel group. In
other words, the setting for channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7, and the setting for channel 8
applies to inputs 8 to 15.
See also

Digital modules
4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)
4.16 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

(6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)
Properties
SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A has the following features:
● 32 outputs, isolated in a group of 32
● Power supply in groups of 8 channels.
● A supply group always consists of 8 neighboring channels, starting from channel 0.
Channels 0 to 7, 8 to 15, ... 16 to 23 and 24 to 31 each form a supply group.
● Each of these supply groups can be switched off separately by disconnecting L+; however,
you must remember the common ground connection.
● Output current 0.5 A

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422\; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Process Module
1L+ 2
3 1L+
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3

8 4
9 5
6
11 7
12
2L+ 13 2L+
14 2L+
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
20 5
21 6
22 7
23
24
3L+ 25 3L+
26 3L+
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35
36
4L+ 37 4L+
38 4L+ LED control
39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47
48 M
L+ M
Figure 4-13 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Technical specifications for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Weight ca. 600 g

Digital modules
Cable length
● shielded 1000 m
Total current of outputs (1 to 8 outputs for each supply group)
Up to 40°C Maximum 4 A
Up to 60°C Maximum 2 A
● Load voltage L+ to backplane bus 500 Vac or 707 Vdc (type test)
Current consumption
Interrupts None
Output voltage
Output current
● For "1" signal
Rated value 500 mA
Permitted range 5 mA to 600 mA
● For increasing the power Possible (only outputs of the same group)

Digital modules
4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)
Switching frequency
● With resistive load Maximum 100 Hz
● With an inductive load in accordance with IEC Maximum 2 Hz at 0.3 A
947-5-1, DC 13 Maximum 0.5 Hz at 0.5 A
(Internal) limitation of inductive switch-off voltage to Typ. - 27 V
Short-circuit protection for output Clocked electronically
● Response threshold Typ. 0.7 to 1.5 A
1
A supply group always consists of 8 neighboring channels, starting from channel 0. Channels 0 to 7,
8 to 15, 16 to 23 and 24 to 32 therefore each form a supply group.
4.17 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

(6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)
4.17.1 Features
Overview
SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A has the following features:
● 32 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 8
● Output current 0.5 A
● Configurable substitute value output

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Process Module
INTF 1L+ monitoring

1L+ 2 EXTF Monitoring of internal voltage
3 1L+ Control
Control
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3 Channel status
8 4 Diagnostics display
9 5
10 6
7 Output status
11
1M 12 1M 1M
13 2L+
2L+
14 2L+ 2L+
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
%DFNSODQHEXVFRQQHFWLRQ
20 5
21 6
22 7
23 2M 2M
24 2M
3L+ 25 3L+
26 3L+ 3L+
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35 3M 3M
36 3M
37 4L+
4L+
38 4L+ 4L+
39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47 4M
48 4M 4M
L+
24 V
Figure 4-14 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Technical specifications for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Weight ca. 600 g

Digital modules
Cable length
● shielded 1000 m
Total current of outputs (per group)
In groups of 8
● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+ 500 V DC
● Between outputs of different groups 500 V DC
Current consumption
● Supply and load voltage L + (no load) 120 mA maximum
Interrupts
● Load voltage monitoring Yes
For internal fault Red LED (INTF)
For external fault Red LED (EXTF)
Monitoring for
● Short circuit > 1 A (typ.)
● Wire break < 0.15 mA
Substitute values can be connected Yes
Output voltage

Digital modules
Output current
● For "1" signal
Rated value 0.5 A
Permitted range 5 mA to 600 mA
● For increasing the power Possible (only outputs of the same group)
Switching frequency
● With an inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1, Maximum 2 Hz
DC 13
(Internal) limitation of inductive switch-off voltage to Typ. L + (- 45 V)
Short-circuit protection for output Clocked electronically
● Response threshold Typ. 0.75 to 1.5 A
Time, frequency
Internal processing time between backplane bus and input of the output driver 1)
Up to product version 03
● Irrespective of diagnostics/diagnostic interrupt/ Maximum 100 µs
substitute value enable
Up to product version 04
● Without diagnostics/diagnostic interrupt/substitute Maximum 60 µs
value enable
● With diagnostics/diagnostic interrupt/substitute value Maximum 100 µs
enable
1
The switching time of the output driver (< 100 µs with resistive load) is added to the total runtime

Digital modules
4.17.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Parameters of SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the
SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A in the table below.
Table 4-13 Parameters of SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Enable
Reaction to CPU STOP Set substitution val‐ SV Dynamic Module
ue (SSV)
Keep last value
(KLV)
Diagnostics
● No load voltage L+/sensor supply Yes/no No Channel group
● Short-circuit to M Yes/no No Channel
● Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no No Channel
1
ER-1/ER-2.
2
See also

Digital modules
4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)
4.17.3 Behavior of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Influence of the operating state and supply voltage on output values

The output values of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A depend on the operating mode of
the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.
Table 4-14 Relationships of the analog output values on the CPU's operating state and on the L+
supply voltage
CPU operating mode Power supply L+ at digital module Output value of digital module
POWER ON RUN L+ present CPU value
L+ missing 0 signal
STOP L+ present Substitution value/last value (de‐
fault = 0 signal)
L+ missing 0 signal
POWER OFF - L+ present 0 signal
L+ missing 0 signal
Reaction to failure of the supply voltage

The failure of the supply voltage of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A is always indicated
by the EXTF LED on the module. This information is also available on the module (entry in
diagnostic data.)
See also
Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (Page 144)
4.18 Digital output module SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A

(6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)
Properties
SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A has the following features:
● 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1
● Rated load voltage 120/230 V AC

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A
Process 1 Module
INFT
2 EXTF
3 t
4 0
5 1L
6 F100
7 1N
8
9
10 1
11 2L
12 F200
13 2N
14
15 2

16 3L
17 F300
18 3N
19
20
21 3
22 4L
23 F400
24 4N
25
26
27 4
28 5L
29 F500
30 5N
31
32
33 5
34 6L
35 F600
36 6N
37
38
39 6
40 7L
41 F700
42 7N
LED control
43
44
45 7
46 8L
47 F800
48 8N
Figure 4-15 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A
Technical specifications for SM 422; DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A

Weight ca. 800 g

Digital modules
Number of outputs 8
Cable length
● shielded 1000 m
Rated load voltage L1 79 to 264 V AC
Permissible frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
Total current of outputs
With fan module
● Up to 40°C 24 A 24 A
● Up to 60°C max. 16 A 20 A
In groups of 1
● Between outputs of different groups 500 V AC
Insulation strength 4000 V AC
Current consumption
● From load voltage L + (no load) Maximum 1.5 mA
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions Not configurable
for internal fault red LED (INTF) fuse failure
for external fault red LED (EXTF) no load voltage
Output voltage
● For "1" signal At maximum current at least L1
(-1.5 Vrms)
At minimum current at least L1
(-10.7 Vrms)
Output current
● For "1" signal
Rated value 5A
Permitted range 10 mA to 5 A
Permitted surge current (per group) Maximum 50 A per cycle

● For "0" to "1" Maximum 1 AC cycle

Digital modules
Minimum load current 10 mA

Zero crossing Maximum 55 V
Size of motor starter Maximum 5 pursuant to NEMA
● For redundant control of a load Possible (only outputs connected to
same load)
Switching frequency
● With an inductive load in accordance with IEC Maximum 0.5 Hz
947-5-1, DC 13
● With lamp load 1 Hz
Short-circuit protection for output Fuse, 8 A, 250 V (per output)
● Current required for safety shutdown At least 100 A
● Response time Maximum 100 ms
Spare fuses Fuse, 8 A, quick-response
● Wickmann 194-1800-0
● Schurter SP001.1013
● Littelfuse 217.008
Changing the fuse
WARNING
Injury is possible.
If you change a fuse without first unplugging the front connector of the module, you may
receive an electric shock.
Always remove the front connector before changing a fuse.

Digital modules
4.19 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

(6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)
Properties
SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A has the following features:
● Rated load voltage 120/230 V AC

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A
Process Module
Front connector jumper 1 INTF

16 digital outputs (four to ground) 2 EXTF
Byte 0 3
4 0
5
6 1
7
2

8
9
10 3
11 1L
12 F1
13 1N
14
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22 2L
23 F2
24 2N
25
Byte 1 26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34 3L
35 F3
36 3N
37
LED control
38
39 4
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46 4L
47 F4
48 4N
Figure 4-16 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A
Technical specifications for SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

Weight ca. 800 g

Digital modules
Cable length
● shielded 1000 m
Rated load voltage L1 79 to 264 V AC
Permissible frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
With fan module
● Up to 40°C max. 4 A 6A
● Up to 60°C max. 2 A 5A
in groups of 4
● Between outputs of different groups 500 V AC (basic insulation)
Test voltage:
● Between Mintern and the outputs 250 V AC (reinforced insulation)
Test voltage:
Current consumption
● From load voltage L + (no load) 1.5 mA
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions Not configurable
for internal fault Red LED (INTF) fuse failure
for external fault Red LED (EXTF) no load voltage
Output voltage
● For "1" signal At maximum current at least L1
(-1.3 Vrms)
At minimum current at least L1
(-18.1 Vrms)
Output current
● For "1" signal
Rated value 2A
Permitted range 10 mA to 2 A
Permitted surge current (per group) Maximum 50 A per cycle

Digital modules

Zero crossing No zero crossing switch
● For redundant control of a load Possible (only outputs connected to same
load)
Switching frequency
● With an inductive load in accordance with IEC Maximum 0.5 Hz
947-5-1, AC 15
● With lamp load 1 Hz
Short-circuit protection for output Fuse, 8 A, 250 V (per group)
● Current required for safety shutdown At least 100 A
● Response time Maximum 100 ms
Spare fuses Fuse, 8 A, quick-response
● Wickmann 194-1800-0
Changing the fuse
Note
Injury is possible.
If you change a fuse without first unplugging the front connector of the module, you may receive
an electric shock.
Always remove the front connector before changing a fuse.

Digital modules
4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)
4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

(6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)
4.20.1 Features
Overview
The SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A has the following features:
● Nominal load voltage 20 VAC to 120 VAC
● Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)
● Programmable diagnostics
● Programmable diagnostic interrupt
● Programmable substitution value output

Digital modules
Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Process 1 Module
INTF
2 EXTF
Byte 0 3 t
4 0
5 1L1
6 1
7 2L1
8 2
9 3L1
10 3
11 4L1
12
13

14
15 4
16 5L1
17 5
18 6L1
19 6
20 7L1
21 7
22 8L1
23
24
25
Byte 1 26
27 0
28 9L1
29 1
30 10L1
31 2
32 11L1
33 3
34 12L1
35
36
37
38
39 4
40 13L1
41 5
42 14L1 LED control
43 6
44 15L1
45 7
46 16L1
47
48
Figure 4-17 Wiring diagram of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A


Digital modules
Cable length
● Unshielded Max. 600 m
● Shielded Max. 1000 m
Nominal load voltage L+ 20 to 132 VAC
● Permitted frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
Total current of the outputs
With fan subassembly
● Up to 40° C Max. 16 A 24 A
● Up to 60° C Max. 7 A 16 A
In groups of 1
● Between M-internal and the outputs 120 VAC
● Between outputs of different groups 250 VAC
Isolation test voltage 1500 VDC
Current consumption
● From load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 0 mA
Power loss of the module Typ. 20 W
Interrupts
● Diagnostic interrupt Programmable
Diagnostic functions Programmable
● Group error display
for internal disruption Red LED (INTF)
for external disruption Red LED (EXTF)
● Diagnostic information dump Supported
Injection of substitution values Yes, programmable
Actuator selection data
Output voltage
● With "1" signal L1 (-1.5 Vrms)
Output current
● With "1" signal 2A
Nominal value 100 mA
Permissible range to 2 A
Permissible inrush current (per group) Maximum 20 A / 2 cycle
● With "0" signal (residual current) Max. 2.5 mA at 30 V

Max. 4.5 mA at 132 V
Output delay (resistive load)

Digital modules
● At "0" to "1" transitions 1 ms

● With "1" to "0" 1 AC cycle
Zero transition Non-zero cross outputs
Size of the motor starter Max. size 5 to NEMA
Lamp load Max. 50 W
Wiring two outputs in parallel
● For redundant load control Supported (only outputs of the same group)
● For performance increase Not supported
Triggering a digital input Supported
Switching frequency
● With resistive load Max. 10 Hz
● With inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1, Max. 0.5 Hz
13 DC
● With lamp load Max. 1 Hz
Short-circuit protection of the output Fuse 8A/125 V 2AG (per output)
● Fuse-tripping current Min. 40 A
● Response time Typ. 33 ms
Replacement fuses 8 A fuse, fast-blowing
Changing fuses
WARNING
This can result in injury.
If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module, you could be injured
by an electric shock.
Consequently, always remove the front connector before you change the fuse.

Digital modules
4.20.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Parameters of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings for the SM
422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A in the following table.
Table 4-15 Parameters of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Enable
Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a value SV Dynamic Module
(SV)
Keep last value
(KLV)
Diagnostics
● Fuse blown Yes/no No Static Channel
1
ER-1/ER-2.
2
See also

Digital modules
4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)
4.21 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

(6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)
Properties
SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A has the following features:
● 16 outputs, isolated in 8 groups of 2
● Rated load voltage 230 V AC/125 V DC

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A
Process Module

2
3
4 0
5 1
6 1L
7
8

9 2
10 3
11 2L
12
13
14
15 4
16 5
17 3L
18
19
20 6
21 7
22 4L
23
24
25
26
27 0
28 1
29 5L
30
31
32 2
33 3
34 6L
35
36
37
LED control
38
39 4
40 5
41 7L
42
43
44 6
45 7
46 8L
47
48
Figure 4-18 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A
Technical specifications for SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

Weight ca. 700 g

Digital modules
Cable length
● unshielded Maximum 600 m
● shielded max. 1000 m
With fan module
● Up to 40°C Max. 10 A 10 A
● Up to 60°C Max. 5 A 10 A
in groups of 2
● Between outputs of different groups 500 V AC (basic insulation)
Test voltage:
● Between Mintern and outputs 250 V AC (reinforced insulation)
Test voltage:
Current consumption
● From backplane bus (5 V) Maximum 1 A
Interrupt None
Relay features
Relay response times
● Switch on Maximum 10 ms
typ. 5.5 ms
● Switch off Maximum 5 ms
typ. 3 ms
Debounce time typ. 0.5 ms
Thermal continuous current Maximum 5 A
External fuse for relay outputs Fuse, 6 A, quick-response
Switching capacity and service life of contacts
● For resistive load

Digital modules
Voltage Current Number of op‐

erating cycles
(typ.)
30 V DC 5.0 A 0.18 million
230 V AC 5.0 A 0.18 million
● For an inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1DC 13 / AC 15
Voltage Current Number of op‐
erating cycles
(typ.)
(τ=7 ms max.)
230 V AC 5.0 A 0.1 million
(pf=0.4)
Contact wiring (internal) None
● For redundant load control Possible (only outputs with same load volt‐
age)
● For increasing the power Not possible
Switching frequency
● Mechanical Maximum 20 Hz
● With inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1, Maximum 1 Hz
DC 13/AC 15
Note
Use a suppressor circuit in environments with high humidity and where sparks might occur at
the relay contacts. This will increase the service life of the relay contacts.
To install the suppressor circuit, connect an RC element or a varistor in parallel with the relay
contacts or load. The dimensions depend on the size of the load.

Digital modules

Analog modules 5
5.1 General information
Structure
This section contains the following topics:
1. Overview of the analog modules available
2. General information concerning all analog modules (such as parameter assignment and
diagnostics)
3. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, features, wiring diagram and block
diagrams, specifications and special characteristics of the module):
a) for analog input modules
b) for analog output modules
STEP 7 blocks for analog functions

You can use blocks FC 105 and FC 106 to read and output analog values in STEP 7. You will
find the FCs in the standard library of STEP 7 in the subdirectory called "S5-S7 Converting
Blocks" (for a description refer to the STEP 7 Online Help for the FCs).
Further information
The appendix describes the structure of the parameter records (data records 0 and 1) and
diagnostic information (data records 0 and 1) in the system data. You must be familiar with
this configuration if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user
program.
The structure of diagnostic information (data records 0 and 1) is described in the system data
section of the appendix. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate
the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

Analog modules
5.2 Module overview
5.2 Module overview
Features of the analog modules

The tables below set out the main features of the analog modules. This summary is designed
to help you select the right module for your requirements.
Table 5-1 Analog input modules: Summary of features
Properties SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431;

AI 8 x 13 bit AI 8 x 14 bit AI 8 x 14 bit AI 16 x 13 bit AI 16 x 16 bit AI 8 x RTD AI 8 x 16 bit
(-1KF00-) (-1KF10-) (-1KF20-) (-0HH0-) (-7QH00-) 16 bit (-7KF00-)
(-7KF10-)
Number of inputs 8 AI for U/I 8 AI for U/I 8 AI for U/I 16 inputs 16 AI for U/ 8 inputs 8 inputs
measure‐ measure‐ measure‐ I / temp.
ment ment ment measure‐
4 AI for re‐ 4 AI for re‐ 4 AI for re‐ ment
sistance sist. / temp. sistance 8 AI for re‐
measure‐ measure‐ measure‐ sistance
ment ment ment measure‐
ment
Resolution 13 bits 14 bits 14 bits 13 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits
Type of measure‐ Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Resistance Voltage
ment Current Current Current Current Current Current
Resistance Resistance Resistance Resistance Tempera‐
Tempera‐ Tempera‐ ture
ture ture
Measuring principle Integrating Integrating Instantane‐ Integrating Integrating Integrating Integrating
ous value
encoding
Configurable diag‐ No No No No Yes Yes Yes
nostics
Diagnostic interrupt No No No No Can be set Yes Yes
Threshold value No No No No Can be set Can be set Can be set
monitoring
Hardware interrupt No No No No Can be set Can be set Can be set
upon limit violation
Hardware interrupt at No No No No Can be set No No
end of cycle
Voltage relationships Analog section isolated from the CPU Non-isola‐ Analog section isolated from the CPU
ted

Analog modules
5.2 Module overview
Properties SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431;

AI 8 x 13 bit AI 8 x 14 bit AI 8 x 14 bit AI 16 x 13 bit AI 16 x 16 bit AI 8 x RTD AI 8 x 16 bit
(-1KF00-) (-1KF10-) (-1KF20-) (-0HH0-) (-7QH00-) 16 bit (-7KF00-)
(-7KF10-)
Maximum permitted between between between between between between between
common mode volt‐ channels or channels or channels or channels or channels or channel and channels or
age between ref‐ between between ref‐ between ref‐ between central between
erence po‐ channel and erence po‐ erence po‐ channel and grounding channel and
tential of central tential of tential of central point: central
connected grounding connected connected grounding 60 V DC / grounding
sensors and point: sensors and sensors and point: point:
30 V AC
MANA: 60 V DC / MANA: central 60 V DC / 60 V DC /
(SELV)
30 V AC 8 V AC grounding
30 V AC 30 V AC 30 V AC
point:
(SELV) (SELV) (SELV)
2 V DC/AC
External power sup‐ No 24 V DC (on‐ 24 V DC (on‐ 24 V DC (on‐ 24 V DC (on‐ No No
ply required ly with cur‐ ly with cur‐ ly with cur‐ ly with cur‐
rent, 2 rent, 2 rent, 2 rent, 2
DMU) 1 DMU) 1 DMU) 1 DMU) 1
Special features - Suitable for Rapid A/D - Suitable for Resistance Internal
temp. meas‐ change, temp. meas‐ thermome‐ measure‐
urement suitable for urement ter configu‐ ment resist‐
Tempera‐ highly dy‐ Tempera‐ rable ance
ture sensor namic pro‐ ture sensor Lineariza‐ Field con‐
types config‐ cesses types config‐ tion of sen‐ nection with
urable Measured urable sor charac‐ internal ref‐
Lineariza‐ value Lineariza‐ teristic erence tem‐
tion of sen‐ smoothing tion of sen‐ curves perature (in‐
sor charac‐ can be set sor charac‐ Measured cluded in
teristic teristic value module
curves curves smoothing scope of de‐
can be set livery)
Measured Measured
value value Measured
smoothing smoothing value
can be set can be set smoothing
can be set
1
2-DMU 2-wire transducer
Table 5-2 Analog output modules: Summary of features
Properties Module
SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit
(-1HF00-)
Number of outputs 8 outputs
Resolution 13 bits
Type of output Channel by channel:
● Voltage
● Current
Configurable diagnostics No
Diagnostic interrupt No

Analog modules
5.2 Module overview
Properties Module
SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit
(-1HF00-)
Substitute value output No
Voltage relationships Analog section isolated from:
● the CPU
● the load voltage
Maximum permitted common mode voltage Between channels or between channels and MANA
3 V DC
Special features -

Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values
5.3 Steps for commissioning analog modules
Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to
commission analog modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier or
later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install, commission etc. other modules
in between times.
Steps
Table 5-3 Steps from the selection of analog modules to commissioning
Step Procedure
1 Select the module.
2 For certain analog input modules: Set the measuring type and range using the measuring
range module.
3 Mount the module in the rack.
4 Assign parameters to module.
5 Connect the measuring sensors or loads to the module.
6 Commission the configuration.
7 Analyze the configuration if commissioning failed.
5.4.1 General information
Introduction
This chapter describes the analog values for all measuring or output ranges supported by the
analog modules.
Analog to digital conversion

Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form.
Analog output modules convert digital output values to analog signals.

Analog modules
Representation of analog values at a resolution of 16 bits

The digitized analog value applies to input and output values of the same nominal range.
Analog values are output as real numbers in two's complement. The resulting assignment:
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit values 2 15
2 14
2 13
2 12
211
2 10
2 9
2 8
2 7
2 6
2 5
2 4
2 3
2 2
2 1
20
Bit 15 can be interpreted as a sign

The sign of the analog value is always set at bit 15:
● "0" → +
● "1" → -
Resolution less than 16 bits

On analog modules with a resolution of less than 16 bits, the analog value is stored left-justified.
The unused least significant bit positions are padded with "0".
Example
The example below demonstrates the "0" padding of unused bit positions for low resolution
values.
Table 5-4 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and 13-bit analog value
Resolution Analog value

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
16-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
13-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Analog modules
5.4.2 Representation of analog values of analog input channels
Introduction
The tables in this section contain the measured value representations for the various
measuring ranges of the analog input modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules
with the corresponding measuring ranges.
Notes for readers of the tables

The tables "Bipolar input ranges", "Unipolar input ranges", "Life-zero input ranges" contain the
binary representation of the measured values.
The binary representation of the measured values is always the same, so the analog
representation tables only compare the measuring ranges and the units.
Measured value resolution

The resolution of the analog values may differ, based on the analog module and module
parameters. At resolutions < 16 bits, all bits identified by "x" are set to "0".
Note
This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted temperature values are
the result of a conversion in the analog module (see tables for analog representation of
resistance thermometer and for thermometer elements).
Table 5-5 Supported analog value resolutions
Resolution in bits Unit decimal Unit hexadecimal Analog value Analog value
High byte Low byte
9 128 80H 00000000 1xxxxxxx
10 64 40H 00000000 01xxxxxx
11 32 20H 00000000 001xxxxx
12 16 10H 00000000 0001xxxx
13 8 8H 00000000 00001xxx
14 4 4H 00000000 000001xx
15 2 2H 00000000 0000001x
16 1 1H 00000000 00000001

Analog modules
5.4.3 Binary representation of input ranges
Input ranges
The input ranges shown in tables "Bipolar input ranges", "Unipolar input ranges", "Life-zero
input ranges" are defined in complementary 2-by-2 representation:
Table 5-6 Bipolar input ranges
Units Measured Data word Range

value
in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >118,515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot range
27649 >100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
-1 - 0,003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
- 27648 - 100,000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 27649 ≤- 100,004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot range
- 32512 - 117,593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 32768 ≤- 117,596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow
Table 5-7 Unipolar input ranges
Units Measured Data word Range

value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 ≧118,515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot range
27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal range
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 - 0,003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot range
- 4864 - 17,593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 ≤- 17,596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Analog modules
Table 5-8 Life-zero input ranges
Units Meas‐ Data word Range

ured val‐
ue in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot range
27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot range
0,003617
- 4864 - 17,593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
In the event of a wire break, the module reports 7FFFH

Analog modules
5.4.4 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges
Table 5-9 Representation of analog values in the ±1 V to ±10 V voltage measuring ranges
System Voltage measuring range

Dec. Hex. ± 10 V ±5V ± 2.5 V ±1V
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 11.851 V 5.926 V 2.963 V 1.185 V Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.176 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100,000 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5V 2.5 V 1V
75,000 % 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 1.875 V 0.75 V
0,003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV 90.4 µV 36.17 µV
0% 0 0 0V 0V 0V 0V Nominal range
-1 FFFF
- 75,00 % - 20736 AF00 - 7.5 V - 3.75 V - 1.875 V - 0.75 V
- 100,000 % - 27648 9400 - 10 V -5V - 2.5 V -1V
- 27649 93FF Undershoot range
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 11.759 V - 5.879 V - 2.940 V - 1.176 V
- 117,596 % - 32513 80FF Underflow
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 - 11.851 V - 5.926 V - 2.963 V - 1.185 V
Table 5-10 Representation of analog values in the ±25 to ±500 mV voltage measuring ranges

Dec. Hex. ± 500 mV ± 250 mV ± 80 mV ± 50 mV ± 25 mV
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 592.6 mV 296.3 mV 94.8 mV 59.3 mV 29.6 mV Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 587.9 mV 294.0 mV 94.1 mV 58.8 mV 29.4 mV Overshoot
27649 6C01 range
100,000 % 27648 6C00 500 mV 250 mV 80 mV 50 mV 25 mV
75 % 20736 5100 375 mV 187.54 mV 60 mV 37.5 mV 18.75 mV
0,003617% 1 1 18.08 µV 9.04 µV 2.89 µV 1.81 µV 904.2 nV
0% 0 0 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV
-1 FFFF Nominal range
- 75,00 % - 20736 AF00 - 375 mV -187.54 mV - 60 mV - 37.5 mV - 18.75 mV
- 100,000% - 27648 9400 - 500 mV - 250 mV - 80 mV - 50 mV - 25 mV
- 27649 93FF Undershoot
- 117,593% - 32512 8100 - 587.9 mV - 294.0 mV - 94.1 mV - 58.8 mV - 29.4 mV range
- 117,596% - 32513 80FF Underflow
- 118,519% - 32768 8000 - 592.6mV - 296.3 mV - 94.8mV - 59.3 mV - 29.6 mV

Analog modules
Table 5-11 Representation of analog values in the voltage measuring ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 5.741 V 11.852 V Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100,000 % 27648 6C00 5V 10 V
75 % 20736 5100 3.75 V 7.5 V Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV 0 V + 361.7 µV
0% 0 0 1V 0V
-1 FFFF Undershoot range
- 17,593 % - 4864 ED00 0.296 V Negative values are not
supported Wire break
≤-17,596 % 32767 7FFF

Analog modules
5.4.5 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges
Table 5-12 Representation of analog values in the ±3.2 mA to ±20 mA current measuring ranges
System Current measuring range

Dec. Hex. ± 20 mA ± 10 mA ± 5 mA ± 3.2 mA
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 23.70 mA 11.85 mA 5.93 mA 3.79 mA Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 11.76 mA 5.88 mA 3.76 mA Overshoot
27649 6C01 range
100,000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 10 mA 5 mA 3.2 mA
75 % 20736 5100 15 mA 7.5 mA 3.75 mA 2.4 mA
0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA 361.7 nA 180.8 nA 115.7 nA Nominal range
0% 0 0 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA
-1 FFFF
- 75 % - 20736 AF00 - 15 mA - 7.5 mA - 3.75 mA - 2.4 mA
- 100,000 % - 27648 9400 - 20 mA - 10 mA - 5 mA - 3.2 mA
- 27649 93FF Undershoot
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 23.52 mA - 11.76 mA - 5.88 mA - 3.76 mA range
- 117,596 % - 32513 80FF Underflow
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 - 23.70 mA - 11.85 mA - 5.93 mA - 3.79 mA
Table 5-13 Representation of analog values in current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 23.70 mA Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100,000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA
75 % 20736 5100 15 mA Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA
- 17,593 % - 4864 ED00 - 3.52 mA
- 4865 ECFF Underflow
≤ - 17,596 % - 32768 8000

Analog modules
Table 5-14 Representation of analog values in current measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA

Dec. Hex. 4 to 20 mA
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 22.96 mA Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
27649 6C01
100,000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA
0,003617 % 1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0% 0 0 4 mA
- 17,593 % - 4864 ED00 1.185 mA
Wire break
≤ - 17,596 % 32767 7FFF

Analog modules
5.4.6 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors
Table 5-15 Analog value representation for resistance-type sensors from 48 Ω to 6 kΩ
System Resistive transducer range

Dec. Hex. 48 Ω 150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 6 kΩ
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 56.89 Ω 177.77 Ω 355.54 Ω 711.09 Ω 7.11 kΩ Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 56.44 Ω 176.38 Ω 352.77 Ω 705.53 Ω 7.06 kΩ Overshoot
27649 6C01 range
100,000 % 27648 6C00 48 Ω 150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 6 kΩ Nominal range
75 % 20736 5100 36 Ω 112.5 Ω 225 Ω 450 Ω 4.5 kΩ
0,003617 % 1 1 1.74 mΩ 5.43 mΩ 10.85 mΩ 21.70 mΩ 217.0 mΩ
0% 0 0 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω
(negative values are physically impossible) Undershoot
range

Analog modules
5.4.7 Representation of analog values for resistance thermometer
Representation of the analog values of Pt x00 standard resistance thermometers
Table 5-16 Representation of analog values for Pt 100/200/500/1000 resistance thermometers
Pt x00 Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Pt x00 Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Pt x00 Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
Standard in imal adeci‐ Standard in imal adeci‐ Standard in imal adeci‐
°C mal °F mal K mal
(1 digit (1 digit (1 digit
= 0.1° C) = 0.1 ° F) = 0.1 K)
> 1000,0 32767 7FFFH > 1832,0 32767 7FFFH > 1273,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1000,0 10000 2710H 1832,0 18320 4790H 1273,2 12732 31BCH Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
850,1 8501 2135H 1562,1 15621 3D05H 1123,3 11233 2BE1H
850,0 8500 2134H 1562,0 15620 3D04H 1123,2 11232 2BE0H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200,0 -2000 F830H -328,0 -3280 F330H 73,2 732 2DCH
-200,1 -2001 F82FH -328,1 -3281 F32FH 73,1 731 2DBH Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-243,0 -2430 F682H -405,4 -4054 F02AH 30,2 302 12EH
< -243,0 -32768 8000H < -405,4 -32768 8000H < 30,2 32768 8000H Underflow
Representation of analog values for Pt x00 climatic resistance thermometers
Table 5-17 Representation of analog values for Pt 100/200/500/1000 resistance thermometers
Pt x00 Cli‐ Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Pt x00 Cli‐ Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
matic in °C imal adeci‐ matic in °F imal adeci‐
(1 digit = mal (1 digit = mal
0.01° C) 0.01 °F)
> 155,00 32767 7FFFH > 311,00 32767 7FFFH Overflow
155,00 15500 3C8CH 311,00 31100 797CH Overshoot range
: : : : : :
130,01 13001 32C9H 266,01 26601 67E9H
130,00 13000 32C8H 266,00 26600 67E8H Nominal range
: : : : : :
-120,00 -12000 D120H -184,00 -18400 B820H
-120,01 -12001 D11FH -184,01 -18401 B81FH Undershoot range
: : : : : :
-145,00 -14500 C75CH -229,00 -22900 A68CH
< - 145,00 -32768 8000H < -229,00 -32768 8000H Underflow

Analog modules
Representation of analog values for Ni x00 standard resistance thermometers
Table 5-18 Analog value representation for resistance thermometers Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000
Ni x00 Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Ni x00 Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Ni x00 Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
Standard in imal adeci‐ Standard in imal adeci‐ standard in imal adeci‐
°C (1 digit = mal °F (1 digit = mal K (1 digit = mal
0.1° C) 0.1 °F) 0.1 K)
295,0 2950 B86H 563,0 5630 15FEH 568,2 5682 1632H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
250,1 2501 9C5H 482,1 4821 12D5H 523,3 5233 1471H
250,0 2500 9C4H 482,0 4820 12D4H 523,2 5232 1470H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-60,0 -600 FDA8H -76,0 -760 FD08H 213,2 2132 854H
-60,1 -601 FDA7H -76,1 -761 FD07H 213,1 2131 853H Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-105,0 -1050 FBE6H -157,0 -1570 F9DEH 168,2 1682 692H
< -105,0 -32768 8000H < -157,0 -32768 8000H < 168,2 32768 8000H Underflow
Representation of analog values for Ni x00 climatic resistance thermometers
Table 5-19 Analog value representation for resistance thermometers Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000
Ni x00 Cli‐ Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Ni x00 Cli‐ Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
matic in °C imal adeci‐ matic in °F imal adeci‐
(1 digit = mal (1 digit = mal
0.01° C) 0.01 °F)
> 295,00 32767 7FFFH > 325,11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295,00 29500 733CH 327,66 32766 7FFEH Overshoot range
: : : : : :
250,01 25001 61A9H 280,01 28001 6D61H
250,00 25000 61A8H 280,00 28000 6D60H Nominal range
: : : : : :
-60,00 -6000 E890H -76,00 -7600 E250H
-60,01 -6001 E88FH -76,01 -7601 E24FH Undershoot range
: : : : : :
-105,00 -10500 D6FCH -157,00 -15700 C2ACH
< -105,00 -32768 8000H < -157,00 -32768 8000H Underflow

Analog modules
Representation of analog values for Cu 10 standard resistance thermometers
Table 5-20 Representation of analog values for Cu 10 standard resistance thermometers
Cu 10 Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Cu 10 Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Cu 10 Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
Standard in imal adeci‐ Standard in imal adeci‐ Standard in imal adeci‐
°C (1 digit = mal °F (1 digit = mal K (1 digit = mal
0.01° C) 0.01° F) 0.01 K)
312,0 3120 C30H 593,6 5936 1730H 585,2 5852 16DCH Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
260,1 2601 A29H 500,1 5001 12D5H 533,3 5333 14D5H
260,0 2600 A28H 500,0 5000 1389H 533,2 5332 14D4H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200,0 -2000 F830H -328,0 -3280 F330H 73,2 732 2DCH
-200,1 -2001 F82FH -328,1 -3281 F32FH 73,1 731 2DBH Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-240,0 -2400 F6A0H -400,0 -4000 F060H 33,2 332 14CH
< -240,0 -32768 8000H < -400,0 -32768 8000H < 33,2 32768 8000H Underflow
Representation of analog values for Cu 10 climatic resistance thermometers
Table 5-21 Representation of analog values for Cu 10 climatic resistance thermometers
Cu 10 Cli‐ Unit deci‐ Unit hexadeci‐ Cu 10 Climatic in Unit decimal Unit hexadecimal Range
matic in °C mal mal °F (1 digit = 0.01°
(1 digit = F)
0.01° C)
> 180,00 32767 7FFFH >325,11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
180,00 18000 4650H 327,66 32766 7FFEH Overshoot range
: : : : : :
150,01 15001 3A99H 280,01 28001 6D61H
150,00 15000 3A98H 280,00 28000 6D60H Nominal range
: : : : : :
-50,00 -5000 EC78H -58,00 -5800 E958H
-50,01 -5001 EC77H -58,01 -5801 E957H Undershoot range
: : : : : :
-60,00 -6000 E890H -76,00 -7600 E250H
< -60,00 -32768 8000H < -76,00 -32768 8000H Underflow

Analog modules
5.4.8 Representation of analog values for thermocouples
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type B
Table 5-22 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type B
Type B in °C Unit dec‐ Unit dec‐ Type B in °F Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type B in K Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
imal imal imal adeci‐ imal adeci‐
mal mal
> 2070,0 32767 7FFFH >3276,6 3276,6 7FFFH > 2343,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2070,0 20700 50DCH 3276,6 32766 7FFEH 2343,2 23432 5B88H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1821,0 18210 4722H 2786,6 27866 6CDAH 2094,2 20942 51CEH
1820,0 18200 4718H 2786,5 27865 6CD9H 2093,2 20932 51C4H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
0,0 0 0000H -32,0 -320 FEC0H 273,2 2732 0AACH
Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-120,0 -1200 FB50H -184,0 -1840 F8D0H 153,2 1532 05FCH
< -120,0 -32768 8000H < -184,0 -32768 8000H < 153,2 32768 8000H Underflow
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type E
Table 5-23 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type E
Type E in °C Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type E in °F Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type E in K Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
imal adecimal imal adeci‐ imal adeci‐
mal mal
1200,0 12000 2EE0H 2192,0 21920 55A0H 1473,2 14732 398CH Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1000,1 10001 2711H 1833,8 18338 47A2H 1274,2 12742 31C6H
1000,0 10000 2710H 1832,0 18320 4790H 1273,2 12732 31BCH Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270,0 -2700 F574H -454,0 -4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H < -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H <0 <0 <0000H Underflow
Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong
type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...
... F0C4H, and to output 8000H. ... FB70H, and to output 8000H. ... E5D4H, and to output 8000H.

Analog modules
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type J
Table 5-24 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type J
Type J in °C Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type J in °F Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type J in K Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
mal mal
1450,0 14500 38A4H 2642,0 26420 6734H 1723,2 17232 4350H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1201,0 12010 2EEAH 2193,8 21938 55B2H 1474,2 14742 3996H
1200,0 12000 2EE0H 2192,0 21920 55A0H 1473,2 14732 398CH Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-210,0 -2100 F7CCH -346,0 -3460 F27CH 63,2 632 0278H
< -210,0 < -2100 <F7CCH < -346,0 < -3460 <F27CH < 63,2 < 632 < 0278H Underflow
... F31CH, and to output 8000H. ... EA0CH, and to output 8000H. ... FDC8H, and to output 8000H.
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type K
Table 5-25 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type K
Type K in °C Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type K in °F Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type K in K Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
mal mal
1622,0 16220 3F5CH 2951,6 29516 734CH 1895,2 18952 4A08H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1373,0 13730 35A2H 2503,4 25034 61CAH 1646,2 16462 404EH
1372,0 13720 3598H 2501,6 25016 61B8H 1645,2 16452 4044H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270,0 -2700 F574H -454,0 -4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H < -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H <0 <0 < 0000H Underflow
... F0C4H, and to output 8000H. ... E5D4H, and to output 8000H. ... FB70H, and to output 8000H.

Analog modules
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type L
Table 5-26 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type L
Type L in °C Unit deci‐ Unit hex‐ Type L in °F Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type L in K Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
mal adecimal imal adeci‐ imal adecimal
mal
1150,0 11500 2CECH 2102,0 21020 521CH 1423,2 14232 3798H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
901,0 9010 2332H 1653,8 16538 409AH 1174,2 11742 2DDEH
900,0 9000 2328H 1652,0 16520 4088H 1173,2 11732 2DD4H Nominal
: : : : : : : : : range
-200,0 -2000 F830H -328,0 -3280 F330H 73,2 732 02DCH
< -200,0 < -2000 < F830H < -328,0 < -3280 < F330H < 73,2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
... F380H, and to output 8000H. ... EAC0H, and to output 8000H. ... FE2CH, and to output 8000H.
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type N
Table 5-27 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type N
Type N in °C Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type N in °F Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type N in K Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
mal mal
1550,0 15500 3C8CH 2822,0 28220 6E3CH 1823,2 18232 4738H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1300,1 13001 32C9H 2373,8 23738 5CBAH 1574,2 15742 3D7EH
1300,0 13000 32C8H 2372,0 23720 5CA8H 1573,2 15732 3D74H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270,0 -2700 F574H -454,0 -4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H < -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H <0 <0 < 0000H Underflow

Analog modules
Representation of analog values for thermocouple types R, S
Table 5-28 Representation of analog values for thermocouple types R, S
Type R, S in Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type R, S in Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Types R, S Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
°C imal adeci‐ °F imal adeci‐ in K imal adeci‐
mal mal mal
2019,0 20190 4EDEH 3276,6 32766 7FFEH 2292,2 22922 598AH Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1770,0 17770 4524H 3218,0 32180 7DB4H 2043,2 20432 4FD0H
1769,0 17690 451AH 3216,2 32162 7DA2H 2042,2 20422 4FC6H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-50,0 -500 FE0CH -58,0 -580 FDBCH 223,2 2232 08B8H
-51,0 -510 FE02H -59,8 -598 FDAAH 222,2 2222 08AEH Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-170,0 -1700 F95CH -274,0 -2740 F54CH 103,2 1032 0408H
< -170,0 -32768 8000H < -274,0 -32768 8000H < 103-2 < 1032 8000H Underflow
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type T
Table 5-29 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type T
Type T in °C Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type T in °F Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type T in K Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
imal adeci‐ imal adeci‐ imal adeci‐
mal mal mal
540,0 5400 1518H 1004,0 10040 2738H 813,2 8132 1FC4H Overshoot
: : : range
401,0 4010 0FAAH
400,0 4000 0FA0H 752,0 7520 1D60H 673,2 6732 1AACH Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270,0 -2700 F574H -454,0 -4540 EE44H 3,2 32 0020H
< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H < -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H < 3,2 < 32 < 0020H Underflow

Analog modules
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type U
Table 5-30 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type U
Type U in °C Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type U in °F Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type U in K Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Range
imal adeci‐ imal adeci‐ imal adecimal
mal mal
850,0 8500 2134H 1562,0 15620 2738,0H 1123,2 11232 2BE0H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
601,0 6010 177AH 1113,8 11138 2B82H 874,2 8742 2226H
600,0 6000 1770H 1112,0 11120 2B70H 873,2 8732 221CH Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200,0 -2000 F830H -328,0 -3280 F330H 73,2 732 02DCH
< -200,0 < -2000 < F830H < -328,0 < -3280 < F330H < 73,2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
... F380H, and to output 8000H. ... EAC0H, and to output 8000H. ... FE2CH, and to output 8000H.

Analog modules
5.4.9 Representation of analog values for analog output channels
Introduction
The tables in this section contain the analog value representation for output channels of the
analog output modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding
output ranges.
Notes for readers of the tables

The tables "Bipolar output ranges", "Unipolar output ranges", "Life-zero output ranges" contain
the binary representation of the measured values.
Since the binary representation of the output values is always the same, starting with the table
at "Representation of Analog Values in the Voltage Output Range ± 10 V" these tables only
contain the output ranges and the units.
Binary representation of output ranges

The input ranges shown in tables "Bipolar output ranges", "Unipolar output ranges", "Life-zero
output ranges" are defined in complementary 2-by-2 representation:
Table 5-31 Bipolar output ranges
Units Output Data word Range

value in
%
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
≧3251 0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Overflow
2
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot
27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 1 -0,00361 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
7
- -100,000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
27648
- ≤100,004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
27649 Undershoot
- -117,593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range
32512
≤ 0% 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow
32513

Analog modules
Table 5-32 Unipolar output ranges

value in
%
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
2
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot
27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 1 0,000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Limited to
- 32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 the low limit
of the nomi‐
nal range, 0
V or 0 mA
≤ 0% 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow
32513
Table 5-33 Life-zero input ranges

value in
%
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
2
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot
27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 1 -0,00361 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot
7 range
- 6912 -25,000 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 6913 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Limited to
overshoot
range lower
limit 0 V and
-25,000 0 mA
- 32512
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
≤-3251 - 25 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow
3

Analog modules
Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges
Table 5-34 Representation of analog values in the ±10 V output range
System Voltage output range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V
118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 V Overflow, off power
32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V
75 % 20736 5100 7.5 V Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV
0% 0 0 0V
-1 FFFF - 361.7 µV
- 75 % - 20736 AF00 - 7.5 V
- 100 % - 27648 9400 - 10 V
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 11.76 V
- 32513 80FF Underflow, idle state
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 V
Table 5-35 Representation of analog values in the 0 V to 10 V and 1 V to 5 V output ranges
System Voltage output range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V
118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 V 0.00 V Overflow, off power
32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 11.76 V 5.70 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5V
75 % 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV 1V+144.7µV
0% 0 0 0V 1V
- 25 % - 6912 E500 0V
- 6913 E4FF Not possible. The output value is limi‐
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 ted to 0 V.
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 V 0.00 V

Analog modules
Representation of analog values in the current output ranges
Table 5-36 Representation of analog values in the ±20 mA output range
System Current output range

Dec. Hex. ± 20 mA
118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA Overflow, off power
32512 7F00
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA
0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 mA
0% 0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF - 723.4 mA
- 75 % - 20736 AF00 - 15 mA
- 100 % - 27648 9400 - 20 mA
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 23.52 mA
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 mA
Table 5-37 Representation of analog values in the 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA output ranges
System Current output range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, off power
32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range
75 % 20736 5100 15 mA 15 mA
0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 mA 4mA+578.7 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA 4 mA
- 25 % - 6912 E500 0 mA
- 6913 E4FF Not possible. Output value
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 limited to 0 mA.
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 mA 0.00 mA

Analog modules
5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels
Two procedures
There are two procedures for setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input
channels of analog modules:
● With a measuring range module and STEP 7
● By hardwiring the analog input channel, and programming in STEP 7
The method to use for the various analog modules is module-specific, and described in detail
in the relevant module sections.
The procedure for setting the measuring method and measuring range of the module in STEP
7 is described in the respective sections.
This section describes how to set the measuring method and range using measuring range
modules.
Setting the measuring method and range using measuring range modules
Analog modules are supplied with measuring range modules as required.
Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring method and range.
Note
Make sure that the measuring range modules are on the side of the analog input module.
Before you install the analog input module, check the measuring method and range of the
measuring range modules, and adapt these as required.
Optional settings of the measuring range modules

Optional settings of the measuring range modules are: "A", "B", "C" and "D".
For detailed information on specific measuring method and range settings, refer to the relevant
module section.
The settings for the various measuring methods and ranges are also shown on the printed
label of the analog module.

Analog modules
Replugging measuring range modules

To reconnect a measuring range module:
Graphic Description
Use a screwdriver to lever the measur‐
ing range module out of the analog in‐
put module.

Analog modules
Graphic Description
Insert the measuring range module in‐
to the required slot (1) of the analog
input module.
The measuring range selected is the
one that points to the marker point on
module (2).
Continue with the insertion of all other
measuring range modules.
Then mount the module.
CAUTION
Faulty measuring range module settings may lead to the destruction of the module.
Always make sure the measuring range module is in the correct position before you connect
any sensors to the module.

Analog modules
5.6 Behavior of the analog modules
5.6.1 Introduction
Overview
This section describes:
● How the analog input and output values depend on the operating states of the CPU and
the supply voltage of the analog module
● The reaction of analog modules, based on the actual analog value within the relevant value
range
● The effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability
● The effect of the operational limit of the analog module on the analog input and output value,
as illustrated by an example

Analog modules
5.6.2 Effect of supply voltage and operating mode
Overview
The IO values of analog modules are determined by the CPU operating state and the module's
supply voltage.
Table 5-38 Dependencies of the analog IO values on the CPU's operating State and on the L+ supply voltage
CPU operating state Supply voltage L+ at the an‐ Output value of the Input value of the
alog module analog output module analog input module*
POWER RUN L+ present CPU values Measured value
ON Until the first conversion... 7FFFH, until the first conversion
● after power-up has been after POWER ON is completed,
or when the module has been
completed, a signal of 0 mA or
programmed.
0 V is output.
● after programming is
successfully completed, it
outputs the previous value.
L+ missing 0 mA / 0 V
POWER STOP L+ present Substitution value / last value Measured value
ON (default: 0 mA / 0 V) 7FFFH, until the first conversion
L+ missing 0 mA / 0 V after POWER ON is completed,
or when the module has been
programmed.
POWER - L+ present 0 mA / 0 V -
OFF L+ missing 0 mA / 0 V -
* L+ only required with 2-wire sensors
Behavior on failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the load power supply L+ of the diagnostics-capable analog module is indicated in
the case of configured 2-wire sensors by the EXTF LED on the module. This information is
also available on the module (in the diagnostic buffer data.)
See also

Analog modules
5.6.3 Effect of the value range for analog values
Effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability

Errors may lead to an entry in the diagnostics buffer and trigger a diagnostic interrupt at analog
modules with diagnostics function and corresponding parameter settings. You will find the
errors that might be involved in the section "Diagnostics of the analog modules".
Effect of value range on the analog input module

The reaction of analog modules is determined by the actual input values within the value range.
Table 5-39 Reaction of analog input modules as a function of the actual analog value within the value range
Measured value within Input value LED (EXTF) Diagnostics Interrupt

Nominal range Measured value - - -
Overshoot/undershoot range Measured value - - -
Overflow 7FFFH lit1 Entry is made1 Diagnostic interrupt1
Underflow 8000H lit1 Entry is made1 Diagnostic interrupt1
Outside of the programmed limit Measured value - - Hardware interrupt1
1
Only for modules with diagnostics function and depending on parameter settings
Effect of value range on the analog output module

The reaction of analog modules is determined by the actual output values within the value
range.
Table 5-40 Behavior of the analog output modules as a function of the position of the analog value within the value range
Output value within Output value LED (EXTF) Diagnostics Interrupt

Nominal range CPU value - - -
Overshoot/undershoot range CPU value - - -
Overflow 0 signal - - -
Underflow 0 signal - - -

Analog modules
5.6.4 Effect of operational limit and basic error limit
Operational limit
The operational limit represents the measuring error, or output error, of an analog module
across the entire permissible temperature range of the module, based on the module's nominal
range.
Basic error limit

The basic error limit represents the operational limit at 25° C, based on the module's nominal
range.
Note
The percentage details of operational and basic error limits in the specifications of the modules
always refer to the highest possible input and output value in the nominal range of the module.
In the ± 10 V measurement range this would be the 10 V.
Example of determination of the output error of a module

An analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit is being used for voltage output. An output
range of "±10 V" is set. The module is operating at an ambient temperature of 30° C, i.e. the
operational limit applies. The specifications of the module state:
● Operational limit for voltage output: ±0,5 %
Hence, an output error of ±0.05 V (±0.5 % of 10 V) across the nominal range of the module
must be expected.
This means that with an actual voltage of, say, 1 V, a value in the range from 0.95 V to 1.05
V is output by the module. The relative error is ±5 % in this case.
For the example, the figure below shows how the relative error decreases as the output value
approaches the end of the 10V range.
±0,05 V ±0,05 V ±0,05 V

^ ±5 %)
(= ^ ±0,625 %)
(= ^ ±0,5 %*)
(=
1
-1 V 0V 1V 8V 10 V
Figure 5-1 Example of the relative error of an analog output module
* Operational limit
(1) Output value

Analog modules
5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules
Conversion time of analog input channels

The conversion time is the total of the basic conversion time plus additional processing times
of the module for:
● Resistance measurement
● Wire break monitoring
The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method of the analog input
channel (integrating method, actual value conversion.)
The integration time of integrating conversions has a direct influence on conversion times. The
integration time depends on the interference frequency suppression you set in STEP 7.
For information on basic conversion times and additional processing times of the various
analog modules, refer to the specifications of the relevant module.
Cycle time of analog input channels

The analog/digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to memory or
to the backplane bus take place sequentially. In other words, the analog input channels are
converted one after the other. The scan time - in other words, the time elapsing until an analog
input value is again converted - is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input
channels of the analog input module.
The figure below provides an overview of the cycle time elements for an n-channel analog
module.
Conversion time, channel 1

Cycle time
Figure 5-2 Scan time of an analog input or output module
Basic execution time of the analog input channels

The basic execution time corresponds to the cycle time for all the enabled channels.
Setting of the smoothing of analog values

You can set the smoothing of the analog values in STEP 7 for some analog input modules.

Analog modules
Use of smoothing
Smoothing of analog values ensures a stable analog signal for further processing.
It makes sense to smooth the analog values with slow variations of measured values, for
example, with temperature measurements.
Smoothing principle
The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. Smoothing is accomplished by the
module calculating mean values, derived from a defined number of converted (digitized) analog
values.
The user assigns parameters to smoothing with a maximum of four levels (none, weak,
medium, strong). The grade determines the number of analog signals used for averaging.
A higher smoothing provides a more reliable analog value, and prolongs the time it takes to
apply a smoothed analog signal following a step response (see the example below.)
Example
The figure below shows the number of cycles a module requires to apply an almost 100%
analog value after a step response, based on the smoothing function settings. The figure
applies to all signal changes at the analog input.
Signal variation in Step response for any analog input signal

percent
100
63
50
0 50 100 150 200

Smoothing Low: Module cycles
average:
high:
Figure 5-3 Example of the effect of smoothing on step responses
Further information on smoothing

For information showing whether a specific module supports smoothing functions, and special
features to observe, refer to the section dealing with the analog input module.

Analog modules
Conversion time of the analog output channels

The conversion time of the analog output channels includes the transfer of digitized output
values from internal memory, and their digital-to-analog conversion.
Cycle time of analog output channels

The analog output channels are converted sequentially - that is the analog output channels
are converted one after the other.
The cycle time - that is the time expiring until an analog output value is converted again, is
equivalent to the accumulated conversion times of all activated analog output channels. Refer
to the figure "Cycle Time of an Analog Input/Output Channel".
Basic execution time of the analog output channels

The basic execution time corresponds to the cycle time for all the enabled channels.
Note
You should disable any analog channels that are not being used to reduce the scan time in
STEP 7.
Overview of the settling time and response time of the analog output modules
tA
tE
tZ
t1 t2 t3
Figure 5-4 Settling and response times of the analog output channels
tA = Response time
tS = Setting time
t3 = Specified output value reached
t2 = Output value transferred and converted
tC = Cycle time, corresponds to n x conversion time (n = activated channels)
t1 = New output value is present
Settling time
The settling time (t2 to t3) - that is the time from the application of the converted value until the
specified value is obtained at the analog output - depends on the load. We therefore distinguish
between resistive, capacitive and inductive load.
For information on settling times as a function of load at the various analog output modules,
refer to the specifications of the relevant module.

Analog modules
5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules
Response time
The response time (t1 to t3) - that is the time from the application of the digital output values in
internal memory until the specified value is obtained at the analog output - is, in the most
unfavorable case, the sum of the cycle time and the settling time.
The worst case scenario is given, when the analog channel has been converted immediately
before a new output value is transferred, and is not converted again until all other channels
have been converted (cycle time.)
See also
Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (Page 235)
5.8.1 General information about parameter assignment
Introduction
The characteristics of analog modules may differ. The characteristics of the modules can be
defined by assigning parameters.
Tools for parameter assignment

You program analog modules in STEP 7.
After you have defined all parameters, download these from your programming device to the
CPU. The CPU transfers the parameters to the relevant analog modules at the STOP > RUN
transition.
Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.
Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above.
You may also edit dynamic parameters in the active user program of an S7 PLC using SFCs.
However, the parameters set in STEP 7 will be applied again after a RUN > STOP, STOP >
RUN transition of the CPU. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules
in the user program in the Appendix.

CiR (Configuration in RUN) is a method you can use to modify your system or edit the
parameters of individual modules. These changes are made while your system is in operation,
that is, your CPU will stay in RUN over a maximum of 2.5 seconds while these changes are
applied.

Analog modules
For detailed information on this topic, refer to the "Configuration in RUN by means of CiR"
manual. This manual is found, for example, as a file in PDF format on the STEP 7 CD supplied.

Analog modules
5.8.2 Parameters of analog input modules
Overview
Analog input modules use a subset of the parameters and value range listed in the table below,
based on their functionality. For information on subsets "supported" by specific analog
modules, refer to the section dealing with the relevant module.
Table 5-41 Parameters of analog input modules

type
Enable
interrupt
● End of scan cycle reached Yes/no No Static Channel
at input
May be restricted by the measuring range
● High limit 32511 to - 32512 - Dynamic Channel
● Low limit -32512 to 32511
Diagnostics
● Wire break Yes/no No
● Reference channel error Yes/no No
● Underflow Yes/no No
● Overflow Yes/no No
● Short-circuit to M Yes/no No
Static Channel
Measurement
● Measuring method Disabled U
U Voltage
4DMU Current (4-wire sensor)
R-4L Resistance (4-conductor con‐
nection) Static Channel
R-3L Resistance (3-conductor con‐
nection)
RTD-4L Thermal resistance (linear, 4-
conductor connection)
RTD-3L Thermal resistance (linear, 3-
conductor connection)
TC-L Thermocouple (linear)

Analog modules

type
● Measuring range For information on configurable measuring ± 10 V
ranges of the input channels, refer to the rel‐
evant module description.
● Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67° C 0° C Dynamic Module
● Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit; Kelvin Degrees Static Module
Celsius
● Temperature coefficient Platinum (Pt) 0,00385 Static Channel
for temperature 0.00385 Ω/Ω/° C
measurement with 0.003916 Ω/Ω/° C
thermal resistance (RTD) 0.003902 Ω/Ω/° C
0.003920 Ω/Ω/° C
Nickel (Ni)
0.00618 Ω/Ω/° C
0.00672 Ω/Ω/° C
● Interference frequency 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz; none 50 or 60 Hz
suppression
● Smoothing None None
Weak
Medium
Strong
● Reference junction None None
internal
RTD on channel 0
dynamic reference temperature value
1
ER-1/ER-2.
2
Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.
See also

Analog modules
5.8.3 Parameters of analog output modules
Overview
Analog output modules use a subset of the parameters and value range listed in the table
below, based on their functionality. For information on subsets "supported" by specific analog
modules, refer to the section dealing with the relevant module.
The default settings apply if you have not set any parameters in STEP 7.
Table 5-42 Parameters of analog output modules
Parameters Value range Default set‐ Parameter Scope

ting1 type
Output
● Output type Deactivated U Static Channel
voltage
current
● Output range For information on configurable measuring rang‐ ± 10 V
es of output channels, refer to the relevant mod‐
ule description.
1
See also

Analog modules
5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs
Introduction
The analog input modules support various sensors, such as voltage/current sensors, and
resistors, depending on the set measuring method.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection
options for sensors described in the sections that follow.
Cables for analog signals

Always use shielded twisted-pair cables to wire analog signals. This reduces interference.
Connect both ends of the analog cable shield to ground.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current,
which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog signals. To avoid this
situation, you should ground the shield only at one end of the cable.
Non-isolated analog input modules

In the case of the non-isolated analog input modules there is an electrical connection between
the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground.
You use non-isolated analog modules if there are few or no potential differences between the
measuring sensors and chassis ground.
Isolated analog input modules

With the isolated analog input modules there is no electrical connection between the reference
point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground.
You use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference UISO can occur between the
reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground. By means of an equipotential
bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and chassis ground, make sure that UISO does
not exceed the permitted value.
Limited potential difference UCM

Only a limited potential difference UCM (common mode voltage) may occur amongst the M-
measuring lines of the input channels and between the leads and the reference point of the
measuring circuit MANA. In order to prevent the permissible value from being exceeded, you
must take different actions, described below, depending on the potential connection of the
sensors.
Connecting electrically isolated sensors

The isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (chassis ground). They
can be floating.
With isolated sensors, potential differences might arise between the different sensors. These
potential differences can arise as a result of interference or the local distribution of the sensors.

Analog modules
To ensure that the permissible value for UCM is not exceeded during use in heavily EMC-
affected environments, connect M- to MANA in modules with an MANA connection.
M+
M-
1 M+
M-
3 MANA
UISO
Figure 5-5 Connecting isolated sensors to an electrically isolated AI
(1) Electrically isolated sensors

(2) Chassis ground
(3) Connection required for modules with MANA
M +: Measuring line (positive)
M -: Measuring line (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground
Note
Do not connect M- to MANA when connecting 2-wire transducers for current measurement
and when connecting resistance-type sensors. This also applies to inputs which are
programmed accordingly, but remain unused.
Non-isolated sensors
The isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (chassis ground). When
using non-isolated sensors, you must connect MANA to chassis ground.

Analog modules
Connecting non-isolated sensors

Depending on local conditions or interference, potential differences UCM (static or dynamic)
can occur between the locally distributed measuring points. If the permitted value for UCM is
exceeded, there must be equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points.
M+
M-
M+
1
M-
UCM
MANA
3 UISO
Figure 5-6 Connecting non-isolated sensors to an isolated AI
(1) Non-isolated sensors

(2) Chassis ground
(3) Equipotential bonding conductor
Note
Do not use non-isolated 2-wire transducers and non-isolated resistance-type sensors!

Analog modules
5.10 Connecting voltage sensors
5.10 Connecting voltage sensors
Connecting voltage sensors
Note
The cables required to connect the analog input module and the sensors are not drawn in the
figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to read and follow the instructions in the section "Connecting
sensors to analog inputs", which contains general information on connecting sensors.
+ M+
U M-
- M+
+
M-
U
-
MANA*
Figure 5-7 Connecting voltage sensors to an AI

(1) Connection required for modules with Mana

Analog modules
5.11 Connecting current sensors
Sensor supply voltage
Note
The 2-wire sensor is wired to a short-circuit-proof supply voltage at the terminals of the analog
input module. This 2-wire transducer then converts the measured variable into a current.
Because the 2-wire transducer is supplied by the module, you must not ground the M- cables.
4-wire transducers require a separate supply voltage UH (auxiliary supply).
Connecting 2-wire transducers
2 3
+24 V
1
L+
+ M+
P - M-
M+
P +
- M-
MANA
M M
Figure 5-8 Connecting 2-wire transducers to an isolated AI

L +: Power supply connection 24 VDC
(1) Sensor, for example, pressure gauge
(2) + (3) 2-wire transducer

Analog modules
SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit: Connecting 2-wire transducers

Because the supply voltage for the 2-wire transducers is not fed by the SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit,
you must supply the sensors separately with 24 V.
2 3 +24 V
1
MV+
+ MI+
P - MI+
M-
+
P MV+
-
MI+
MI+
M-
M MANA
Figure 5-9 Connecting 2-wire transducers to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit
MI+: Measuring current (positive)

MV+: Measuring voltage (positive)
(2)+(3) 2-wire transducer

Analog modules
Connecting 4-wire transducers
2
1
M+
P +
- M-
M+
P + M-
-
UH
MANA
3
Figure 5-10 Connecting 4-wire transducers to an AI

UH: Auxiliary voltage
(2) 4-wire transducer
SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit: Connecting 4-wire transducers

To ensure that the permissible value for UCM is not exceeded, you must connect the M-cables
to MANA.
2
1
MV+
MI+
P + MI+
- M-
MV+
P +
- MI+
MI+
M-
UH
Figure 5-11 Connecting 4-wire transducers to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit

Analog modules
MI+: Measuring current (positive)

MV+: Measuring voltage (positive)
(2) 4-wire transducer

Analog modules
5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors
Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors
Note
Resistance thermometers/resistors are wired in 2-, 3- or 4-wire technique.

With 4-conductor and 3-conductor connections, the module supplies a constant current via
terminals IC + and IC - so that the potential drop occurring on the measuring cables is
compensated. It is imperative to wire the constant current cables directly to the resistance
thermometer/resistor.
Compensated measurements with 3- or 4-wire elements return a more precise result compared
to 2-wire measurements.
4-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via the M+ and M- terminals.
When you connect, watch out for the polarity of the connected cable (connect IC + and M+ as
well as IC- and M- to the resistance thermometer).
Make sure that the connected cables IC + and M+ andSO and SE+ and cables IC - and M- and
AGND and SE- are connected directly on the resistance thermometer.
M+ SE+
M- SE-
IC+ SO
IC- AGND
IC
Figure 5-12 4-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an AI
IC+ Constant current line (positive)

IC- Constant current line (negative)
M+ Measuring line (positive)
M- Measuring line (negative)

Analog modules

With a 3-conductor connection to modules with 4 terminals per resistance thermometer, you
must set up a jumper between M- and IC- and SE- and AGND (see Figure).
The module compensates in this circuit for the effect of the line resistance between the module
and the resistance thermometer/resistor.
Make sure that the connected cables IC + and M+ and SO and SE+ are directly connected to
the resistance thermometer.
To get an accurate measurement, make sure that the connected cables M+, IC + and IC- and
SE+, SO and AGND are the same length and have the same cross-section.
M+ SE+
M- SE-
IC+ SO
IC- AGND
IC
Figure 5-13 3-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an electrically isolated analog input


For 2-conductor connections, bridge the M+ and IC+, and the M- and IC- terminals of the module.
Note: Cable resistance is also measured.
M+
M-
IC+
IC-
Figure 5-14 2-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an electrically isolated analog input

Analog modules


Analog modules
5.13 Connecting thermocouples
Thermocouple design
Thermocouples consist of a pair of thermal probes, and all necessary installation and
connecting parts. The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or metal alloys
soldered or welded together at the ends.
There are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the material used,
for example, K, J, N thermocouples. The measuring principle of all thermocouples is the same,
irrespective of their type.
1 2
3
°C
(1) Measuring junction

(2) Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs
(3) Connecting point
(4) Compensating leads
(5) Reference junction
(6) Leads
(7) Measurement input
Figure 5-15 Thermocouple design
Operating principle of thermocouples

If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free ends of the
thermocouple (point of connection), a voltage, the thermo e.m.f., occurs at the free ends. The
magnitude of the thermo-e.m.f. generated depends on the difference between the temperature
at the measuring junction and the temperature at the free ends, as well as on the material
combination used for the thermocouple.
Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, the free ends must be kept
at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine the temperature of the
measuring junction.

Analog modules
The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference junction
by means of compensating wires. These compensating wires are made of the same materials
as the thermocouple wires. The supply lines are made of copper.
Note
Make sure that the polarity is correct, otherwise significant measuring errors will occur.
Compensation of the reference junction temperature

There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference junction
temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the difference in
temperature between the reference junction and measuring point.
You can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the reference
junction to be.
The last column of the following table lists the feature you must set for the "Reference Junction"
parameter in STEP 7. The reference temperature value is a separate parameter in STEP 7.
Options for compensation of the reference junction temperature
Option Explanations Reference junction

No compensation When you want to acquire only the difference in tempera‐ None
ture between the measuring point and the reference junction
Internal compensation If you employ internal compensation, the internal tempera‐ Internal
ture of the module is used for comparison purposes.
External compensation with a compensat‐ You have already acquired and compensated the reference None
ing box in leads of an individual thermo‐ junction temperature using a compensating box, which you
couple have looped into an individual thermocouple.
Further processing at the module is not required.
External compensation with a resistance You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a RTD on Channel 0
thermometer to obtain the reference junc‐ resistance thermometer (pt 100) and have it calculated by
tion temperature (recommended method) the module for any thermocouple.
External compensation with a resistance Use a resistance thermometer on a module that measures RTD on Channel 0
thermometer when thermocouples with the reference junction temperature. Read in the climatic
the same reference junction are divided temperature value to the CPU and transfer the value to the
amongst several modules other modules using SFC55.
Constant reference junction temperature If the reference junction temperature is constant and known, Reference temper‐
(thermometer, ice bath) you can specify this value in parameter assignment in STEP ature value
7.
Principle of operation of internal compensation

Internal compensation allows you to form the reference point at the terminals of the analog
input module. In this case, route the compensating lines directly to the analog module. The
internal temperature sensor measures the module's temperature and returns a compensation
voltage.
Note: internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation.

Analog modules
Principle of operation of external compensation with compensating box

If you employ external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction of the
thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box, for example.
The compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference junction
temperature. The reference junction is formed by the connecting ends of the thermocouple's
compensating lines.
The resistance of the temperature-sensitive bridge changes as a function of the difference
between the actual reference temperature and calibrating temperature. This difference induces
a positive or negative compensating voltage, which is added to the thermal voltage.
Note
The diagrams below do not show the connecting lines required for connecting the electrical
potentials of the analog input module and the sensors. This means that you must still read and
follow the instructions in the generally applicable information on connecting sensors.
Connection of thermocouples without compensation or using the reference temperature value

Wire the thermocouples either directly to the inputs of the module, or indirectly via
compensating lines. Each channel can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog
module independently of the other channels.
M+
M-
M+
M-

(1) Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple)
Figure 5-16 Connection of thermocouples without compensation or using the reference temperature
value to an isolated AI
Connecting the compensating box

The compensating box is looped in through the leads of each thermocouple. The compensating
box must be supplied on an isolated basis. The power supply module must provide adequate
noise filtering, for example, by means of grounded cable shielding.

Analog modules
Each channel can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog module independently of
the other channels. Each channel requires its own compensating box.
Note
Use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0° C for analog input
modules.
Connecting thermocouples using resistance thermometers

Connect the resistance thermometer to channel 0 of the module. Make sure that you configure
the "RTD on Channel 0" reference junction in STEP 7 for each channel that has a thermocouple
connected to it.
If all thermocouples connected to the module's inputs share a common reference junction,
compensate the circuit as follows:
M+
M-
I C+
1
I C-
M+
M-
M+
M-
4 3
IC+: Constant current line (negative)
IC+: Constant current line (negative)
(1) Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple)
(2) RTD on Channel 0
(3) Incoming line (Cu)
(4) Reference junction
Figure 5-17 Connection of thermocouples of the same type with external compensation by means of
a resistance thermometer, connected to channel 0

Analog modules
5.14 Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs
5.14 Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs
Introduction
The analog output modules can be used to supply power to loads and actuators.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection
options for loads and actuators described in the sections that follow.
Cables for analog signals

Always use shielded twisted-pair cables to wire analog signals. Form two twisted pairs of the
QV and S+, and M and S- signals. This reduces interference. Connect both ends of the analog
cable shield to ground.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current,
which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog signals. To avoid this
situation, you should ground the shield only at one end of the cable.
Isolated analog output modules

With the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between the
reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground.
You must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference UISO can occur between
the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground. By means of an
equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and chassis ground, make sure
that UISO does not exceed the permitted value.

Analog modules
5.15 Connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs
Connecting loads to a voltage output

Connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a 4-conductor and a 2-conductor
connection.
Note
The cables required to connect the analog output module are not drawn in the figures shown
below.
loads/actuators to analog outputs", which contains general information on connecting sensors.
4-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output

You can use the 4-wire technique to achieve a high accuracy at the load by wiring the S- and
S+ sensor lines directly to the load. This results in direct measurement and correction of the
voltage at the load.
Faults or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the sensor lead S- and
the reference circuit of the analog circuit MANA. This potential difference (UCM) must not exceed
the permissible value. A negative influence on the accuracy of the analog signal is otherwise
inevitable.
L+ +24 V
QV
S+ RL
S-
MANA
UISO
M
0V
Figure 5-18 4-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output of an electrically isolated analog output
module
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage

QV: Analog output voltage
S +: Sensing line (positive)
S -: Sensing line (negative)

Analog modules
MANA: Reference potential of the analog circuit

M: Ground
(1) Chassis ground
2-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output

In the case of a 2-conductor connection, connect QV with S+ and MANA with S on the front
connector. However, this will not provide the accuracy of a 4-conductor connection.
Wire the loads to the QV terminals and to the reference point of measuring circuit MANA.
L+ +24 V
QV
S+ RL
S-
MANA
UISO
M
0V
Figure 5-19 2-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output of an electrically isolated analog output
module

S +: Sensing line (positive)
S -: Sensing line (negative)
M: Ground
(1) Chassis ground
See also
Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs (Page 219)

Analog modules
5.16 Connecting loads/actuators to current outputs
5.16 Connecting loads/actuators to current outputs
Connecting loads to current outputs

Always connect loads to QI and to the reference point of analog circuit MANA of a current output.
Note
The cables required to connect the analog output module are not drawn in the figure shown
below.
loads/actuators to analog outputs", which contains general information on connecting sensors.
+24 V
L+
QI
RL
MANA
UISO
M
0V
Figure 5-20 Connecting loads to a current output of an isolated AO

QI: Analog output current
M: Ground
(1) Chassis ground
See also
Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs (Page 219)

Analog modules
5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules
Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

We distinguish between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages.
You only obtain programmable diagnostic messages if you have enabled the diagnostics using
the relevant parameters. You perform parameter assignment in the "Diagnostics" tab in STEP
7.
The analog module always provides non-programmable diagnostic messages, irrespective of
the enable state of diagnostics functions.
Reactions to diagnostic messages in STEP 7

Actions initiated by diagnostic messages:
● The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnostics of the analog module, forwarded to
the CPU and can be read out by the user program.
● The error LED on the analog module is lit.
● If you have set "Enable Diagnostic Interrupt" in STEP 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered
and OB 82 is called.
Reading diagnostic messages

You can read detailed diagnostic messages using SFCs in the user program (refer to the
appendix "Diagnostic data of signal modules").
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7 in the module diagnostics (refer to the online
help for STEP 7).
Diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules

All analog input modules return the measured value 7FFFH as a reaction to errors, irrespective
of parameter settings. This measured value indicates either overflow, error, or a disabled
channel.
Diagnostics using the INTF and EXTF LEDs

Some analog input modules indicate faults by means of their two fault LEDs INTF (internal
fault) and EXTF (external fault). The LEDs go out when all the internal and external faults have
been eliminated.
Refer to the specifications of the modules to find out which analog input modules have these
fault LEDs.
Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog input modules
with diagnostics capability.

Analog modules
You can find out which diagnostic messages are possible with which modules in the Appendix
entitled "Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules".
Table 5-43 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules
Diagnostic message LED Scope of diagnostics Programmable

Module error INTF/EXTF Module No
Internal error INTF Module No
External error EXTF Module No
Channel error INTF/EXTF Module No
External auxiliary voltage missing EXTF Module No
Front connector missing EXTF Module No
No module parameters INTF Module No
Incorrect parameters INTF Module No
Channel information available INTF/EXTF Module No
Measuring range module incorrect/missing INTF Module No
Thermocouple connection error EXTF Module No
STOP mode - Module No
EPROM error INTF Module No
RAM error INTF Module No
ADC/DAC error INTF Module No
Hardware interrupt lost INTF Module No
Configuration / programming error INTF Channel No
Short-circuit to M EXTF Channel Yes
Wire break EXTF Channel Yes
Reference channel error EXTF Channel Yes
Underflow EXTF Channel Yes
Overflow EXTF Channel Yes
User connection not wired EXTF Channel No
Open conductor in + direction EXTF Channel No
Open conductor in - direction EXTF Channel No
Run time calibration error EXTF Channel No
Underrange or overrange EXTF Channel No
Open conductor in the current source EXTF Channel No
User calibration does not correspond to the param‐ EXTF Channel No
eter assignment
Note
A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is that
you must have assigned parameters to the analog module accordingly in STEP 7.

Analog modules
Causes of errors and remedies for analog input modules
Table 5-44 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules, causes of errors and remedies

Module error Any, the module has detected an error. -
Internal error Module has detected an error within the au‐ -
tomation system.
External error Module has detected an error outside of the -
automation system.
Channel error Indicates that only certain channels are faul‐ -
ty
External auxiliary voltage Load voltage to supply the 2-wire transduc‐ Connect supply L+
missing er is missing on terminals L+ and M.
Front connector missing Jumper between connections 1 and 2 in the Install jumper
front connector is missing.
No module parameters Module requires information whether it Message present after power on, until the CPU
should operate with default system param‐ has completed the transfer of parameters; config‐
eters or with your parameters. ure the module as required.
Incorrect parameters A parameter or combination of parameters Reassign parameters to the module
is incorrect; impermissible measurement
range, for example.
Channel information availa‐ Channel error; module can provide addi‐ -
ble tional channel information.
Measuring range module One or more measuring range modules is Insert the measuring range modules on the mod‐
incorrect/missing missing or incorrectly inserted ule according to the parameter assignment of the
type of measurement and the measurement
range
STOP mode No parameters have been assigned to the If a reboot of the CPU all the digitized analog val‐
module and the first module cycle has not ues are in the intermediate memory, this mes‐
been completed. sage is reset
EPROM error Module is defective Replace the module
RAM error
ADC/DAC error
Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an interrupt, since Change the interrupt handling in the CPU
the previous interrupt was not acknowl‐ (change priority for interrupt OB; shorten interrupt
edged; possible configuration error. program).
Configuration / program‐ Illegal parameters transferred to module Check the measuring range module
ming error Reassign parameters to the module
Short-circuit to M A short-circuit to the M potential has occur‐ Eliminate the short-circuit.
red on the sensor supply of 2-wire trans‐
ducers.
Wire break Resistance of transducer circuit too high Use a different type of transducer, or modify the
wiring, for example, using a larger conductor
cross-section.
Open circuit between module and sensor Connect the cable
Channel not connected (open) Disable channel ("Measuring type" parameter)
Wire the channel

Analog modules

Reference channel error The reference junction connected at chan‐ Check the connections
nel 0 is faulty due to a wire break, for exam‐
ple.
The reference temperature value transfer‐ Reassign the parameters for the reference tem‐
red is not within the value range. perature
Underflow Input value below undershoot range; possi‐ Set another measuring range
ble cause of error: wrong measuring range
selected
With the measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA and Check the connections
1 to 5 V, if necessary by polarity reversal of
sensor connection
Overflow Input value exceeds overshoot range Set another measuring range
Run time calibration error A wiring fault has occurred on a channel Eliminate the wiring fault (fault remains until the
during the calibration cycle next calibration; in other words, a maximum 6 mi‐
nutes or until there is a STOP-RUN transition of
the CPU).

Analog modules
5.18 Interrupts of analog modules
Introduction
This section describes the interrupt reaction of analog modules. There are two types of
interrupt:
● Diagnostic interrupt
● Hardware interrupt
Note: certain analog modules do not support interrupts, or can only partially "handle" the
interrupts described below. For information on modules supporting interrupt functions, refer to
their specifications.
For detailed information on the OBs and SFCs mentioned below, refer to the STEP 7 Online
Help.
Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset - in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter
assignment. Interrupts are enabled in STEP 7.
Special feature: The module is inserted in ER-1/ER-2
Note
If you use the analog module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set the parameters for the input of all
the interrupts to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2.
When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, incoming error events (initial occurrence) and
outgoing error events (error is cleared) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts user program execution, and executes diagnostic interrupt OB82.
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic
information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is
exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
Hardware interrupt with trigger "high and low limit exceeded"

Define a working range by setting a high and low limit. If the process signal (for example, the
temperature) leaves this working range, the module triggers a hardware interrupt, provided
the interrupt is enabled.
As a result, the CPU interrupts execution of the user program and executes hardware interrupt
OB 40.

Analog modules
In the user program of OB 40, you can set how the programmable controller is required to
react to a limit value being surpassed or not being reached.
When OB 40 is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
Note
Note: the system does not generate a hardware interrupt if your limit setting exceeds the
overshoot or undershoot range.
Structure of the start information tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40

The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start information of OB
40 in the tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. The figure below shows the assignment of bits in DWORD
8 of local data.
LB 8 LB 9 LB 11
.1 .0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 17 16 1 0 Bit-Nr.
1 1 1 1 LD 8
1 2 3 4
Figure 5-21 Start Information of OB 40: Which event has violated limits and triggered a hardware
interrupt
(1) Value exceeds high limit in channel 1

(2) Value exceeds high limit in channel 0
(3) Value exceeds low limit in channel 1
(4) Value exceeds low limit in channel 0
(5) Bit No.
Hardware interrupt triggered by "Reached end of scan cycle"

A hardware interrupt programmed to be triggered at the end of scan cycles allows you to
synchronize a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module.
A scan cycle includes the conversion of the measured values of all active channels of the
analog input module. The module processes the channels in succession. When all measured
values are successfully converted, the module reports the existence of new measurement data
at its channels to the CPU by means of an interrupt.
You can always use this interrupt to load the actual, converted analog values.
See also
Features (Page 229)

Analog modules
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)
5.19.1 Features
Overview
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit has the following features:
● 8 inputs for voltage/current measurement
● 4 inputs for resistance measurement
● Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel
● Resolution 13 bits
● Analog section isolated from the CPU
● Maximum permitted common mode voltage between the channels or between the reference
potentials of the connected sensors and MANA 30 V AC
Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit
MV0+
MI0+
MI0+
Suppressor circuit, current jumpering
M0-
D
CH0
Bus S7-400
Bus control
CH1 CH1
CH7 CH7
Front connectors
F_CON monitoring
+5V
+5V
M ANA Bus S7-400
0V 0V
Bus S7-400
-5V
Figure 5-22 Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit

Analog modules
WARNING
The module can get damaged.
The shunt of an input channel can be destroyed if you inadvertently connect a voltage sensor
to the M- /MI+ terminals of a channel.
Make sure that the front connector is wired in accordance with the following connection
diagram.

Analog modules
Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit
Voltage Current measurement Resistance

measurement measurement
1
2
3
4
5
6 MV0+ MV0+ M0+
7 MI0+
V CH0 Word 0 CH0
8 MI0+
9 M0- M0- M0-
10 CH0 Word 0
11 MV1+ MV1+ IC0+
12 MI1+
CH1 Word 2 CH1
13 MI1+
14 A M1- M1- IC0-
15
16 MV2+ MV2+ M1+
17 MI2+
CH2 Word 4 CH2
18 MI2+
19 M2- M2- M1-
20 CH2 Word 4
21 MV3 + MV3 + IC1+
22 MI3 +
CH3 Word 6 CH3
23 MI3 +
24 M3- M3- IC1-
25 MANA
26 M ANA
27
28 MV4+ MV4+ M2+
29 MI4+
V CH4 Word 8 CH4
30 MI4+
31 M4- M4- M2-
32 CH4 Word 8
33 MV5+ MV5+ IC2+
34 MI5+
CH5 Word 10 CH5
35 MI5+
A
36 M5- M5- IC2-
37
38 MV6+ MV6+ M3 +
39 MI6+
CH6 Word 12 CH6
40 MI6+
41 M6- M6- M3-
42
CH6 Word 12
43 MV7+ MV7+ IC3 +
44 MI7+
45 CH7 Word 14 MI7+ CH7
46 M7- M7- IC3-
47
48
Figure 5-23 Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit

Analog modules
Technical specifications for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit

Weight ca. 500 g
Number of inputs 8
● For resistance-based sensor 4
Cable length
● shielded Maximum 200 m
Rated load voltage L+ Not required
Constant measured current for resistance-based sen‐ Typ. 1.67 mA
sor
● Between inputs and MANA (UCM) 30 V AC
● Between the inputs (UCM) 30 V AC
● Between MANA and Mintern (UISO) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)
● Between bus and analog section 2120 V DC
● Between bus and chassis ground 500 V DC
● Between analog section and chassis ground 2120 V DC
Current consumption
Formation of analog values
Measuring principle Integrating
Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per chan‐ (Not part of the response time)
nel)
● Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz 60 / 50
● Integration time in ms 16.7 / 20
● Basic conversion time in ms 23 / 25
● Resolution (including overrange) 13 / 13 bit
Measured value smoothing Not possible
Basic execution time of the module in ms (all channels 184 / 200
enabled)
Noise suppression, error limits
Interference voltage suppression for f = nx (f1 ±1%),
(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, ...
● Common mode interference (UCM < 30 V) > 100 dB

Analog modules
● Series-mode interference (peak value of fault > 40 dB

< rated value of input range)
Crosstalk between the inputs > 50 dB
Operational limit (throughout temperature range, relative to input range)
● Voltage input
– ±1V ± 1.0%
– ± 10 V ± 0.6%
– 1 to 5 V ± 0.7%
● Current input
– ± 20 mA ± 1.0%
– 4 to 20 mA ± 1.0%
● Resistance measurement 0 to 500 Ω; ± 1.25%
4-wire measurement (at around 600 Ω)
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25°C, relative to input range)
● Voltage input
– ±1V ± 0.7%
– ± 10 V ± 0.4%
– 1 to 5 V ± 0.5%
● Current input
– ± 20 mA ± 0.7%
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0.7%
● Resistance measurement 0 to 500 Ω; 4-wire ± 0.8%
measurement (at around 600 Ω)
Temperature error (relative to input range)
● in resistance measuring range ± 0.02 % / K
● In all other measuring ranges ± 0.007 % / K
Linearity error (relative to input range) ± 0.05%
Repeat accuracy (in settled state at 25°C, relative to ± 0.1%
input range)
Interrupts None
Input range (rated values) / input resistance
● Voltage ± 1 V / 200 kΩ
± 10 V / 200 kΩ
1 to 5 V / 200 kΩ
● Current ± 20 mA / 80 Ω
4 to 20 mA / 80 Ω
● Resistance 0 to 600 Ω; can be used up to 500 Ω
Permissible input current for current input (destruction Constant 40 mA
limit)
Sensor connection

Analog modules
● For voltage measurement Possible

● For current measurement
– As 2-wire transducer Possible; with external measuring transducer
supply
– As 4-wire transducer
Possible
● For resistance measurement
– With 2-wire connection Possible; line resistance is also measured
– With 3-wire connection Possible
– With 4-wire connection

Analog modules
5.19.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit
Setting the operating mode

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x13 Bit in STEP 7.
Parameters
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules
The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.
Table 5-45 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

type
Measurement
● Measuring Disabled U
method
U Voltage Static Channel
R-4L Resistance (4-conductor connec‐
tion)
● Measuring Refer to respective section for the measuring ± 10 V
range ranges of the input channels that you can set.
● Interference 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz
frequency
suppression
1
See also

Analog modules
5.19.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit
Measuring methods
You can set the measuring method at the input channels:
● Voltage measurement
● Current measurement
You perform the setting with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7.
Circuit for resistance measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance with the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit:
Table 5-46 Channels for resistance measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit
Measuring type parameter Permissible Condition

for channel n
Resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels n+1 (1, 3,
(4-conductor connection) 5, 7).
Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the resistance
that is connected to channel n.
Unused channels
Unused channels can be left open. You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a
measuring environment with serious interference by short-circuiting the channels and
connecting to MANA. For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to
"deactivated". This reduces the module's cycle time.
Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges at the "measuring range" parameter in STEP 7.
Table 5-47 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit
Selected measuring method Measuring range Description

V: Voltage ±1 V The digitized analog values are listed in the section "Repre‐
1 V to 5 V sentation of analog values for output channels" in the voltage
±10 V measuring range.
2DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA The digitized analog values are listed in the section "Repre‐
(2-wire transducer) sentation of analog values for output channels in the current
measuring range".

Analog modules

4DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA The digitized analog values are listed in the section "Repre‐
(4-wire transducer) ± 20 mA sentation of analog values for output channels in the current
measuring range".
R-4L: Resistance 600 Ω The digitized analog values are listed in the section "Repre‐
(4-conductor connection) sentation of analog values for output channels in the resist‐
ance-type sensor range".
Default
The "voltage" measuring method and "± 10 V" measuring range are set by default at the
module. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without
configuring the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit in STEP 7.
5.20.1 Features
Overview
● 8 inputs for current and voltage measurement
● 4 inputs for resistance and temperature measurement
● Particularly suited to temperature measurement
● Temperature sensor types configurable
● Linearization of sensor characteristic curves
● Supply voltage: 24 V DC only required for connection of 2-wire transducers
● Maximum permitted common mode voltage between channels or between channel and
central grounding point 120 V AC
Note
"Wire break" diagnostics
The diagnosis "wire break" can be configured for "voltage" measurement for this module,
but is not evaluated by the module in that measurement type.

Analog modules
CH0 Measuring
range
CH1 module 0
Bus S7-400
Bus control
A
MULTIPLEXER
OPTO RELAY
CH6 Measuring
range
CH7 module 3
+ 5V ENABLE
+ 15V 24 V Bus S7-400
L+
M 0V 0V Bus S7-400
- 15V

Analog modules
Thermocouples Resistance measurement

Voltage measurement- Resistance thermometer
Current measurement
1
2
3
L+ L+
4
5
6 M0+ CH0 Word 0 M0+
7 M0- M0-
8
9 CH0 Word 0
10
11 M1+ CH1 Word 2 IC0+
V
12 M1- IC0-
13
14
15
16 M2+ CH2 Word 4 M1+
17 M2- M1-
18
19 CH2 Word 4
20
21 M3 + CH3 Word 6 IC1+
22 M3- IC1-
23
24
25
26
27
28 M4+ CH4 Word 8 M2+
V
29 M4- M2-
30
31 CH4 Word 8
32
33 M5+ CH5 Word 10 IC2+
V
34 M5- IC2-
35
36
37
38 M6+ Word 12 M3 +
Tr CH6
39 M6- M3-
40
41 CH6 Word 12
42
43 M7+ CH7 IC3 +
Tr Word 14
44 M7- IC3-
45
46
47
M M M
48

Analog modules

Weight ca. 500 g
Number of inputs 8
Cable length
● Shielded Maximum 200 m
● In 80 mV - input range and for thermocouples Maximum 50 m
Rated load voltage L+ 24 V DC (only required for supply of 2-wire
transducers)
Supply voltage of the measuring transducers
● Supply current Maximum 50 mA
● Short-circuit proof Yes
sor
● Between channels and load voltage L+ Yes
● Between inputs and MANA (UCM) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)
● Between the inputs (UCM) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)
● Between bus and L+/M 2120 V DC
● Between analog section and L+/M 500 V DC
● Between L+/M and chassis ground 2120 V DC
Current consumption
● From load voltage L+ Maximum 200 mA (with 8 connected fully con‐
trolled 2-wire transducers)
nel)

Analog modules
● Integration time in ms 16.7 / 20
● Basic conversion time in ms 20.1 / 23.5
● Additional conversion time for resistance 40.2 / 47
measurement in ms
● Additional conversion time for wire-break 4.3 / 4.3
monitoring in ms
● Additional conversion time for resistance 5.5 / 5.5
measurement in ms
● Resolution (including overrange) 14 / 14 bit
● When smoothing is enabled 16 / 16 bit
Measured value smoothing Configurable in 4 stages
enabled)
Interference voltage suppression for f = nx (f1 ±1%),
(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2, ...
● Common mode interference (UCM < 120 Vss) > 100 dB
● Series-mode interference (peak value of fault < > 40 dB
rated value of input range)
● Voltage input
– ± 80 mV ± 0.38%
– ± 250 mV ± 0.35%
– ± 500 mV ± 0.35%
± 0.35%
– ±1V
± 0.35%
– ± 2.5 V
± 0.35%
– ±5V
± 0.35%
– 1 to 5 V
± 0.35%
– ± 10 V
● Current input
– 0 to 20 mA ± 0.35%
– ± 20 mA ± 0.35%
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0.35%

Analog modules
– 0 to 48 Ω; 4-wire measurement ± 0.35%
± 0.35%
– 0 to 600 Ω; 4-wire measurement
± 0.35%
– 0 to 5000 Ω; 4-wire measurement (around
6000 Ω) ± 0.5%
± 0.5%
± 0.5%
6000 Ω)
● Thermocouples
– TC type B ± 14.8 K
– TC type R ± 9.4 K
– TC type s ± 10.6 K
± 2.2 K
– TC type T
± 4.0 K
– TC type E
± 5.2 K
– TC type J
± 7.6 K
– TC type K
± 3.5 K
– TC type U
± 5.1 K
– TC type L ± 5.5 K
– TC type N
● Resistance thermocouples 4-conductor standard
measuring range ± 4.6 K
– Pt 100 ± 5.7 K
– Pt 200 ± 4.6 K
– Pt 500 ± 3.7 K
– Pt 1000 ± 0.9 K
– Ni 100 ± 0.9 K
– Ni 1000
Climatic measuring range ± 0.5 K
– Pt 100 ± 0.5 K
± 0.5 K
– Pt 200
± 0.5 K
– Pt 500
± 0.9 K
– Pt 1000
± 0.9 K
– Ni 100
– Ni 1000

Analog modules

– Pt 100 ± 8.2 K
– Pt 200 ± 6.5 K
– Pt 500 ± 5.2 K
– Pt 1000 ± 1.3 K
– Ni 100 ± 1.3 K
– Ni 1000
– Pt 100 ± 0.7 K
± 0.7 K
– Pt 200
± 0.7 K
– Pt 500
± 1.3 K
– Pt 1000
± 1.3 K
– Ni 100
– Ni 1000
● Voltage input
– ± 80 mV ± 0.17%
– ± 250 mV ± 0.15%
– ± 500 mV ± 0.15%
± 0.15%
– ±1V
± 0.15%
– ± 2.5 V
± 0.15%
– ±5V
± 0.15%
– 1 to 5 V
± 0.15%
– ± 10 V
● Current input
– 0 to 20 mA ± 0.15%
– ± 20 mA ± 0.15%
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0.15%
± 0.15%
± 0.15%
6000 Ω) ± 0.3%
± 0.3%
± 0.3%
6000 Ω)

Analog modules
● Thermocouples
± 1.2 K
– TC type T
± 1.8 K
– TC type E
± 2.3 K
– TC type J
± 3.4 K
– TC type K
± 1.8 K
– TC type U
± 2.3 K
– TC type N
– Pt 100 ± 2.5 K
– Pt 200 ± 2.0 K
– Pt 500 ± 1.6 K
– Pt 1000 ± 0.4 K
– Ni 100 ± 0.4 K
– Ni 1000
– Pt 100 ± 0.2 K
± 0.2 K
– Pt 200
± 0.2 K
– Pt 500
± 0.4 K
– Pt 1000
± 0.4 K
– Ni 100
– Ni 1000
– Pt 100 ± 4.9 K
– Pt 200 ± 3.9 K
– Pt 500 ± 3.1 K
– Pt 1000 ± 0.8 K
– Ni 100 ± 0.8 K
– Ni 1000
– Pt 100 ± 0.4 K
± 0.4 K
– Pt 200
± 0.4 K
– Pt 500
± 0.8 K
– Pt 1000
± 0.8 K
– Ni 100
– Ni 1000
Temperature error (relative to input range) ± 0.004 % / K

Analog modules

input range)
Interrupts None
Input ranges (rated values)/input resistance
● Voltage ± 80 mV / 1 MΩ
± 250 mV / 1 MΩ
± 500 mV / 1 MΩ
± 1 V / 1 MΩ
± 2.5 V / 1 MΩ
± 5 V / 1 MΩ
1 to 5 V / 1 MΩ
± 10 V / 1 MΩ
● Current 0 to 20 mA / 50 Ω
± 20 mA / 50 Ω
4 to 20 mA / 50 Ω
● Resistance 0 to 48 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 150 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 300 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 600 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 6000 Ω / 1 MΩ
(can be used up to 5000 Ω)
● Thermocouples TC type B / 1 MΩ
TC type R / 1 MΩ
TC type S / 1 MΩ
TC type T / 1 MΩ
TC type E / 1 MΩ
TC type J / 1 MΩ
TC type K / 1 MΩ
TC type U / 1 MΩ
TC type L / 1 MΩ
TC type N / 1 MΩ
● Resistance thermometer Pt 100 / 1 MΩ
Pt 200 / 1 MΩ
Pt 500 / 1 MΩ
Pt 1000 / 1 MΩ
Ni 100 / 1 MΩ
Ni 1000 / 1 MΩ
Permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction Maximum 18 V continuous
limit) 75 V for 1 ms (cycle clock ratio 1 : 20)
Permissible input current for current input (destruction 40 mA continuous
limit)

Analog modules
Sensor connection
– As 2-wire transducer Possible
● Load of 2-wire transducer Maximum 750 Ω

Characteristic curve linearization Configurable
● For thermocouples Type B, R, S, T, E, J, K, U, L, N
● For resistance thermometers Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000,
Ni 100, Ni 1000
Temperature compensation Yes, configurable
● Internal temperature compensation No
● External temperature compensation with Possible
compensating box
● External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Possible
● Compensation for definable reference junction Possible
temperature
Technical unit for temperature measurement Degrees Celsius

Analog modules

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit by means of measuring range
modules on the module and in STEP 7.
Measuring range modules

A measuring range module of the module matches two channels and one resistance channel
to each type of sensor. Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring method
and range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in the respective
section.
For an overview of the settings of specific measuring methods and ranges, refer to the
corresponding table in the section "Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431;
AI 8 x 14 Bit". The necessary settings are also shown on the label attached to the module.
Parameters
Parameters Value range Default set‐ Parame‐ Scope

ting1 ter type
Diagnostics
Measurement

Analog modules
Parameters Value range Default set‐ Parame‐ Scope

ting1 ter type
● Measuring method Deactiva‐ U Static Channel
ted Voltage
U
4DMU Current (4-wire
sensor)
sensor)
R-4L Resistance (4-
conductor con‐
nection)
R-3L Resistance (3-
conductor con‐
nection)
RTD-4L Thermal resistor
(linear, 4-con‐
ductor connec‐
tion)
RTD-3L Thermal resistor
(linear, 3-con‐
ductor connec‐
tion)
TC-L Thermocouple
(linear)
● Measuring range For information on configura‐ ± 10 V
ble measuring ranges of in‐
put channels, refer to the
chapter "Measuring methods
and measuring ranges of SM
431; AI 8 x 14 Bit".
● Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67 oC 0,00 oC Dynamic Module
● Interference frequency 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz Static Channel
suppression
● Smoothing None None Static Channel
Weak
Medium
Strong
RTD on Channel 0
Reference temperature val‐
ue dynamic
1
Measured value smoothing

You will find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in the
respective section.

Analog modules
The following figure shows for the module the number of module cycles, in the case of a step
response, after which the smoothed analog value is applied to almost 100%, depending on
the smoothing setting. The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input.

percent
100
63
50
0 50 100 150 200

average:
high:
Figure 5-26 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit
See also
Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules (Page 196)
Measuring methods
● Temperature measurement
You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the
"Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

Analog modules
Circuit variants for the channels

Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module. There are therefore
restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5 and 6/7,
as shown in the following table:
Table 5-49 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit
(6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)
Measuring method, Measuring method, channel n + 1

channel n
Deacti‐ Voltage Current Current R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-L
vated 4-DMU 2-DMU
Disabled x x x x x
Voltage x x x
Current 4-wire trans‐ x x
ducer
ducer
4-wire x
resistor
3-wire x
resistor
Four-wire thermal re‐ x
sistor
3-wire thermal x
resistor
Thermocouples x x x
Example
If you select "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 6, you can only disable the measuring
method or set "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 7.

Analog modules

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance and temperature with the SM
431; AI 8 x 14 Bit:
Table 5-50 Channels for resistance and temperature measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit
Measuring type parameter Permissible for Condition

channel n
Resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels n+1
(4-conductor connection) (1, 3, 5, 7).
Resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6 Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the
(3-conductor connection) resistance that is connected to channel n.
Thermal resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6
(linear, 4-wire connection)
Thermal resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6
(linear, 3-wire connection)
Circuit for reference junction compensation for thermocouples

If you select "RTD on Channel 0" as a reference junction for reference junction compensation
for thermocouples, the following applies:
Table 5-51 Thermocouple with reference junction compensation via RTD on channel 0

channel n
RTD on Channel 0 2 to 7 You must connect and configure on channel 0 a resistance thermom‐
eter with linearization, a 3 or 4-conductor connection in climatic
range. This means that channels 0 and 1 are assigned.
Reason: If channel 0 is to be used as the reference junction, a resist‐
ance-type sensor must be connected there to record absolute tem‐
peratures in the climatic range.
Unused channels
Unused channels can usually be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "A".
In measuring environments with strong interference, you can improve the module's immunity
to interference by short-circuiting the channels.
For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces
the module's cycle time.

Analog modules
Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges using the measuring range modules, and at the "measuring method"
parameter in STEP 7.
Table 5-52 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)
Selected measuring method Measuring range Measuring range module Description

(type of sensor) settings
V: Voltage ± 80 mV A The digitized analog values are lis‐
± 250 mV ted in the section "Representation
± 500 mV of analog values for analog input
±1V channels" in the voltage measur‐
± 2.5 V ing range.
±5V
1 to 5 V
± 10 V
2DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers with
(2-wire transducer) current you must connect 24 V to
the L+ and M front connector ter‐
minals.
The digitized analog values are lis‐
ted in the section "Representation
of analog values for analog input
channels" in the current measur‐
ing range.
4DMU: Current 0 mA to 20 mA C The digitized analog values are lis‐
(4-wire transducer) 4 mA to 20 mA ted in the section "Representation
± 20 mA of analog values for analog input
channels" in the current measur‐
ing range.
R-4L: Resistance 48 Ω A The digitized analog values are lis‐
(4-conductor connection) 150 Ω ted in the section "Representation
300 Ω of analog values for analog input
600 Ω channels" in the resistance meas‐
6000 Ω uring range.
R-3L: Resistance 300 Ω
(3-conductor connection) 600 Ω
6000 Ω

Analog modules
Selected measuring method Measuring range Measuring range module Description

(type of sensor) settings
TCL: Thermocouple (linear) Type B A The digitized analog values are lis‐
(temperature measurement) Type N ted in the section "Representation
Type E of analog values for analog input
Type R channels" in the temperature
Type S range.
Type J
Type L
Type T
Type K
Type U
RTD-4L: Thermal resistance Pt 100 Climatic A
(linear, 4-wire connection) Pt 200 Climatic
(temperature measurement) Pt 500 Climatic
RTD-3L: Thermal resistance Pt 1000 Climatic
(linear, 3-wire connection) Ni 100 Climatic
(temperature measurement) Ni 1000 Climatic
Pt 100 Standard
Pt 200 Standard
Pt 500 Standard
Pt 1000 Standard
Ni 100 Standard
Ni 1000 Standard
Defaults
The module has the following default settings in STEP 7:
● Channels 0 to 7: "Voltage" measuring method ; "± 10 V" measuring range
You can use these measuring methods and measuring ranges without configuring the SM 431;
AI 8 x 14 Bit in STEP 7.
5.21.1 Features
Overview
SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit has the following features:
● Rapid A/D change, therefore highly suited to highly dynamic processes
● 8 inputs for voltage/current measurement
● 4 inputs for resistance measurement

Analog modules
● Supply voltage: 24 V DC only required for connection of 2-wire transducers
potentials of the connected sensors and MANA 8 V AC
CH0 Measuring
range
CH1 module 0
Bus S7-400
Bus control
MANA A
MULTIPLEXER
Measuring
CH6 range
module 3
CH7
+ 5V ENABLE
L+
+ 15V +5V Bus S7-400
M
0V 0V Bus S7-400
MANA
- 15V

Analog modules
Voltage measurement Resistance measurement

Current measurement
1
2
3
L+ L+
4
5
7 V M0- M0-
8
9 CH0 Word 0
10
V
12 M1- IC0-
13
14
15
16 M2+ CH2 Word 4 M1+
17 M2- M1-
18
19 CH2 Word 4
20
21 M3 + CH3 Word 6 IC1+
22 M3- IC1-
23
24
25
26 MANA
27
28 M4+ CH4 Word 8 M2+
A
29 M4- M2-
30
CH4 Word 8
31
32
33 M5+ CH5 Word 10 IC2+
A
34 M5- IC2-
35
36
37
38 M6+ M3 +
Tr CH6 Word 12
39 M6- M3-
40
41 CH6 Word 12
42
43 M7+ CH7 Word 14 IC3 +
Tr
44 M7- IC3-
45
46
47
M M
48

Analog modules

Weight ca. 500 g
Number of inputs 8
Cable length
transducers)
sor
● Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes
● Between inputs and MANA (UCM) 8 V AC
● Between the inputs (UCM) 8 V AC
Current consumption
● From load voltage L+ Maximum 200 mA (with 8 connected fully con‐
trolled 2-wire transducers)
Measuring principle Instantaneous value conversion
nel)
● Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz None / 400 / 60 / 50

Analog modules
● Basic conversion time 52 µs

● Resolution (including overrange) 14 / 14 / 14
Measured value smoothing "None - strong" configurable
Time constant of the input filter 15 µs
Basic execution time of the module in ms (all channels 0.420
enabled)
Interference voltage suppression for f = nx (f1 ±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1, 2 , ...
Filter 400 / 60 / 50 Hz configured
● Voltage input
– ±1V ± 0.7%
– ± 10 V ± 0.9%
– 1 to 5 V ± 0.9%
● Current input
– ± 20 mA ± 0.8%
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0.8%
– 0 to 600 Ω; ± 1.0%
● Voltage input
– ±1V ± 0.6%
– ± 10 V ± 0.75%
– 1 to 5 V ± 0.75%
● Current input
– ± 20 mA ± 0.7%
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0.7%
– 0 to 600 Ω; ± 0.7%
Temperature error (relative to input range) ± 0.03% / K
input range)
Interrupts None

Analog modules
● Voltage ± 1 V / 100 kΩ
± 10 V / 100 kΩ
1 to 5 V / 100 kΩ
4 to 20 mA / 50 Ω
Permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction Maximum 18 V continuous;
Permissible input current for current input (destruction 40 mA continuous
limit)
Sensor connection

Analog modules
Introduction

section.
corresponding table in the section "Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431,
Parameters
Table 5-53 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

type
Measurement
● Measuring Disabled Static Channel
method U Voltage
4DMU Current (4-wire U
sensor)
sensor)
R-4L Resistance (4-con‐
ductor connection)
● Measuring range Refer to the respective section for ± 10 V
the measuring ranges of the input
channels that you can set.
● Noise 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; none 50 Hz
suppression
Strong
1

Analog modules

respective section. You can only set strong smoothing for the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit.
The module cycle time is a constant, irrespective of how many channels are enabled. It
therefore has no effect on the filter settling time, which is defined by the parameter assignment
of interference frequency suppression and smoothing.
Filter settling time with strong smoothing
Table 5-54 Interference frequency suppression and filter settling time with smoothing
Noise suppression Smoothing Filter settling time in ms

None Strong -
50 Hz Strong 100
60 Hz Strong 83,333
400 Hz Strong 12,5
Step response with strong smoothing

The following figure illustrates the contents of the table above. It shows the filter settling time
after which, in the case of a step response, the smoothed analog value is applied to almost
100%, depending on the interference frequency suppression that has been set. The figure
applies to every change of signal at an analog input.
Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal

in percent
100
63
50
0 12,5 30 60 83,333 100 120 150

Noise suppression Filter settling time in ms
400 Hz:
60 Hz:
50 Hz:
Figure 5-29 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0)

Analog modules
See also
Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (Page 262)

Analog modules
Measuring methods

restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5 and 6/7,
as shown in the following table:
(6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)
Measuring method, Measuring method, channel n + 1

channel n
Deacti‐ Voltage Current Current R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-L
vated 4-DMU 2-DMU
Disabled x x x x x
Voltage x x x
ducer
ducer
4-conductor resistor x
4-conductor thermal x
resistor
3-conductor thermal x
resistor
Thermocouples x x x
Example

Analog modules

431; AI 8 x 14 Bit:
Table 5-56 Channels for resistance measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

channel n
Resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels n+1
(4-conductor connection) (1, 3, 5, 7).
Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the
resistance that is connected to channel n.
Unused channels
Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "B". You can
improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious
interference by interconnecting M- and MANA.
Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges using the measuring range modules, and at the "measuring method"
parameter in STEP 7.
Table 5-57 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)
Selected measuring Measuring range Measuring range module set‐ Description

method (type of sensor) tings
V: Voltage ±1V A The digitized analog values are lis‐
1 to 5 V B ted in the section "Representation of
± 10 V analog values for analog input chan‐
nels" in the voltage measuring
range.
2DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers with
(2-wire transducer) current you must connect 24 V to the
L+ and M front connector terminals.
The digitized analog values are lis‐
ted in the section "Representation of
analog values for analog input chan‐
nels" in the current measuring range.
4DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA C The digitized analog values are lis‐
(4-wire transducer) ± 20 mA ted in the section "Representation of
nels" in the current measuring range.
R-4L: Resistance 600 Ω A The digitized analog values are lis‐
(4-conductor connection) ted in the section "Representation of
nels" in the resistance measuring
range.

Analog modules
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)
Defaults
● Channels 0 to 7: "Voltage" measuring method ; "± 10 V" measuring range
You can use these measuring methods and measuring ranges without configuring the SM 431;
AI 8 x 14 Bit in STEP 7.
5.22.1 Features
Overview
● 16 inputs for current/voltage measurement
● Non-isolated between analog section and bus
potentials of the connected sensors and central grounding point 2 V DC/AC

Analog modules
Measuring range module
Multiplexer
*
Control and backplane bus connection

*
Tr
Tr
Tr
Tr
* Tr = Transducer = Measuring
transducer
Tr
*Voltage/current sensor and ground
must be connected to building ground
Tr
of the rack
Tr
Tr

Analog modules
Voltage measurement
Current measurement
1
2
3 L+
L+
4
5
6 M0+ CH0 Word 0
7 M0-
8 M1+ CH1 Word 2
9 M1-
10
11 M2+ CH2 Word 4
12 M2-
13 M3+ CH3 Word 6
14 M3-
15
16 M4+ CH4 Word 8
Tr
17 M4-
18 M5+ CH5 Word 10
Tr
19 M5-
20
21 Tr M6+ CH6 Word 12
22 M6-
23 Tr M7+ CH7 Word 14
24 M7-
25
26
27
28 M8+ CH8 Word 16
29 M8-
30 M9+ CH9 Word 18
31 M9-
32
33 M10+ CH10 Word 20
34 M10-
35 M11+ CH11 Word 22
36 M11-
37
38 M12+ CH12 Word 24
Tr
39 M12-
40 M13+ CH13 Word 26
Tr
41 M13-
42
43 M14+ CH14 Word 28
Tr
44 M14-
45 Tr M15+ CH15 Word 30
46 M15-
47 M
M
48

Analog modules

Weight ca. 500 g
Number of inputs 16
Shielded Maximum 200 m
transducers)
● Supply voltage of the measuring transducers
● Constant measured current for resistance-based Typ. 1.67 mA
sensor
● Between channels and backplane bus No
● Between channels and load voltage L+ No
● Between inputs and MANA (UCM) 2 V DC / 2 V ACSS
● Between the inputs (UCM) 2 V DC / 2 V ACSS
● Between bus and chassis ground 500 Vac or 707 Vdc (type test)
● Current consumption
● From load voltage L+ (with 16 connected fully Maximum 400 mA
controlled 2-wire transducers)
nel)
● Integration time in ms 50 / 60
● Basic conversion time in ms 55 / 65
● Resolution (including overrange) 13 bits
Measured value smoothing Not possible
enabled)

Analog modules
● Common mode interference (UCM < 2 V) > 86 dB
● Voltage input
– ±1V ± 0.65%
– ± 10 V ± 0.65%
– 1 to 5 V ± 1%
● Current input
– ± 20 mA ± 0.65%
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0.65%
● Voltage input
– ±1V ± 0.25%
– ± 10 V ± 0.25%
– 1 to 5 V ± 0.5%
● Current input
– ± 20 mA ± 0.25%
– 4 to 20 mA ± 0.25%
input range)
Interrupts None
● Voltage ± 1 V / 10 MΩ
± 10 V / 100 MΩ
1 to 5 V / 100 MΩ
4 to 20 mA / 50 Ω
Permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction 20 V continuous;
Permissible input current for current input (destruction 40 mA
limit)
Sensor connection

Analog modules


Analog modules
Introduction

A measuring range module of the module matches two consecutive channels to each type of
sensor. Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring method and range.
The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in the respective section.
Parameters

type
Measurement
● Measuring Disabled U Static Channel
method U Voltage
sensor)
sensor)
● Measuring range For information on configurable ±10 V
measuring ranges of input chan‐
nels, refer to the chapter "Meas‐
uring methods and measuring
ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit".
● Noise 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz
suppression
1
See also
Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (Page 288)
General information about diagnostic messages (Page 88)

Analog modules
Measuring methods

restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5, 6/7, 8/9,
10/11, 12/13 and 14/15, as shown in the following table:
Measuring method, chan‐ Measuring method, channel n + 1

nel n Disabled Voltage Voltage 1 to 5 Voltage ±10 V Current 4- Current 2-
±1 V V DMU DMU
Disabled x x x x x x
Voltage ±1 V x x
Voltage 1 to 5 V x x x
Voltage ±10 V x x x
Current 4-wire transducer x x
Example
Unused channels
Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "B". You can
interference by interconnecting M- and MANA.

Analog modules
Measuring ranges
You set the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and
the "Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.
Selected measuring meth‐ Measuring range Measuring range module Description

od (type of sensor) settings
V: Voltage ±1 V A The digitized analog values are listed in
1 to 5 V B the section "Representation of analog
± 10 V values for analog input channels" in the
voltage measuring range.
2DMU: Current (2-wire sen‐ 4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers with current
sor) you must connect 24 V to the L+ and M
front connector terminals.
The digitized analog values are listed in
the section "Representation of analog
values for analog input channels" in the
current measuring range.
4DMU: Current (4-wire sen‐ 4 to 20 mA C The digitized analog values are listed in
sor) ± 20 mA the section "Representation of analog
values for analog input channels" in the
current measuring range.
Default
● Measuring method "voltage"
● Measuring range "± 10 V".
You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without configuring
the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit in STEP 7.
See also
Representation of analog values of analog input channels (Page 169)

Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)
5.23.1 Features
Overview
● 16 inputs for voltage measurement, current measurement and temperature measurement
with thermocouples (TC)
● 8 inputs for resistance and temperature measurement with resistance thermometers (RTD)
● Configurable limit alarm
● Configurable end-of-cycle interrupt

Analog modules
CH0 Meas. range I

module 0 const
CH1
D
Bus S7-400
Bus control
Signal
jumper-
ing PGA
A
Multiplexer
Opto relay
CH14 Meas. range

CH15 module 7
+ 15 V
L+ + 5V +5V
Diagnostics Bus S7-400
in 0V
M 0V
L+ loop -15 V

Analog modules
Thermocouples Resistance measurement

Voltage measurement Resistance thermometer
INTF Current measurement
1
EXTF 2
3
L+ L+
4
5
7 M0- M0- CH0 Word 0
9 M1- IC0-
10
11 M2+ CH2 Word 4 M1+
V
12 M2- M1- CH2 Word 4
13 M3 + CH3 Word 6 IC1+
V
14 M3- IC1-
15
16 M4+ CH4 Word 8 M2+
17 M4- M2- CH4 Word 8
18 M5+ CH5 Word 10 IC2+
19 M5- IC2-
20
21 M6+ CH6 Word 12 M3 +
22 M6- M3- CH6 Word 12
23 M7+ CH7 IC3 +
Word 14
24 M7- IC3-
25
26
27
28 M8+ CH8 Word 16 M4+
A
29 M8- M4- CH8 Word 16
30 A M9+ CH9 Word 18 IC4+
31 M9- IC4-
32
33 M10+ CH10 Word 20 M5+
A
34 M10- M5- CH10 Word 20
35 M11+ CH11 Word 22 IC5+
A
36 M11- IC5-
37
38 M12+ CH12 Word 24 M6+
Tr
39 M12- M6- CH12 Word 24
40 M13+ CH13 Word 26 IC6+
Tr
41 M13- IC6-
42
43 M14+ CH14 M7+
Tr Word 28
44 M14- M7- CH14 Word 28
45 M15+ CH15 IC7+
Tr Word 30
46 M15- IC7-
47
M M
48

Analog modules

Weight ca. 500 g
Number of inputs 16
Cable length
Shielded with input range ≦ 80 mV and with thermo‐ Maximum 200 m Maximum 50 m
couples
transducers)
sor
● Between inputs and MANA (UCM) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)
● Between the inputs (UCM) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)
Current consumption
● From load voltage L+ (with 16 connected fully Maximum 400 mA
controlled 2-wire transducers)
nel)

Analog modules
● Interference voltage suppression f1 in Hz 400 / 60 / 50
● Integration time in ms 2.5 / 16.7 / 20
● Basic conversion time in ms 6 / 20.1 / 23.5
● Additional conversion time for resistance 12 / 40.2 / 47
measurement with 3-wire connection in ms
● Additional conversion time for wire-break 4.3 / 4.3 / 4.3
monitoring in ms
● Additional conversion time for resistance 5.5 / 5.5 / 5.5
measurement in ms
● Resolution (including overrange) 16 / 16 / 16 bits
Measured value smoothing Configurable in 4 stages
Basic execution time of the module in ms (all channels 96 / 322 / 376
enabled)
● Voltage input
– ± 25 mV ± 0.35%
– ± 50 mV ± 0.32%
– ± 80 mV ± 0.31%
± 0.3%
– ± 250 mV
± 0.3%
– ± 500 mV
± 0.3%
– ±1V
± 0.3%
– ± 2.5 V
± 0.3%
– ±5V
± 0.3%
– 1 to 5 V ± 0.3%
– ± 10 V
● Current input
– 0 to 20 mA ± 0.3%
– ± 5 mA ± 0.3%
– ± 10 mA ± 0.3%
± 0.3%
– ± 20 mA
± 0.3%
– 4 to 20 mA

Analog modules
± 0.3%
± 0.3%
6000 Ω) ± 0.4%
± 0.4%
± 0.4%
6000 Ω)
● Thermocouples
± 1.7 K
– TC type T
± 3.2 K
– TC type E
± 4.3 K
– TC type J
± 6.2 K
– TC type K
± 2.8 K
– TC type U
± 4.2 K
– TC type N
– Pt 100 ± 4.9 K
– Pt 200 ± 3.9 K
– Pt 500 ± 3.1 K
– Pt 1000 ± 0.8 K
– Ni 100 ± 0.8 K
– Ni 1000
– Pt 100 ± 0.4 K
± 0.4 K
– Pt 200
± 0.4 K
– Pt 500
± 0.8 K
– Pt 1000
± 0.8 K
– Ni 100
– Ni 1000

Analog modules

– Pt 100 ± 6.5 K
– Pt 200 ± 5.2 K
– Pt 500 ± 4.2 K
– Pt 1000 ± 1.0 K
– Ni 100 ± 1.0 K
– Ni 1000
– Pt 100 ± 0.5 K
± 0.5 K
– Pt 200
± 0.5 K
– Pt 500
± 1.0 K
– Pt 1000
± 1.0 K
– Ni 100
– Ni 1000
● Voltage input
– ± 25 mV ± 0.23%
– ± 50 mV ± 0.19%
– ± 80 mV ± 0.17%
± 0.15%
– ± 250 mV
± 0.15%
– ± 500 mV
± 0.15%
– ±1V
± 0.15%
– ± 2.5 V
± 0.15%
– ±5V
± 0.15%
– 1 to 5 V ± 0.15%
– ± 10 V
● Current input
– 0 to 20 mA ± 0.15%
– ± 5 mA ± 0.15%
– ± 10 mA ± 0.15%
± 0.15%
– ± 20 mA
± 0.15%
– 4 to 20 mA

Analog modules
± 0.15%
± 0.15%
6000 Ω) ± 0.3%
± 0.3%
± 0.3%
6000 Ω)
● Thermocouples
± 1.1 K
– TC type T
± 1.8 K
– TC type E
± 2.3 K
– TC type J
± 3.4 K
– TC type K
± 1.7 K
– TC type U
± 2.3 K
– TC type N
– Pt 100 ± 2.5 K
– Pt 200 ± 2.0 K
– Pt 500 ± 1.6 K
– Pt 1000 ± 0.4 K
– Ni 100 ± 0.4 K
– Ni 1000
– Pt 100 ± 0.2 K
± 0.2 K
– Pt 200
± 0.2 K
– Pt 500
± 0.4 K
– Pt 1000
± 0.4 K
– Ni 100
– Ni 1000

Analog modules

– Pt 100 ± 4.9 K
– Pt 200 ± 3.9 K
– Pt 500 ± 3.1 K
– Pt 1000 ± 0.8 K
– Ni 100 ± 0.8 K
– Ni 1000´
– Pt 100 ± 0.4 K
± 0.4 K
– Pt 200
± 0.4 K
– Pt 500
± 0.8 K
– Pt 1000
± 0.8 K
– Ni 100
– Ni 1000
input range)
Interrupts
● Limit alarm Configurable
– For internal fault Red LED (INTF)
– For external fault Red LED (EXTF)
● Voltage ± 25 mV / 1 MΩ
± 50 mV / 1 MΩ
± 80 mV / 1 MΩ
± 250 mV / 1 MΩ
± 500 mV / 1 MΩ
± 1 V / 1 MΩ
± 2.5 V / 1 MΩ
± 5 V / 1 MΩ
1 to 5 V / 1 MΩ
± 10 V / 1 MΩ

Analog modules
● Current 0 to 20 mA / 50 Ω
± 5 mA / 50 Ω
± 10 mA / 50 Ω
± 20 mA / 50 Ω
4 to 20 mA / 50 Ω
0 to 150 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 300 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 600 Ω / 1 MΩ
0 to 6000 Ω / 1 MΩ (can be used up to 5000
Ω)
● Thermocouples TC type B / 1 MΩ
TC type R / 1 MΩ
TC type S / 1 MΩ
TC type T / 1 MΩ
TC type E / 1 MΩ
TC type J / 1 MΩ
TC type K / 1 MΩ
TC type U / 1 MΩ
TC type L / 1 MΩ
TC type N / 1 MΩ
● Resistance thermometer Pt 100 / 1 MΩ
Pt 200 / 1 MΩ
Pt 500 / 1 MΩ
Pt 1000 / 1 MΩ
Ni 100 / 1 MΩ
Ni 1000 / 1 MΩ
Permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction Maximum 18 V continuous;
Permissible input current for current input (destruction 40 mA
limit)
Sensor connection
– With 2-wire connection Possible;
– line resistance is also measured
Possible
● For thermocouples Type B, R, S, T, E, J, K, U, L, N

Analog modules
● For resistance thermometers Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni

1000
● Internal temperature compensation No
● External temperature compensation with Possible
compensating box
● External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Possible
● Compensation for definable reference junction Possible
temperature
Technical unit for temperature measurement Degrees Celsius

Analog modules


section.
Parameters

type
Enable
● End of scan cycle reached at input Yes/no No Static Channel
● Low limit -32512 to 32511
Diagnostics
Yes/no No
● Short-circuit to M
Measurement

Analog modules

type
● Measuring method Disabled U Static Channel
U Voltage
4DMU Current
(4-wire transducer)
2DMU Current
(2-wire transducer)
R-4L Resistance
(4-conductor connec‐
tion)
R-3L Resistance
(3-conductor connec‐
tion)
RTD-4L Thermal resistance
(linear, 4-wire connec‐
tion)
RTD-3L Thermal resistance (lin‐
ear,
3-conductor connection)
TC-L Thermocouple (linear)
● Measuring range For information on configurable meas‐ ±10 V
uring ranges of input channels, refer to
the section "Measuring methods and
measuring ranges of SM 431; Ai 16x16
Bit".
● Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67 oC 0,00 oC Dynamic Module
● Noise suppression 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz
Weak
Medium
Strong
RTD on Channel 0
Reference temperature value
1
ER-1/ER-2.
2
A point to note about channels for hardware interrupts with the end of scan cycle trigger
You can configure hardware interrupts for the end of scan cycle for one of the 16 channels
because the module can only trigger these interrupts on one channel.

respective section.

Analog modules

percent
100
63
50
0 20 40 60 80 100
average:
high:
Figure 5-34 Step response of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)
Displaying parameter assignment errors

The SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit has diagnostics capability. Below you will find an overview of the
displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors.
Table 5-62 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit
Incorrect parameter assign‐ Possible display Explanation

ment
Of the module ● Module error You will find explanations of the di‐
agnostics information in the re‐
● Internal error
spective tables.
● Incorrect parameters
Affecting certain channels ● Module error
● Internal error
● Channel error
● Channel information available
● Channel error vector
● Channel parameter
assignment error

Analog modules
See also
Parameters of analog input modules (Page 201)

Analog modules
Measuring methods

restrictions as regards to the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5, 6/7,
8/9, 10/11, 12/13 and 14/15, as shown in the following table:
Measuring method, channel Measuring method channel n+1

n deacti‐ Voltage Current Current R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-L
vated 4-DMU 2-DMU
Disabled x x x x x
Voltage x x x
Four-wire thermal resistor x
3-wire thermal x
resistor
Thermocouples x x x
Example

Analog modules
Circuit for resistance and temperature measurement

431; AI 16 x 16 Bit:
Table 5-64 Channels for resistance and temperature measurement of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit

channel n
Resistance 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels
(4-conductor connection) or 14 n+1 (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15).
Resistance 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the
(3-conductor connection) or 14 resistance that is connected to channel n.
Thermal resistance 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
(linear, 4-wire connection) or 14
Thermal resistance 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
(linear, 3-wire connection) or 14
Thermocouple (linear) 0 to 15 You can select the reference junction. It is only advisable to
specify a reference junction with thermocouples.
Circuit for reference junction compensation for thermocouples

If you select "RTD on Channel 0" as a reference junction for reference junction compensation
for thermocouples, the following applies:
Table 5-65 Reference junction compensation via RTD on channel 0 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit
Reference junction parameters Permissible for channel n Condition

RTD on Channel 0 2 to 15 You must connect and configure on channel 0 a
resistance thermometer with linearization, a 3- or
4-conductor connection in climatic range. This
means that channels 0 and 1 are assigned.
Reason: If channel 0 is to be used as the refer‐
ence junction, a resistance-type sensor must be
connected there to record absolute temperatures
in the climatic range.
Unused channels
Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "A". You can
interference by short-circuiting the channels.

Analog modules
Measuring ranges
You set the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and
the "Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.
Selected measuring method Measuring range Measuring range module set‐ Description
(type of sensor) tings
V: Voltage ± 25 mV A The digitized analog values
± 50 mV are listed in the section "Rep‐
± 80 mV resentation of analog values
± 250 mV for analog input channels" in
± 500 mV the voltage measuring range.
±1V
± 2.5 V
±5V
1 to 5 V
± 10 V
2DMU: Current (2-wire sen‐ 4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers
sor) with current you must con‐
nect 24 V to the L+ and M
front connector terminals.
The digitized analog values
are listed in the section "Rep‐
resentation of analog values
for analog input channels" in
the current measuring range.
4DMU: Current (4-wire sen‐ ± 5 mA C The digitized analog values
sor) ± 10 mA are listed in the section "Rep‐
0 to 20 mA resentation of analog values
4 to 20 mA for analog input channels" in
± 20 mA the current measuring range.
R-3L: Resistance 300 Ω A The digitized analog values
(3-conductor connection) 600 Ω are listed in the section "Rep‐
6000 Ω resentation of analog values
(maximum 5000 Ω) for analog input channels" in
R-4L: Resistance 48 Ω the resistance measuring
150 Ω range.
(4-conductor connection)
300 Ω
600 Ω
6000 Ω
(maximum 5000 Ω)
TC-L: Thermocouple (linear) Type B A The digitized analog values
(Temperature measurement) Type N are listed in the section "Rep‐
Type E resentation of analog values
Type R for analog input channels" in
Type S the temperature range.
Type J
Type L
Type T
Type K
Type U

Analog modules
Selected measuring method Measuring range Measuring range module set‐ Description
(type of sensor) tings
RTD-3L: Thermal resistance Pt 100 Climatic A The digitized analog values
(linear, 3-conductor connec‐ Pt 200 Climatic are listed in the section "Rep‐
tion) (temperature measure‐ Pt 500 Climatic resentation of analog values
ment) Pt 1000 Climatic for analog input channels" in
Ni 100 Climatic the temperature range.
RTD-4L: Thermal resistance
Ni 1000 Climatic
(linear, 4-conductor connec‐ Pt 100 Standard
tion) (temperature measure‐ Pt 200 Standard
ment) Pt 500 Standard
Pt 1000 Standard
Ni 100 Standard
Ni 1000 Standard
Default
The "voltage" measuring method and "± 10 V" measuring range are set by default in STEP 7.
You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without configuring
the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit in STEP 7.
Wire break monitoring

The wire break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements (TC, RTD) or
resistance measurements. Always configure the wire break check in these cases as this
ensures that in the event of a wire break the measured value provided by the module accepts
the data for overrun 7FFFH.
Special characteristics of the wire break check for the voltage measurement methods
In some transducers, incorrect measured values may occur due to the fact that the wire break
check is enabled. If so, disable the wire break check.
Reason: Some transducers try to correct the test current and in doing so corrupt the setpoint
value they provide.
Points to note about the wire break check when current sensors are connected
A wire break check of current sensors is not possible for the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit except in
life-zero areas. You can therefore only configure the wire break check for the "Current (4-wire
transducer)" measuring method and the "4 to 20 mA" measuring range.
Checking for reference channel errors when connecting thermocouples

If you have connected a thermocouple, you can then enable the "Reference channel error"
diagnostics if you have configured an "RTD on Channel 0" or "Reference Temperature Value"
reference junction.

Analog modules
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)
Points to note about checking for "Underflow" with some measuring methods and measuring ranges
There is now underflow in life-zero areas. A value that is too low or is negative is interpreted
as a wire break. You can therefore not configure the underflow check for the SM 431; AI 16 x
16 Bit for the following measuring methods and ranges:
Table 5-67 Points to note when checking for "Underflow"
Measuring method Measuring range

Voltage 1 to 5 V
Current (4-wire sensor) 4 to 20 mA
Current (2-wire sensor) 4 to 20 mA
Points to note about the "Short-circuit to M" diagnostics

You can only configure the check for "Short-circuit to M" for the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit for the
"Current (2-wire transducer)" measuring method.
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

(6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)
5.24.1 Features
Overview
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit has the following features:
● 8 differential inputs for resistance thermometer
● Resistance thermometer configurable
● Linearization of characteristic curves of the resistance thermometer
● Update rate 25 ms for 8 channels
● Analog section isolated from CPU
● The maximum permitted common mode voltage between channels and central grounding
point is 120 V AC

Analog modules
Calibration software
The calibration software is only available over the Internet. You will find the latest version of
the calibration software under entry ID 12443337.
Following the installation of this software, you can specify user-specific calibration values for
each channel and each input range. Further information can be found under ID 12436891 on
the Customer Support FAQ page.
Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
SO+0
SE+0
SE-0
AGND CH0
CH1
Electrical
isolation
CH2
Backplane
A/Dconverter bus Bus S7-400
CH3 interface
Internal
CH4
power supply
CH5
CH6
SO+7
SE+7
SE-7
AGND CH7
Figure 5-35 Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Analog modules
Note
An external protective network is required for the signal lines in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5
(12 V Blitzductor, model CT919-506, connected in series with all inputs as recommended by
the manufacturer).

Analog modules
Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
INTF 1
EXTF 2
3
4
5
6 SE+0
7 SE-0 Word 0
CH0
8 SO0
9 AGND
10
11 SE+1
12 SE-1
CH1 Word 1
13 SO1
14 AGND
15
16 SE+2
17 SE-2
CH2 Word 2
18 SO2
19 AGND
20
21 SE+3
22 SE-3 Word 3
CH3
23 SO3
24 AGND
25
26
27
28 SE+4
29 SE-4
CH4 Word 4
30 SO4
31 AGND
32
33 SE+5
34 SE-5
CH5 Word 5
35 SO5
36 AGND
37
38 SE+6
39 SE-6
CH6 Word 6
40 SO6
41 AGND
42
43 SE+7
44 SE-7
CH7 Word 7
45 SO7
46 AGND
47
48
Figure 5-36 Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Analog modules
Technical specifications for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Dimensions W x H x D (in mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight ca. 650 g
Number of inputs 8
Cable length
Constant current for resistance-based sensor Typ. 1 mA
Between MANA and Mintern (UISO) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)
Insulation tested at 1500 V DC
Current consumption
Integration time/conversion time/resolution
● Basic conversion time 8 ms/23 ms/25 ms
(all channels enabled)
Additional conversion time / repeat rate
● Wire-break monitoring 110 ms/4 s
● 3-wire compensation 110 ms/390 s
● Internal self-calibration
No interference frequency suppression 50 ms/110 s
50/60 Hz
● Resolution, including sign 210 ms/390 s
16 bits
● Interference voltage suppression for interference None/50/60
frequency f1 in Hz
Measured value smoothing Parameters can be assigned in 4 stages
Basic response time of the module (all channels ena‐ 8 ms/23 ms/25 ms
bled)
Noise suppression for f = n (fl ± 1%), (f1 = interf. freq.) n = 1, 2, ...
● Common mode interference (Ucm < 120 V) > 100 dB
● Series-mode interference (peak value of > 50 dB
interference < rated value of input range)

Analog modules

● RTD input RTD-4L RTD-3L
– Pt 100 ±1.8 °C ± 3.4 °C
– Pt 200 ± 0.8 °C ± 1.7 °C
– Pt 500 ± 0.4 °C ± 0.7 °C
± 0.3 °C ± 0.4 °C
– Pt 1000
± 1.5 °C ± 2.1 °C
– Ni 100
± 0.2 °C ± 0.3 °C
– Ni 1000
– Pt 100 ± 0.5 °C ± 1.0 °C
– Pt 200 ± 0.3 °C ± 0.5 °C
– Pt 500 ± 0.3 °C ± 0.4 °C
± 0.2 °C ± 0.2 °C
– Pt 1000
± 0.3 °C ± 0.6 °C
– Ni 100
± 0.2 °C ± 0.2 °C
– Ni 1000
Linearity error (relative to input range)
Additional fault
– Pt 100 ± 0.2 °C ± 0.3 °C
– Pt 200 ± 0.2 °C ± 0.2 °C
– Pt 500 ± 0.1 °C ± 0.1 °C
± 0.1 °C ± 0.1 °C
– Pt 1000
± 0.1 °C ± 0.2 °C
– Ni 100
± 0.1 °C ± 0.1 °C
– Ni 1000
Repeat accuracy (in settled state at 25°C, relative to
input range) Additional fault
– Pt 100 ± 0.2 °C ± 0.3 °C
– Pt 200 ± 0.2 °C ± 0.2 °C
– Pt 500 ± 0.1 °C ± 0.1 °C
± 0.1 °C ± 0.1 °C
– Pt 1000
± 0.1 °C ± 0.2 °C
– Ni 100
± 0.1 °C ± 0.1 °C
– Ni 1000
Interrupts
● Hardware interrupt when limit value exceeded Configurable

Analog modules

– For internal fault Red LED (INTF)
– For external fault Red LED (EXTF)
– Diagnostic information can be read out Possible

● Resistance thermometer Pt 100/> 10M
Pt 200/> 10M
Pt 500/> 10M
Pt 1000/> 10M
Ni 100/> 10M
Ni 1000/> 10M
Maximum input voltage for voltage input 35 V continuous;
(destruction limit) 75 V for max. 1 s
(duty factor 1:20)
Connection of encoder
● For resistance measurement with 3-wire connection Possible
(max. permissible line resistance 10 Ohm)
● With 4-wire connection Possible
For RTD resistance temperature detection Pt100...1000,
0.00385 Alpha to
DIN IEC 751
Ni 100...1000,
0.00618 Alpha to
DIN 43760
1
Measuring range
● PT100, PT200 -200 °C to +850 °C
● PT 500 -200 °C to +800 °C
● PT 1000 -200 °C to +240 °C
● Ni 100 -60 °C to +250 °C
● Ni 1000 -60 °C to +130 °C
User data in engineering format Degrees C/
Degrees F
1
7KF10 does not support all measuring ranges for S7.

Analog modules
5.24.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

You set the operating mode of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit in STEP 7.
Parameters
Table 5-68 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

type
Enable
Trigger for hardware interrupt 3)
- Dynamic Channel
● High limit 32767 to - 32768
● Low limit - 32768 to 32767
Diagnostics
Measurement
● Measuring method Disabled RTD-3L
(linear, 4-conductor con‐
nection)
(linear, 3-conductor con‐
nection)
● Measuring range Refer to the respective section for the Pt 100
measuring ranges of the input channels Standard
that you can set.
● Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Static Module
Celsius

Analog modules

type
● Temperature coefficient for For platinum (Pt) 0,00385 Static Channel
temperature measurement 0.00385 Ω/Ω/ °C
with thermal resistance (RTD) 0.003916 Ω/Ω/ °C
0.003902 Ω/Ω/ °C
0.003920 Ω/Ω/ °C
For nickel (Ni)
0.00618 Ω/Ω/ °C
0.00672 Ω/Ω/ °C
● Noise suppression 60 Hz; 50 Hz; none 60 Hz
Smoothing None None Static Channel
Weak
Medium
Strong
1
ER-1/ER-2.
2
3
The limit values must be within the temperature range of the connected sensor.

respective section.

percent
100
63
50
0 20 40 60 80 100

average:
high:
Figure 5-37 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Analog modules

The SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit is capable of diagnostics. Below you will find an overview of
the displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors.
Table 5-69 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit
Incorrect parameter as‐ Possible display Explanation

signment
Of the module ● Module error You will find explanations of
the diagnostics information in
● Internal error
the respective tables.
● No module parameters
● Internal error
● Channel error
● Channel parameter assignment error
● User calibration does not correspond
to the parameter assignment
See also
Parameters of analog input modules (Page 201)

Analog modules
5.24.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit
Measuring methods
You can set the temperature measurement as the measuring method for the input channels.
Unused channels
Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges by means of the "Measuring range" parameter in STEP 7.
Table 5-70 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

RTD-3L: Thermal resistance Pt 100 Standard The digitized analog values are listed in the
(linear, 3-conductor connec‐ Pt 200 Standard section "Analog Values of the Analog Input
tion) Pt 500 Standard Channels" in the temperature range.
(temperature measurement) Pt 1000 Standard
RTD-4L: Thermal resistance Ni 100 Standard
(linear, 4-conductor connec‐ Ni 1000 Standard
tion)
(temperature measurement)
Default
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are "Thermal resistor (linear, 3-conductor
connection)" for the measuring method and "Pt 100 Standard" for the measuring range. You
can use this measuring method with this measuring range without configuring the SM 431; AI
8 x RTD x 16 Bit with STEP 7.
See also
Representation of analog values of analog input channels (Page 169)

Analog modules
5.25.1 Features
Overview
● 8 isolated differential inputs for voltage/current/ temperature measurement
● 26 measuring range settings
● Linearization of characteristic curves of the thermocouple
● Analog section isolated from CPU
● Field connection (6ES7431-7K00-6AA0) with internal reference temperature (included in
scope of delivery)
Calibration software
The calibration software is only available over the Internet. You will find the latest version of
the calibration software under entry ID 12443337.
Following the installation of this software, you can specify user-specific calibration values for
each channel and each input range. Further information can be found under ID 12436891 on
the Customer Support FAQ page.

Analog modules
M0+ A/Dconverter
M0+
R0
Internal
M0- supply
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
Backplane
Bus S7-400
bus interface
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
Note
An external protective network for the signal lines is required in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5
(12 V Blitzductor, model CT919-506, connected in series with all inputs as recommended by
the manufacturer).

Analog modules
Optional connector Connector with Thermocouples

(screw-type) temperature reference Voltage measurement
Current measurement
INTF 1
EXTF 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 M0+ M0+
0 M0+ M0+
10 CH0 Word 0
11 R0 R0
12 M0- M0-
13
14 M1+ M1+
1 M1+ M1+
15
R1 R1 CH1 Word 1
16
17 M1- M1-
18
19 M2+ M2+
2 M2+ M2+
20
A R2 V R2 CH2 Word 2
21
22 M2- M2-
23
24 M3 + M3 +
3
25 M3 + M3 + CH3 Word 3
V R3 V R3
26
27 M3- M3-
28
29 M4+ M4+
4 30 M4+ M4+
V R4 A R4 CH4 Word 4
31
32 M4- M4-
33
34 M5+ M5+
5 M5+ M5+
35
A R5 A R5 CH5 Word 5
36
37 M5- M5-
38
39 M6+ M6+
6 M6+ M6+
40
Tr Tr CH6 Word 6
41 R6 R6
42 M6- M6-
43
44 M7+ M7+
7 M7+ M7+
45 CH7
Tr Tr Word 7
46 R7 R7
47 M7- M7-
48
6ES7492-1AL00-0AA0 6ES7431-7KF00-6AA0

Analog modules

Dimensions W x H x D (in mm) 25 x 290 x 210
Weight ca. 650 g
Number of inputs 8
Cable length
● Shielded 200 m
In groups of 1
● between the inputs (UCM) 60 V DC/30 V AC (SELV)
Insulation tested at 1500 V DC
Current consumption max. 1200 mA
● From backplane bus (5 V)
Module power loss typical 4.6 W
Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per chan‐
nel)
● Integration time in ms 2.5 16.7 20 100
● Basic conversion time in ms 10 16.7 20 100
● Resolution, including sign 16 bits
● Interference voltage suppression 400 60 50 10
● for interfering frequency f1 in Hz
● Measured value smoothing Parameters can be assigned in 4 stages
● Basic response time of the module (all channels 40 67 80 400
enabled)
Noise suppression for f = nx(fl ± 1%), (f1 = interfering frequency) n = 1, 2, ...
● Common mode interference (Ucm < 120 V)
Current, thermocouple and voltage ranges < 2.5 V > 120 dB
Voltage ranges ≥2.5 V > 95 dB
Crosstalk between inputs (Ucm < 120 V)
Current, thermocouple and voltage ranges ≥ 2.5 V > 120 dB
Voltage range ≥ 2.5 V > 95 dB
● Series-mode interference (peak value of > 80 dB
interference < rated value of input range)

Analog modules

● Voltage input ± 0.30 %
● Current input ± 0.50 %
● Temperature error (relative to input range) 2
Over the temperature range of:

Type U ± 3.6 °C
-100 °C to 600 °C
Type L ± 2.9 °C
0 °C to 900 °C
Type T ± 2.1 °C
-100 °C to 400 °C
Type J ± 5.0 °C
-100 °C to 1200 °C
Type E ± 4.6 °C
-100 °C to 1000 °C
Type K ± 3.8 °C
0 °C to 1372 °C
Type N ± 5.7 °C
0 °C to 1300 °C
Type S ± 5.3 °C
200 °C to 1769 °C
Type R ± 6.7 °C
200 °C to 1769 °C
Type B ± 7.3 °C
400 °C to 1820 °C
Noise suppression, error limits (continuation)
● Input voltage ± 0.10 %
● Input current ± 0.17%
● Temperature error (relative to input range) Over temperature range of:
2
Type U ± 1.2 °C
-100 °C to 600 °C
Type L ± 1.0 °C
0 °C to 900 °C
Type T ± 0.7 °C
-100 °C to 400 °C
Type J ± 1.7 °C
-100 °C to 1200 °C
Type E ± 1.5 °C
-100 °C to 1000 °C
Type K ± 1.3 °C
0 °C to 1372 °C
Type N ± 1.9 °C
0 °C to 1300 °C
Type S ± 1.8 °C
200 °C to 1769 °C
Type R ± 2.2 °C
200 °C to 1769 °C

Analog modules
Type B ± 2.2 °C
400 °C to 1820 °C
Linearity error (relative to input range) Additional error
± 0.05%
Repeat accuracy (in settled state at 25°C, relative to Additional error
input range) ± 0.05%
Connection for compensation of cold connection point 6ES7431-7KF00-
6AA0
Operational limit
● Internal temperature compensation error Additional error
± 2.0%
Interrupts
● Hardware interrupt when limit value exceeded Configurable
● Group fault display Configurable
For internal fault Red LED (INTF)
For external fault Red LED (EXTF)
Diagnostic information can be read out Possible
Monitoring for
● wire break
● Voltage ± 25 mV > 2 MΩ
± 50 mV > 2 MΩ
± 80 mV > 2 MΩ
± 100 mV > 2 MΩ
± 250 mV > 2 MΩ
± 500 mV > 2 MΩ
± 1 V > 2 MΩ
± 2.5 V > 2 MΩ
± 5 V > 2 MΩ
+ 1 to 5 V > 2 MΩ
± 10 V > 2 MΩ
● Current ± 20 mA 50 Ω
+ 4 to 20 mA 50 Ω
± 10 mA 50 Ω
± 5 mA 50 Ω
± 3,2 mA 50 Ω
● Thermocouple Types B, N, > 2 MΩ
E, R, S, J, L,
T, K, U
Maximum input voltage 35 V continuous;
for voltage input (destruction limit) 75 V for max. 1 s
(duty factor 1:20)
Maximum input current for current input (destruction 32 mA
limit)

Analog modules
Connection of encoder
● at measuring voltage Possible
● for current measurement as 4-wire transducer Possible
Characteristic curve linearization
● For thermocouples Types B, N, E, R, S, J, L, T, K, U
● Internal temperature compensation Possible
User data in engineering format Degrees C/ degrees F
1
The 6ES7431-7KFOO-0AB0 does not support the values defined for S7 for the overreaches and sub-
ranges of thermocouples. Depending on the situation, underflow (32768) or overflow (327767) is dis‐
played when the module reaches the end of the thermocouple operating range defined for S7.
2
Operation of thermocouples above the specified temperatures is possible.
The specified accuracy is at the lower end of the range and is better at higher temperatures.
The accuracy of the thermocouple module at temperatures other than those specified can be calculated
using the limit values for the accuracy of input voltage and emf/°C of the thermocouple at the required
temperature.

Analog modules

You set the operating mode of the SM 431; AI 8 x16 Bit in STEP 7.
Parameters

type
Enable
● Hardware interrupt 1 Yes/no No Dynamic
● Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static
Trigger for hardware interrupt3)
● Low limit - 32768 to 32767 -
Diagnostics
Measurement
● Measuring method Disabled TC-L Static Channel
U Voltage
4DMU Current
(4-wire transduc‐
er)
TC-L Thermocouple
(linear)
● Measuring range For information on configurable Type J
measuring ranges of input chan‐
nels, refer to the section "Measur‐
ing methods and measuring rang‐
es of SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit".
● Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67 oC 100 oC Dynamic Module
-327.68 to 327.67 C o

Analog modules

type
● Temperature unit4 Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahren‐ Degrees Celsius Static Module
heit
● Noise suppression 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 60 Hz
● Smoothing None, weak, medium, strong None
● Reference junction (reference None Internal Static Module
to the cold junction) Internal
Reference temperature value dy‐
namic
1
ER-1/ER-2.
2
3
The limit values must be within the temperature range of the connected sensor.
4
Valid for the format of the output temperature and the dynamic reference temperature

For generally valid information on analog value smoothing, refer to the section "Conversion
and cycle and response times of analog modules".
The cycle time of the module is a constant in the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit that is not dependent
on the number of channels that are enabled. It therefore has no effect on the step response,
which is defined by the parameter assignment of interference frequency suppression and
smoothing.
Step response
Table 5-72 How response times depend on the configured interference frequency suppression and smoothing of the SM
431; AI 8 x 16 Bit
Interference frequency sup‐ Response time in ms with configured smoothing:

pression in Hz
None Weak Medium Strong
10 100 200 1600 3200
50 20 40 320 640
60 16,7 33,3 267 533
400 10 20 160 320
The following figures illustrate the contents of table above. They show the response time
required for a step response before the smoothed analog value is almost applied to 100%.
The figures apply to every change of signal at an analog input.

Analog modules
Step response at an interference frequency suppression of 10 Hz

percent
100
Smoothing
None:
Low:
average:
high:
0
800 1600 2400 3200
100 Response time in ms
200
Figure 5-40 Step response at 10 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

percent
100
Smoothing
None:
Low:
average:
high:
0 40 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640

20 Response time in ms

Analog modules

percent
100
Smoothing
None:
Low:
average:
high:
0 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640

16,7 267 533
33,3 Response time in ms

percent
100
Smoothing
None:
Low:
average:
high:
0 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640

10
Response time in ms
20

Analog modules

The SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit has diagnostics capability. Below you will find an overview of the
displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors.
Table 5-73 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit
Incorrect parameter as‐ Possible display Explanation

signment
Of the module ● Module error You will find explanations of
the diagnostics information in
● Internal error
the respective tables.
● No module parameters
● Internal error
● Channel error
● Channel parameter assignment error
● User calibration does not correspond
to the parameter assignment
See also

Analog modules
Measuring methods
You perform the setting with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7.
Unused channels
Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges by means of the "Measuring range" parameter in STEP 7.

V: Voltage ±25 mV The digitized analog values are listed in the sec‐
±50 mV tion "Representation of analog values for analog
±80 mV input channels" in the voltage measuring range.
±100 mV
±250 mV
±500 mV
±1 V
±2.5 V
±5 V
±10 V
from 1 to 5 V
4DMU: Current (4-wire sensor) ±3.2 mA The digitized analog values are listed in the sec‐
±5 mA tion "Representation of analog values for analog
±10 mA input channels" in the current measuring range.
±20 mA
from 0 to 20 mA
from 4 to 20 mA
TC-L: Thermocouple (linear) Type B The digitized analog values are listed in the sec‐
(Temperature measurement) Type N tion "Representation of analog values for analog
Type E input channels" in the temperature range.
Type R
Type S
Type J
Type L
Type T
Type K
Type U

Analog modules
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)
Default
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are "Thermocouple (linear)" for the measuring
method and "Type J" for the measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring
method and measuring range without configuring the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit in STEP 7.
5.26.1 Features
Overview
SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit has the following properties:
● 8 outputs
● the output can be selected for each channel as
– Voltage output
– current output
● Analog section potential-free relative to CPU and load voltage
● Maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels or between channels
and MANA 3 V DC

Analog modules
Block diagram of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit
CH0
A
CH1
Bus S7-400
Bus control
CH2
CH3
CH4
D CH5
CH6
CH7
24 V
L+/M
Analog supply
Figure 5-44 Block diagram of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit

Analog modules
Connection diagram of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit
Voltage output Current output
1
2
3
L+ L+ L+
4
5
6 QV0 CH0 Word 0 QI0 CH0 Word 0
7 S0+
8 S0-
9
10
12 S1 +
13 S1-
14
15
17 S2+
18 S2-
19
20
22 S3 +
23 S3-
24
25 MANA M ANA M ANA
26
27
29 S4+
30 S4-
31
32
34 S5+
35 S5-
36
37
39 S6+
40 S6-
41
42
44 S7+
45 S7-
46
47
M
48 M M
Figure 5-45 Connection diagram of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit

Analog modules
Technical specifications of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit

Weight ca. 650 g
Number of outputs 8
Cable length
Supply voltage of electronics L+ 24 V DC
● between the outputs (UCM) 3 V DC
● between S- and MANA (UCM) 3 V DC
Current consumption
● Supply and load voltage L+ (at rated load) Maximum 400 mA
Module power loss typ. 9 W
Resolution (including overrange) 13 bits
Conversion time (per channel)
● in the ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA 420 µs
● in all ranges 300 µs
Basic execution time of the module (all channels enabled)
● in the ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA 3.36 ms
● in all other ranges 2.4 ms
Settling time
● for resistive load 0.1 ms

Analog modules
● for capacitive load 3.5 ms

● for inductive load 0.5 ms
Noise suppression for f = n (f1 ± 1%), (f1 = interfering frequency) n= 1.2 ...
● Common mode interference (UCM < AC 3 Vss / 50 > 60 dB
Hz)
Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, relative to output range)
● Voltage output
– ± 10 V ± 0.5%
– 0 to 10 V ± 0.5%
– 1 to 5 V ± 0.5%
● current output
– ± 20 mA ± 1%
– 4 to 20 mV ± 1%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25°C, relative to output range)
● Voltage output
– ± 10 V ± 0.5%
– 0 to 10 V ± 0.5%
– 1 to 5 V ± 0.5%
● current output
– ± 20 mA ± 0.5%
– 0 to 20 mA ± 0.5%
Temperature error (relative to output range) ± 0.02 % / K
Linearity error (relative to output range) ± 0.05%
Repeat accuracy (in settled state at 25 °C, relating to ± 0.05%
output range)
Output ripple; bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz (relative to output ± 0.05%
range)
Interrupts None
Output range (nominal values)
● Voltage ± 10 V0 to 10 V1 to 5 V
● Current ± 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Load impedance (in rated range of output)
● at voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ
– capacitive load max. 1 µF

Analog modules
● at current outputs max. 500 Ω

– inductive load 600 Ω at reduced UCM to < 1 V
max. 1 mH
Voltage output
● Short-circuit protection Yes
● Short-circuit-current Maximum 30 mA
current output
● No-load voltage max. 19 V
Destruction limit against externally applied voltages / currents
● Voltage at the outputs against MANA max. 20 V continuous
75 V for1 ms (duty cycle 1:20
● Current max. 40 mA continuous
Connection of actuators
● for voltage output
– 2-wire connection possible, without compensation of line resis‐
tances
– 4-wire connection (measurement cable)
Possible
● for current output
– 2-wire connection Possible

Analog modules
5.26.2 Commissioning the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit
Parameters
For an overview of configurable parameters and defaults, refer to the "Parameters of analog
output modules" table.
Assigning parameters to channels

The parameters can be set separately at each output channel of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit. You
can thus assign individual parameters to each output channel.
See also

Analog modules
5.26.3 Output ranges of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit
Configuration of analog output circuits

You can configure the outputs for operation as voltage or current outputs, or disable these.
You configure the output circuits at the "output type" parameter in STEP 7.
Unused channels
To make sure that unused output channels of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit are de-energized, set the
"Output type" parameter to "deactivated" and leave the terminal open.
Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.
Table 5-75 Output ranges of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit
Selected type of output Output range Description

Voltage 1 V to 5 V The digitized analog values are listed in
0 V to 10 V the section "Representation of analog
± 10 V values for analog output channels" in
Current 0 to 20 mA the voltage or current output range.
4 to 20 mA
± 20 mA
Default
The output type "Voltage" and output range "± 10 V" are set by default at the module. You can
always use this combination of output type and range without having to program the SM 432;
AO 8 x 13 Bit in STEP 7.

Analog modules

Interface modules 6
6.1 Common features of the interface modules
Function
Interface modules (a send IM and a receive IM) are required if one or more expansion racks
(ER) are to be connected to a central rack (CR). This configuration is described in the
Installation manual.
Configuration
Interface modules must always be used together. The send modules (send IMs) are inserted
in the CR, whilst the corresponding receive modules (receive IMs) are plugged into the series-
connected ER.
Table 6-1 Interface modules of the S7-400
Partner Areas of application

IM 460-0 Send IM for local link without PS transfer; with communication bus
IM 461-0 Receive IM for local link without PS transfer; with communication bus
IM 460-1 Send IM for local link with PS transfer; without communication bus
IM 461-1 Receive IM for local link with PS transfer; without communication bus
IM 460-3 Send IM for remote link up to 102.25 m; with communication bus
IM 461-3 Receive IM for remote link up to 102.25 m; with communication bus
IM 460-4 Send IM for remote link up to 605 m; without communication bus
IM 461-4 Receive IM for remote link up to 605 m; without communication bus
Overview of the connections

Note the rules for connections in the section after next.
Table 6-2 Overview of the connections
Local connection Remote connection

Send IM 460-0 460-1 460-3 460-4
Receive IM 461-0 461-1 461-3 461-4
Max. number of connectable EMs per line 4 1 4 4
Max. distance 5m 1.5 m 102.25 m 605 m
V transfer No Yes No No
Max. current transfer per interface - 5A - -
Communication bus transmission Yes No Yes No

Interface modules
Connection possibilities for central racks and expansion racks

IM 460-4
IM 460-3
IM 460-1
Central controller IM 460-0
Expansion without 5-V transmission at local range

Expansion device EC 1 Expansion device EC 4
IM 461-0 IM 461-0
Line length max. 5 m
Expansion with 5-V transmission in local range

Expansion device EC 1
IM 461-1
Line length max. 1.5 m
Expansion in plant-wide field environment
IM 461-3 IM 461-3
Line length max. 102.25 m
IM 461-4 IM 461-4
Line length max. 605 m

Interface modules
Rules for connection

When you connect a central rack to expansion racks, you must observe the following rules:
● You can connect up to 21 ERs of the S7-400 to one CR.
● The ERs are assigned numbers to identify them. The rack number must be set on the coding
switch of the receive IM. Any rack number between 1 and 21 may be assigned. Numbers
must not be duplicated.
● You may insert up to six send IMs in one CR. However, only two send IMs with 5 V transfer
are allowed in one CR.
● Each line connected to the interface of a send IM can comprise up to four ERs (without 5
V transfer) or one ER (with 5 V transfer).
● The exchange of data via the communication bus is limited to 7 racks, meaning the CR and
ER numbers 1 to 6.
● The maximum (total) cable lengths specified for the type of connection must not be
exceeded.
Table 6-3 Cable for different connections
Connection type Maximum (total) line

length
Local connection with 5 V transfer via IM 460-1 and IM 461-1 1.5 m
Local connection without 5 V transfer via IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 5m
Remote connection via IM 460-3 and IM 461-3 102.25 m
Remote connection via IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 605 m
Terminator
The bus must be terminated in the last EU of a line. To do this, plug in the appropriate terminator
in the lower front connector of the receive IM in the last EU of the line. Unused front connectors
in a send IM do not have to be terminated. The IM 461-1 does not require a terminator.
Table 6-4 Terminators for the Receive IMs
Receive IM Terminator
IM 461-0 6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0
IM 461-3 6ES7461-3AA00-7AA0
IM 461-4 6ES7461-4AA00-7AA0
The following figure shows you a typical configuration with send IMs, receive IMs and
terminators.

Interface modules
2
3
Figure 6-1 Example: Configuration with send IMs, receive IMs and terminators
(1) Receive IM
(2) Terminator
(3) Receive IM
(4) Send IM
(5) CR

Interface modules
Cables
Precut cables are available in different fixed lengths for connecting the individual interface
modules. (See Appendix "Accessories and spare parts").
Table 6-5 Cables for interface modules
Interface modules Cables

IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 6ES7468-1... (P bus and communication bus are transferred)
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1 6ES7468-3... (P bus is transferred; mounting rack is supplied with
current via the IM)
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 6ES7468-1...
Installation and removal of the modules during operation

Please read the following warning on the insertion and removal of the interface modules and
associated cables.
CAUTION
Data may be lost or corrupted.
Removing or inserting the interface modules and/or their associated cables under voltage
can result in the loss or corruption of data.
Switch off the power supply modules to the CR and ERs you are working on before you carry
out any changes.

Interface modules
6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0 (6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0)
6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0

(6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0)
Function
The interface module pair IM 460-0 (send IM) and IM 461-0 (receive IM) are used for a local
link.
Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0
IM 460-0 IM 461-0
X IM 460-0 IM 461-0 X
460-XXXXX-XXXX 461-XXXXX-XXXX
/('V
EXTF INTF
EXTF INTF EXTF
C1 EXTF
C2
',3VZLWFK
8QGHUFRYHU
&RQQHFWRU;
3RUW& IN
X1 X1
&RQQHFWRU;
3RUW& OUT
'RQRWSOXJWHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWRU
X2 X2
Figure 6-2 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0

Interface modules
Operator controls and indicators on the send IM
Table 6-6 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM
LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (terminator missing
or broken cable)
C1 LED (green) Line 1 (via front connector X1, connection 1) is correct.
C1 LED (flashing An EU in the line is not ready for operation because:
green) ● The power supply module is not switched on
● A module has not yet completed the initialization process
Front connectors Connector (output) for line 1 and line 2
X1 and X2 X1 = upper front connector; X2 = lower front connector
The LEDs EXTF, C1 and C2 do not light up if the terminator is not inserted or the line is
interrupted when in POWER ON mode. In this case the IM 460 identifies an unoccupied
interface.
Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM
Table 6-7 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM
LEDs Meaning
INTF LED (red) Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set.
Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage.
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the terminator
is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process).
DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack.
Front connector Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.
X1
Front connector X2 Lower connector (output) for the cable to the next interface module or for the
terminator.
Parameter assignment for the mounting rack number

Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the mounting
rack in which the receive IM is installed. The permitted range is 1 to 21.

Interface modules
Setting/changing the number

Proceed as follows:
1. Set the switch of the power supply module in the EU in which you want to make the change
to the position (Output voltage 0 V).
2. Enter the number using the DIP switch.
3. Switch the power supply module on again.
Specifications of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0
Maximum line length (total) 5m

Abmessungen B x H x T (mm) 25 x 290 x 280
Weight
● IM 460-0 600 g
● IM 461-0 610 g
Current consumption from the
S7-400 bus 5 VDC
● IM 460-0 Typ. 130 mA
Max. 140 mA
● IM 461-0 Typ. 260 mA
Max. 290 mA
Power loss
● IM 460-0 Typ. 650 mW
Max. 700 mW
● IM 461-0 Typ. 1300 mW
Max. 1450 mW
Terminator 6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0
Backup current None

Interface modules
6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1 (6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)
6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1

(6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)
Function
The interface module pair IM 460-1 (send IM) and IM 461-1 (receive IM) are used for a local
link (up to a maximum 1.5 m in total). A 5 V supply voltage is also transferred with these
interface modules. Please particularly remember the following points:
● The current requirements of the module plugged into the ER must not exceed 5 V/5 A.
● You can only connect one ER per line.
● The modules in this mounting rack are not supplied with 24 V and are not backed up.
● The communication bus is not transferred with the interface module pair IM 460-1 and IM
461-1.
● You must not use a power supply module in the ER.
Note
If you connect an ER via a local link with 5 V transmission, ungrounded operation is
prescribed for the ER (see Installation Manual).

Interface modules
IM 460-1 IM 461-1
X IM 460-1 X
LEDs
EXTF INTF
EXTF INTF EXTF
C1 EXTF
C2
DC 5 V
DC 5 V
',3VZLWFK
8QGHUFRYHU
&RQQHFWRU;
3RUW& IN
X1
X1
&RQQHFWRU;
3RUW&
'RQRWSOXJWHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWRU
X2
LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (broken cable)
C1 LED (flashing A module has not yet completed the initialization process.
green)

Interface modules
LEDs Meaning
C2 LED (flashing A module has not yet completed the initialization process.
green)
The LEDs EXTF, C1 and C2 do not light up if the line is interrupted when in POWER ON mode.
In this case the IM 460 identifies an unoccupied interface.
LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if a module has
not yet completed the initialization process but not when the CC is switched off)
5 VDC (green) Power supply in the ER is correct.
Front connector Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.
X1
CAUTION
Modules can be damaged.
If you want to connect an ER via the IM 461-1 interface module and use a power supply
module in this ER, you might damage the modules.
Do not use a power supply module in an ER that you want to connect to the CR via the IM
461-1 interface module.
Parameter assignment for the mounting rack number


Proceed as follows:
1. Set the power supply module in the CR to the position (Output voltage 0 V).

Interface modules
Maximum line length (total) 1.5 m

Weight
● IM 460-1 600 g
● IM 461-1 610 g
Current consumption from the S7-400
bus 5 VDC
● IM 460-1 Typ. 50 mA, max. 85 mA
● IM 461-1 Typ. 100 mA, max. 120 mA
Power loss
● IM 460-1 Typ. 250 mW, max. 425 mW
● IM 461-1 Typ. 500 mW, max. 600 mW
Power supply for ER V/5 A per line
Backup current None

Interface modules
6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3 (6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)
6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3

(6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)
Function
The interface module pair IM 460-3 (send IM) and IM 461-3 (receive IM) are used for a remote
link of up to a maximum 102.25 m (exactly: 100 m plus inputs/outputs of 0.75 m in the line).
Position of operator control and display elements

IM 460-3 IM 461-3
X IM 460-3 IM 461-3 X
LEDs
INTF
EXTF
EXTF INTF EXTF
C1 EXTF
C2
DIP switch
Under cover
Connector X1:
Interface C1 IN
X1
X1
Connector X2:
Interface C2 OUT
X2 X2

Interface modules
LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Strand 1 or strand 2 fault (cable break)
interface.
LEDs Meaning
is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process,
or if the CC is switched off)
Front connector X1 Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.
terminator.
If required, you can change the distance setting for the line on the programming device using
STEP 7.
The default setting for the distance is 100 m.

Interface modules
Ensure that the distance corresponds as closely as possible to the current length (the sum of
all the cables per line) as this will accelerate data transmission.
Note
The distance set must always be longer than the actual length of cable per line.

Proceed as follows:
Maximum line length (total) 102.25 m

Abmessungen B x H x T (mm) 25 x 290 x 280
Weight
● IM 460-3 630 g
● IM 461-3 620 g
Current consumption from the S7-400 bus 5 VDC
● IM 460-3 Typ. 1350 mA
Max. 1550 mA
● IM 461-3 Typ. 590 mA
Max. 620 mA
Power loss
● IM 460-3 Typ. 6750 mW
Max. 7750 mW
● IM 461-3 Typ. 2950 mW
Max. 3100 mW
Backup current None

Interface modules
6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4; (6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)
6.5 Interface modules IM 460-4; (6ES7460-4AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-4;

(6ES7461-4AA01-0AA0)
Function
The interface module pair IM 460-4 (send IM) and IM 461-4 (receive IM) are used for a remote
link of up to a maximum 605 m (exactly: 600 m plus inputs/outputs of 1.5 m in the line).
IM 460-4 IM 461-4
X IM 460-4 IM 461-4 X
LEDs
EXTF INTF
EXTF INTF EXTF
C1 EXTF
C2
DIP switch
Under cover
Connector X1:
Interface C1 IN
X1
X1
Connector X2:
Interface C2 OUT
X2 X2

Interface modules
LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (terminator missing
or broken cable)
interface.
LEDs Meaning
is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process,
or if the CC is switched off)
Front connector X1 Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.
terminator.
If required, you can change the distance setting for the line on the programming device using
STEP 7.
The default setting for the distance is 600 m.

Interface modules
Ensure that the distance corresponds as closely as possible to the current length (the sum of
all the cables per line) as this will accelerate data transmission.
Note
The distance set must always be longer than the actual length of cable per line.

Proceed as follows:
Maximum line length (total) 605 m

Weight
● IM 460-4 630 g
● IM 461-4 620 g
Current consumption from the S7-400 bus 5 VDC
● IM 460-4 Typ. 1350 mA
Max. 1550 mA
● IM 461-4 Typ. 590 mA
Max. 620 mA
Power loss
● IM 460-4 Typ. 6750 mW
Max. 7750 mW
● IM 461-4 Typ. 2950 mW
Max. 3100 mW
Backup current None
Compatibility
You cannot use the IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 interface modules with CPUs that have the following
order numbers:
● 6ES7412-1XF00-0AB0
● 6ES7413-1XG00-0AB0
● 6ES7413-2XG00-0AB0
● 6ES7414-1XG00-0AB0

Interface modules
● 6ES7414-2XG00-0AB0
● 6ES7416-1XJ00-0AB0

Interface modules

S5 interface IM 463-2 7
7.1 Using SIMATIC S5 expansion units in an S7-400
Order number
6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0
Area of application
The IM 463-2 interface module is used for distributed connection of S5 expansion units to an
S7-400. You can use the IM 463-2 in the CR of the S7-400. You can use an IM 314 in the S5
expansion unit.
This allows you to connect the following S5 expansion units to an S7-400:
● EG 183U with IM 314 in slot 3
● ER 701-2 with IM 314 in slot 7
● ER 701-3 with IM 314 in slot 7
Accordingly, you can use all digital and analog I/O modules suitable for these EUs or ERs.
Basic requirement
If you connect an S5 expansion unit to a CR of the S7-400 via an IM 463-2, the SIMATIC S5
basic requirements concerning EMC, ambient conditions, etc., apply for the overall system.
Note
In environments contaminated by radiated noise, you must apply the type 721 cable shield
(see Installation manual).

S5 interface IM 463-2
7.1 Using SIMATIC S5 expansion units in an S7-400
Mounting and removing the FM 463-2

Please read the following warning on the mounting and removal of the IM 463-2 and associated
cables.
CAUTION
Data may be lost or corrupted.
Removing or inserting the IM 463-2 and/or their associated cables under voltage can result
in the loss or corruption of data.
Switch off the power supply modules to the central rack you are working on before you carry
out any changes.
Expanding the distributed connection

You can also centrally expand the EUs connected in a distributed configuration via an IM 463-2.
The following table lists the S5 interface modules that you can use for this purpose.
Table 7-1 S5 interface modules
Module Order number

IM 300 6ES5 300-5CA11
6ES5 300-3AB11
6ES5 300-5LB11
IM 306 6ES5306-7LA11

7.2 Rules for connecting S5 expansion units
7.2 Rules for connecting S5 expansion units
Introduction
When you connect S5 expansion units to an S7-400 via the IM 463-2, there are rules to observe
with regard to cable length, maximum expansion, use of a terminating connector and
permissible potential differences.
Cable length
The maximum cable length per IM 463-2 from the CR of the S7-400 to the last S5 expansion
unit is 600 m. You set the actual cable length at the IM 463-2.
Maximum configuration
You can use up to four IM 463-2s in one S7-400 CR.
At each IM 463-2 interface (C1 and C2), you can connect up to four S5 expansion units in a
distributed configuration.
You can connect further EUs centrally to the EUs connected in the distributed configuration.
Addressing of the S5 modules

All S5 address areas are available (P, Q, IM3, IM4)
Note
Note that every S5 address can only be used once, even across different lines.
Terminator
You must terminate the IM 314 of the last EU in each line with the 6ES5760-1AA11 terminating
connector.
Permissible potential differences

For the safe functioning of the distributed configuration, you must ensure that the potential
difference between two devices is not more than 7 V. Use an equipotential bonding conductor.
See also
Operator controls and indicators (Page 348)

Introduction
All controls and indicators on the IM 463-2 are arranged on the front plate. The following figure
shows the arrangement of the controls and indicators.
IM 463-2
X
463-2AA..-....
EXTF
LEDs EXTF, C1, C 2
OFF
Interface Selector Switch Interface selector switch
Cable Length Selector Selector Cable length selector switch
X1 connector
Interface C1
X2 connector
Interface C2
Figure 7-1 Layout of the controls and indicators of the IM 463-2

LEDs
Table 7-2 LEDs of the IM 463-2
LED Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 has a fault
(power supply failed in the EU; terminating connector missing; wire break, or inter‐
face selector switch wrongly set).
Interface selector switch
Table 7-3 Switch position: Interface selector of the IM 463-2
Switch setting Meaning

C1 ON You use only interface C1.
C2 ON You use only interface C2.
C1, C2 ON You use both interfaces.
C1, C2 OFF You use neither of the two interfaces.
You do not want to operate an S5 EU at present.
Cable length selector switch
Table 7-4 Switch position: Cable length selector of the IM 463-2
Switch setting Meaning

100 Cable length 1 to 100 m
WARNING
Danger of data loss.
Changing the setting of the interface selector switch and the cable length selector switch in
RUN mode can result in loss of data.
Change the settings of these switches only in STOP mode of the CPU.

7.4 Installing and connecting the IM 463-2
Overview
To install an IM 463-2 in a CR of the S7-400, proceed in the same way as when installing other
S7-400 modules (see Installation manual).
To connect an IM 463-2, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Prepare the cable
2. Plug in the cable
3. Select the interface
4. Select the cable length
Prepare the cable

You can use the cable 721. However, you must change the connector housing on the
connection side of the IM 463-2.
Two connector housings are enclosed with every IM 463-2. You can prepare a cable for an
IM 463-2 using one of these connector housings and a 721 cable (see Catalog ST 54.1).
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove one connector housing on the 721 cable.
2. Open one of the connector housings enclosed with the IM 463-2.
3. Attach this connector housing to the 721 cable.
4. Close the connector housing.
Plug in the cable

To plug in the cable, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Open the cover of the IM 463-2.
2. Plug the new connector of the cable into one of the connectors of the IM 463-2.
Interface C1 corresponds to the upper connector;
Interface C2 corresponds to the lower connector.
3. Screw the connector of the cable onto the connector of the IM 463-2.
4. Close the cover.
Select the interface

You select the interface with the selector switch on the front plate. Set the interface(s) here
that you want to use. Make the settings on the IM 463-2 only when the CPU is in STOP mode.

Select the cable length

You select the cable length with the selector switch on the front plate. Set the range
corresponding to the line length. Make the settings on the IM 463-2 only when the CPU is in
STOP mode.

7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314
Introduction
To operate the IM 463-2, you must set on the IM 314 the S5 expansion unit used and the
address area of the S5 I/O modules.

Setting the S5 expansion unit

You set the S5 expansion unit in which you want to use the IM 314 using jumpers BR1, BR2,
and BR3 on the IM 314. The following figure shows where these jumpers are located on the
IM 314 and which setting corresponds to which expansion unit.
Table 7-5 Settings of the IM 314 using expansion units
Used in EU 185U, EU 186U

4321 4321 off
S1 on
BR 1 BR 2
X3 X1
4321
BR 3
X4 X2
4321 4321 Used in EU 183 U

S1 off
on
BR 1 BR 2
X3 4321 X1
BR 3
X4 X2

Used in ER 701-2, ER 701-3

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 S1 off
on
BR 1 BR 2
X3 X1
4321
BR 3
X4 X2
Setting the address area

The address area of the S5 I/O modules is set on the IM 314. This setting applies only for the
digital and analog I/O modules.
The address areas P, Q, IM3, and IM4 are available. Set the switch to the relevant position to
address the digital and analog I/O modules in these areas.
Table 7-6 Settings address areas on the IM 314
I/O area address Switch position

O = OFF, 1 = ON The first two switches on the left are
P area: F000 - F0FF S1: 0000 * not relevant.
Q area: F100 - F1FF 0001
IM3 area: FC00 - FCFF 1100
OFF
IM4 area: FD00 - FDFF 1101
ON
* Factory state

7.6 Configuring S5 modules for operation in the S7-400
Example
You program S5 modules in STEP 7. Refer to the description in the STEP 7 manual or the
online help to learn how this is done.
The following figure shows a possible connection of CRs and EUs via the IM 463-2 and IM
314.

Further EU 184U,
EU 187U (central)
S5- S5- S5-

Expansion IM 312-3 Expansion IM 312-3 Expansion IM 312-5
rack rack rack
IM 314 IM 314 IM 314
S5- S5- S5-

Expansion IM 300-3 Expansion IM 300-3 Expansion IM 300-5
rack rack rack
Terminating connector 760-1AA11
All 721 connecting cables
S5- S5-
Expansion IM 312-3 Expansion IM 312-5
rack rack
Central
mounting rack IM 314 IM 314
S7-400 S5- S5-

IM 463-2 Expansion IM 300-3 Expansion IM 300-5
rack rack
Terminating connector 760-1AA11
All 721 connecting cables

} To further S5 expansion units (distributed)
(max. 4 per IM 463-2)
max. 600 m
Figure 7-2 Connection variant for CCs and EUs via the IM 463-2 and IM 314

7.7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable
Pin assignments of the 721 cable
Table 7-7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable
34 50 17 1
1 17 50 34
Connector Bundle ID sheath Identification foil Core color Connector

50-pin Contact 50-pin Contact
20 white 20
21 brown 21
4 green 4
5 1 yellow 5
18 No. 16 Red gray 18
19 pink 19
2 blue 2
3 red 3
24 white 24
25 brown 25
8 green 8
9 2 yellow 9
22 No. 17 green gray 22
23 pink 23
6 blue 6
7 red 7
26 white 26
27 brown 27
10 green 10
11 3 yellow 11
42 No. 18 yellow gray 42
43 pink 43
44 blue 44
45 red 45
28 white 28
29 brown 29
12 green 12
13 4 yellow 13
46 No. 19 brown gray 46
47 pink 47
30 blue 30
31 red 31

34 white 34
35 brown 35
36 5 green 36
37 No. 20 black yellow 37
38 gray 38
39 pink 39
40 blue 40
41 red 41
48 white 48
49 brown 49
14 6 green 14
15 No. 21 blue yellow 15
32 gray 32
33 pink 33
- Shield -

7.8 Terminating connector for IM 314
Introduction
The IM 314 of the last expansion unit of each line is terminated with the 6ES5 760-1AA11
terminating connector.
Table 7-8 Assignment of the terminator 760-1AA11
Assignment of the terminator 760-1AA11
1 17
34 50
Plug connection 180-Ohm resistance or jumper Plug connection

28 8
29 9
26 6
27 7
46 4
47 5
44 2
45 3
42 24
43 25
38 1
22
39 23
34 1
20
35 21
36 1
18
37 19

Assignment of the terminator 760-1AA11

40 1
12
41 13
48 2
10
49 11
15 30
16 31
14
50
1
100 Ω
2
200Ω

7.9 Specifications IM463-2 (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0)
Specifications
Programming package
Associated programming package As of STEP 7 V 2.1
Weight 360 g
Number and type of interfaces 2 parallel, 2 symmetrical interfaces
Cable length: Max. 600 m
from IM 463-2 to the last IM 314 (per interface)
Transmission speed 2 Mbps to 100 Kbps
Parameter sets of the signal modules Differential signal in accordance with RS 485
Front connectors 2 connectors, 50-pin male
Supply voltage from S7-400 bus +5 V
Current consumption Typ. 1.2 A
Max. 1.32 A
Power loss Typ. 6 W
Max. 6.6 W
Backup current No


PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO 8
8.1 PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
8.1.1 Overview
Order numbers
IM 467 6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0 (RS 485)

IM 467 FO 6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0 (F0)
Application
PROFIBUS DP, standardized in accordance with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1, enables rapid
communication in the field between programmable controllers, PCs and field devices. Field
devices are devices such as: ET 200 distributed I/O devices, drives, valve terminals,
switchgear and many others.
The IM 467/IM 467 FO interface module is meant to be used in an S7-400 programmable
controller. It permits the S7-400 to be connected to PROFIBUS DP.
Note
The PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467 and IM 467 FO is not a DP master in accordance
with DVP 1.
Design
● Designed for S7-400
● Can be operated without a fan
● A maximum of 4 IM 467/IM 467 FO can be used in the central rack. There are no slot rules.
● The IM 467/IM 467 FO and the CP 443-5 Extended cannot be used together.
● The transmission rate of 9.6 Kbps to 12 Mbps can be set in steps using software
● Configuration and programming are possible via PROFIBUS DP. You should not, however,
change the PROFIBUS DP parameters.

PROFIBUS DP master interface IM 467/IM 467 FO
● IM 467 with 9-pin sub D socket for connection to PROFIBUS DP (6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0)

● IM 467 FO with fiber-optic cable for connection to PROFIBUS DP (6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0)
Figure 8-1 Configuration of the IM 467/467 FO
(1) LED
(2) Mode selector
(3) PROFIBUS-DP interface
9-pin sub D

Communication services
The IM 467/IM 467 FO offers two communication services:
● PROFIBUS DP
The IM 467/IM 467 FO is a PROFIBUS DP master in accordance with EN 50 170. It is
configured entirely with STEP 7. It behaves in basically the same way as the integrated
PROFIBUS DP interfaces on the CPU modules (see the specifications of the IM 467/IM
467 FO for the differences).
DP communication does not require any function calls in the STEP 7 user program.
● S7 functions
The S7 functions guarantee optimal and easy communication in a SIMATIC S7/M7/C7
automation solution. The following S7 functions are enabled for the IM 467/IM 467 FO:
– Programming device functions via PROFIBUS DP
– Operator control and monitoring functions via PROFIBUS DP
Communication takes place without any additional configuration on the IM 467/IM 467 FO.
S7 functions can be used on their own or in parallel with the PROFIBUS DP protocol. If
they are used in parallel with DP communication, this affects the PROFIBUS DP bus cycle
time.

8.1.2 Indicators and the mode selector
LED
The LED strip on the front panel of the IM 467/IM 467 FO has the following four indicators:
INTF
EXTF
RUN
STOP
Figure 8-2 LEDs of the IM 467/467 FO
IM operating mode
The LEDs indicate the operating mode of the IM in accordance with the following table:
Table 8-1 Operating modes of the IM 467/467 FO
STOP LED (yel‐ RUN LED EXTF LED INTF LED CP Operating Mode
low) (green) (red) (red)
On Flashing Off Off Startup
Off On Off Off RUN
Flashing On Off Off STOPPING
On Off Off Off STOP
On Off Off On STOP with internal error (IM not configured,
for example)
Flashing Off Off Off Waiting for FW update (takes 10 sec. after
power up)
Flashing Off On On Waiting for FW update (IM currently contains
an incomplete FW version).
Off On On Off RUN and PROFIBUS DP bus fault
Off On Flashing Off RUN; but there are faults on the DP line (the
DP slave is not taking part in data transfer, or
the module in the DP slave is faulty, for exam‐
ple)
Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Module error / system error
Controlling the operating status

There are two ways to control the operating status of the IM 467/IM 467 FO:
● Mode selector
● By using the programming device/PC

Mode selector
You can switch operating modes as follows using the mode selector:
● From STOP to RUN
All the configured communication services and S7 communication services are available
in RUN.
The IM operating mode can only be controlled from the programming device/PC when the
switch is in the RUN position.
● From RUN to STOP
The IM goes into STOP mode. Any existing S7 connections are cleared down, and the DP
slaves are no longer supplied.
Loadable firmware
The IM 467/IM 467 FO supports the updating of firmware (FW) by means of the FW loader.
The FW loader is a component of the NCM S7 configuration software for PROFIBUS DP.
Authorization is not required for this. After a FW update, the central rack must be switched off
and on again before normal operation can be resumed.
Note
You can find additional information on loading firmware in the NCM S7 for PROFIBUS-DP
manual and in the readme file of the NCM S7 for PROFIBUS-DP configuration software.
An optical bus terminal (OBT) is required to load FW in the IM 467 FO.

8.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP
8.2 Configuration
Introduction
The IM 467/IM 467 FO is configured with STEP 7. The configuration data are retained even
in the event of a power failure; a memory module is not required. Using the S7 functions it is
possible to program and configure remotely all the IM 467/IM 467 FO connected to the network
and all the CPUs connected via the SIMATIC S7-400 backplane bus.
SIMATIC STEP 7, version 5.00 or higher is required.
Module replacement without a programming device

The configuration data are stored in the load memory of the CPU. The non-volatile storage of
configuration data in the CPU is ensured by battery backup or EPROM module cards.
The IM 467/IM 467 FO can be replaced without the need to explicitly reload the configuration
data.
It is only possible to remove and insert the IM 467/IM 467 FO in a de-energized state.
Multiprocessor operation
The connected DP slaves can only be assigned to and processed by one CPU.
Configuration and diagnostics cannot be carried out simultaneously

When configuration is in progress, the IM 467/IM 467 FO cannot be diagnosed at the same
time via MPI.
Note
The transmission rates 3 Mbit/s and 6 Mbit/s are not approved for IM467-FO.
8.3.1 Connection options
Overview
There are two ways of connecting to PROFIBUS DP:
● Electrical connection via a bus connector
● Optical connection using a fiber-optic cable

8.3.2 Bus connector
Wiring
Only with 6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0.
The bus cable is connected to the IM 467 by means of this connector. (See the detailed
description in the section on networking in the S7-400, Hardware and Installation manual.)
3
2
Figure 8-3 Connecting the bus connector to the IM 467
(1) Switch for bus terminator resistor

(2) PROFIBUS_DP bus line
(3) Bus connector
Maximum cable lengths for PROFIBUS DP
Transmission speed 9,6 19,2 93,75 187,5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000
in Kbps
Max. length of a bus 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 400 200 100 100 100
segment in m
Max. number of bus 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
segments 1
Max. length in m 10.000 10.000 10.000 10.000 4.000 2.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
1
Bus segments are interconnected with RS 485 repeaters

Connector pin assignment

The electrical interface used to connect to PROFIBUS DP (9-pin sub D socket) is specified in
the following table.
INTF
EXTF
RUN
STOP
RUN
STOP
Pin no. Signal name Profibus designation Assigned to

RS 485
1 PE Protective earth Yes
2 - -
3 RxD/TxD-P Data transfer line B Yes
4 RTS (AG) Control A -
5 M5V2 Data reference potential Yes
6 P5V2 Supply plus Yes
7 BATT - -
8 RxDT/TxD-N Data transfer line A Yes
9 - - -

8.3.3 Optical connection to PROFIBUS DP
Wiring
Only in the case of 6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0.
The IM 467 F0 with an integrated fiber-optic cable interface is available for connecting to the
optical version of PROFIBUS DP.
CP43-5 X2
443-5FX00-0X 3E04
EIN
XTTFF
R
STU
N
O
P
RUN
STO
P
AU
I/TP
Figure 8-4 Optical connection to PROFIBUS DP
(1) PROFIBUS DP bus cable

8.3.4 Connecting a fiber-optic cable to the IM 467 FO
Required accessories
● Package with simplex connectors and polishing sets (6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0)
● Pack of plug-in adapters (6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0)
Installing connectors
1. Remove approximately 30 cm of the sheath of the fiber-optic duplex cable.
2. Install the fiber-optic duplex cable with the associated simplex connectors. You can find a
detailed description of simplex connectors in the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks
manual.
TIP: Close the two simplex connectors together rather than separately to obtain a duplex
connector. In this manner you will achieve a better hold in the plug adapter.
IMPORTANT: The polished surface of the plastic fibers must be absolutely smooth and
even. Likewise, the plastic jacket must not protrude or be cut unevenly. Every irregularity
causes strong attenuation of the light signal over the fiber-optic cable!
3. Place the simplex connectors in the plug-in adapter for the IM 467 FO and the fiber-optic
cable in the cable guides provided. Insert the plug-in adapter until you hear the sides clearly
latch into position.
Make sure when you insert the plugs in the plug-in adapter that the transmitter is always
at the top and the receiver is underneath.
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 8-5 Installing the connector

(1) Plug-in adapter for the IM 467 FO

(2) Snap the two simplex connectors closed together such that you get a "duplex connector".
(3) Tip: Cut the lower cable approx. 10 mm shorter than the upper one to achieve better cable
routing in the cable duct of the IM 467 FO.
(4) Max. 30 mm bending radius
(5) Fiber-optic duplex cable
Reusing fiber-optic cable
Note
If you insert previously used fiber-optic cable into the plug adapter, you must shorten both fiber-
optic cores by the amount of the curved lengths and reinstall the simplex connectors.
This will prevent any attenuation losses caused by repeatedly bent, heavily stressed portions
of the fiber-optic duplex core.
Inserting the fiber-optic cables into the IM 467 FO

Insert the fiber-optic cable with the mounted plug adapters into the IM 467 FO. Fold the
protruding plug grip upward.
Make sure that it is correctly positioned: The transmitter fiber-optic cable is plugged into the
receiver socket, and the receiver fiber-optic cable is inserted into the transmitter socket of the
fiber-optic interface of the IM 467 FO.
If the IM 467 FO is the last node in the fiber-optic network, you must close the unoccupied
fiber-optic cable interface with blanking plugs (the plugs are already in place when the IM 467
FO is delivered).
CAUTION
Do not look directly into the opening of the optical sender diodes.
The emitted light beam could damage your eyes.

8.4 Specifications
PROFIBUS DP
Transmitter
Grip
Receiver
R
Transmitter
T
Receiver
Receiver
R
Transmitter
T
Figure 8-6 Inserting the fiber-optic cables into the IM 467 FO
Bending radius for the fiber-optic cable

When placing the fiber-optic duplex core into the plug adapter and routing the cable, be sure
not to exceed the permissible bending radius of 30 mm. See also the installation guidelines
on fiber-optic cables in the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks manual.
8.4 Specifications
8.4.1 Specifications of the IM 467 (6ES7467-5GJ02-0AB0))

Weight 700 g
PROFIBUS DP
● Standard PROFIBUS DP, EN 50 170
● Transmission rate 9.6 Kbps to 12 Mbps, configurable in
steps
● Transmission technology RS 485 via 9-pin sub D socket
Current consumption
Current consumption from the S7-400 bus (24 VDC) Total current consumption of the com‐
The IM does not consume any current at 24 V, and it only makes ponents connected to the DP interfa‐
this voltage available at the MPI/DP interface. ces, with a maximum of 150 mA
PROFIBUS DP
Can be used in SIMATIC S7-400, max. 4 IM 467 in
the central rack

8.4 Specifications
IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5

Supply voltage 5 VDC via the backplane bus
Current consumption
● From 5 VDC 1.3 A
Addressing range Max. 4 KB for inputs and 4 KB for out‐
puts
DP master Yes
● DPV 1 No
● Enable/disable No
Number of connectable I/O devices (slaves) 96
Number of connections for S7 functions for the programming 32 + 1 diagnostic connection
device and operator control and monitoring
Data volume per slave Max. 244 bytes
Consistency Max. 128 bytes
Configuration software STEP 7
DP slave No
Deviations from the DP interface integrated
in the CPU
● Different SSL IDs for system diagnostics
● Possibly extended SFC run times
● Additional return codes for SFC 14 and SFC 15

8.4 Specifications
8.4.2 Specifications of the IM 467 FO (6ES7467-5FJ00-0AB0)

Weight 700 g
PROFIBUS DP
● Standard PROFIBUS DP, EN 50 170
● Transmission rate 9.6 Kbps to 12 Mbps, configurable in
steps (3 Mbps and 6 Mbps not possi‐
ble)
● Transmission technology FOC;
Wave length l = 660 nm 2 x duplex
sockets
Current consumption
Current consumption from the S7-400 bus (24 VDC) Total current consumption of the com‐
The IM does not consume any current at 24 V, and it only makes ponents connected to the DP interfa‐
this voltage available at the MPI/DP interface. ces, with a maximum of 150 mA
PROFIBUS DP
Can be used in SIMATIC S7-400, max. 4 IM 467 in
the central rack
IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5
Supply voltage 5 VDC via the backplane bus
Current consumption 1.3 A
● From 5 VDC
Addressing range Max. 4 KB for inputs and 4 KB for out‐
puts
DP master Yes
● DPV 1 No
● Enable/disable No
Number of connectable I/O devices (slaves) 96
Number of connections for S7 functions for the programming 32 + 1 diagnostic connection
device and operator control and monitoring
Data volume per slave Max. 244 bytes
Consistency Max. 128 bytes
Configuration software STEP 7
DP slave No
Deviations from the DP interface integrated in the CPU
● Different SSL IDs for system diagnostics
● Possibly extended SFC run times
● Additional return codes for SFC 14 and SFC 15

Cable duct and fan subassemblies 9
9.1 Features
Overview
The cable duct and the fan subassembly have the following characteristics
● The air inflow area is variable.
● Shield and cable clamping are possible.
In addition, the fan subassembly has the following characteristics:
● Fans and filter frames can be replaced from the front during operation.
● The fan function is controlled by means of speed monitoring.
● Operation with filter frames is optional.

Cable duct and fan subassemblies
9.2 Fan monitoring in the fan subassemblies
LEDs
The three red LEDs of the fan subassembly are assigned to the individual fans. From left to
right, these are:
F1 - for fan 1
F2 - for fan 2
F3 - for fan 3
Fans
The fans have a redundant design. The fan subassembly continues to function even if one fan
fails.
Fan monitoring
The function of the fans is controlled by means of speed monitoring. If the speed of a fan drops
below the limit speed of 1750 rpm, the LED assigned to it lights up. In addition, the relay K1
drops out.
If the speed of a second fan drops below the limit speed, the LED assigned to it lights up; in
addition, the relay K2 drops out.
The following table is the function table for the fan monitoring.
Table 9-1 Function of fan monitoring
Fan1 Fan2 Fan3 LED F1 LED F2 LED F3 Relay K1 Relay K2

- - - H H H - -
- - + H H D - -
- + - H D H - -
+ - - D H H - -
- + + H D D - +
+ - + D H D - +
+ + - D D H - +
+ + + D D D + +
-* -* -* D* D* D* -* -*
+ Fan in operation or relay picked up
- Fan failed or relay dropped out
D LED is dark
H LED lights up
* At power off
Example of a message concept

You can check the fault-free functioning of the fan subassembly using digital inputs.

You can cause the power supply to be cut off after the failure of at least two fans by using the
relay K2. For example, you can use an intermediate contactor to interrupt the mains.
The relay contacts are labeled as follows:
Relay K1: No. 1 to 3
Relay K2: No. 4 to 6
The following diagram explains the circuit in the fan subassembly when all fans are functioning.
... to the digital input module

in the fan assembly
Evaluation
(digital input module) 1
L+ 2 ... to the monitor
Evaluation 3 K1
(digital input module)
4 ... to the monitor

5
K2
24 V 6
to the power supply module

to the mains
Status: All fans operating
Figure 9-1 Example of a message concept

9.3 Cable duct (6ES7408-0TA00-0AA0)
9.3 Cable duct (6ES7408-0TA00-0AA0)
Function
The cable duct is used when installing outside a cabinet for
● clamping cables and/or for
● shielding or for
● air inlet without fan support
Front view of the cable duct
Eye for
clamping cable
Shield clamp
(Side elevation
Scale 1:1)
Figure 9-2 Front view of the cable duct
Shielding clamps
If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied, do not install them in the cable duct.
Specifications
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5 x 109.5 x 235


9.4 The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)
Operator controls and indicators on the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly
L1
Voltage N
AC 120/230V
Relay contact
connection 1, 2, 3
230
N
120
120V=250mAT
230V=160mAT
Relay contact
4, 5, 6
Quick-release lock LEDs F1, F2, F3

L1
AC 120/230V
230
Voltage
V
selector
120
switch

Fuse
case

Figure 9-3 Controls and indicators of the fan subassembly 120/230 VAC (6ES7408-1TB00-0XA0)
Fuse
Included in this fan subassembly are standard cartridge fuse links, 5 x 20 mm, conforming to
DIN
● 250 mAT for 120 V
● 160 mAT for 230 V.
The fuse for the 230 V range is already installed on shipping from the factory.
Note
If you change the voltage range, you must also insert the fuse for this voltage range in the fan
subassembly. You will find a description of how to change the fuse in the Installation manual.
Shielding clamps
If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied, do not install them in the fan subassembly.

Installation
Follow to the general installation guidelines when mounting the 24 V DC fan subassembly,
see Installation manual.
Specifications
Dimensions, weights
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5 x 109.5 x 235
Cable cross-section 0.5 to 2.5 mm² (litz with connector sleeve)
Lifespan of the fans at 40 °C Typ. 70 000 h
Max. contact load of relay contacts 1 to 6
● Switching voltage 24 VDC
● Permitted range Static: 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Dynamic: 18.5 to 30.2 V
● Switching current 200 mA
At nominal voltage of 230 VAC 120 VAC
Voltage range 170 VAC to 264 VAC 85 VAC to 132 VAC
Frequency 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz
Power consumption
● With fan 17 W 18 W
● Without fan 5W 4W
Rated current 90 mA 175 mA
Starting current 0.6 A 1.15 A
Fuses Wickmann Series 195 250 V / 160 mA 250 V / 250 mA
WARNING
Contact with electrical current can lead to personal injury.
If you remove the left cover when installing or removing the fan subassembly, the terminals
on the transformer are accessible briefly.
Remove the voltage from the fan subassembly before you install or remove it. Disconnect
the supply cable before you remove the fan subassembly.

CAUTION
If you mix up the power supply PCB and the monitoring PCB in the fan subassembly, the fan
subassembly may be damaged.
During maintenance of the unit, make sure you do not mix up the power supply PCB and the
monitoring PCB.
Monitoring function
In the case of a fault (defective fans) the fans are not switched off. Once you have replaced
the defective fan(s), the fault is acknowledged automatically as soon as the fans have reached
the required speed. Any faults that occur are not stored. When you switch on the fan
subassembly, the fans start running. After approximately 10 s the current status of the fans is
indicated via LEDs and relays.

9.5 The 24 V DC fan subassembly (6ES7408-1TA01-0XA0)
Operator controls and indicators on the 24 VDC fan subassembly
Relay contact
1, 2, 3
1 AT
Relay contact
4, 5, 6
Quick-release lock LEDs F1, F2, F3

1 AT
Fuse
case
Figure 9-4 Controls and indicators of the fan subassembly 24 VDC (6ES7408-1TA00-0XA0)
Features
The 24 VDC fan subassembly has the same construction and functional characteristics as the
120/230 VAC fan subassembly.
Wiring
You connect the 24 VDC fan subassembly to the 24 VDC supply in the same manner as for
the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly. You should note the polarity of the spring connections L+
and L-.
Signaling concept
The signaling concept of the 24 VDC fan subassembly is identical to the signaling concept of
the 120/230 VAC fan subassembly.

Fuse
Included in this fan subassembly are standard cartridge fuse links, 5 x 20 mm, conforming to
DIN
● 1.0 AT for 24 V
The fuse is already installed on shipping from the factory.
Shielding clamps
If you do not require the shielding clamps supplied, do not install them in the fan subassembly.
Installation
Follow to the general installation guidelines when mounting the 24 V DC fan subassembly,
see Installation manual.
Technical specifications
Dimensions, weights
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 482.5x 109.5 x 235
Cable cross-section 0.5 to 2.5 mm² (litz with connector sleeve)
Lifespan of the fans at 40 °C Typ. 70 000 h
Maximum contact load of relay contacts 1 to 6
● Switching voltage 24 VDC
● Permitted range Static 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Dynamic: 18.5 to 30.2 VDC
● Switching current 200 mA
Input voltage
● Nominal value 24 VDC
● Permissible range Static: 19.2 to 28 V
Rated current 450 mA
Starting current 0.9 A at 24 V
Fuses Wickmann Series 195 250 V / 1.0 AT
Power consumption
● With fan 12 W
● Without fan 1.4 W

CAUTION
If you insert the monitoring PCB in the wrong position in the fan subassembly, the fan
subassembly may be damaged.
During maintenance of the unit, make sure you do not insert the replacement monitoring PCB
in the wrong position.
Monitoring function
In the case of a fault (defective fans) the fans are not switched off. Once you have replaced
the defective fan(s), the fault is acknowledged automatically as soon as the fans have reached
the required speed. Any faults that occur are not stored.
When you switch on the fan subassembly, the fans start running. After approximately 10 s the
current status of the fans is indicated via LEDs and relays.

RS 485 repeater 10
10.1 Introduction
Overview
This section describes the RS 485 repeater in detail.
This includes:
● The purpose of the RS 485 repeater
● The maximum cable lengths between two RS 485 repeaters
● Functions of the various operating elements and terminals
● Information about grounded and ungrounded operation
● Specifications and the block diagram
Further information
You will find further information on the RS 485 repeater in the section "Configuring of an MPI
or PROFIBUS-DP Network" of the manual Hardware and Installation.

RS 485 repeater
10.2 Applications and features (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)
10.2 Applications and features (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)
Application of the RS 485 repeater

The RS 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and couples bus segments. You need
an RS 485 repeater for the following situations:
● There are more than 32 nodes connected to the bus.
● Bus segments should be operated ungrounded on the bus.
● The maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded.
Table 10-1 Maximum cable length of a segment
Baud rate Max. cable length of a segment (in m)

9.6 to 187.5 Kbps 1000
500 Kbps 400
1.5 Mbps 200
3 to 12 Mbps 100
Rules
The following applies if you configure the bus with RS 485 repeaters:
● No more than 9 RS 485 repeaters can be connected in series.
● The maximum cable length between two nodes with RS 485 repeater may not exceed the
values listed in the table below.
Table 10-2 Maximum cable length between two RS 485 repeaters
Baud rate Max. cable length between 2 nodes (in m)

with the RS 485 repeater (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0)
9.6 to 187.5 Kbps 10000
500 Kbps 4000
1.5 Mbps 2000
3 to 12 Mbps 1000

RS 485 repeater
10.3 Design of the RS 485 repeater (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)
10.3 Design of the RS 485 repeater (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0)
Design
The table below shows the design and functions of the RS 485 repeater.
Description and functions of the RS 485 repeater
DC 1
24 V L+ M PEM 5.2
12 2
A1B1 A1 B1
ON 4
5
PG DP1 6
OP 7
11 DP2 8
ON
SIEMENS
RS 485-REPEATER
A2 B2A2 B2
9
10
(1) Connection for the RS 485 repeater power supply (pin "M5.2" is the ground reference, if you
want to measure the voltage difference between terminals "A2" and "B2").
(2) Shielding clamp for the strain relief and grounding of the bus cable of bus segments 1 or 2
(3) Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 1
(4) Terminating resistance for bus segment 1
(5) LED for bus segment 1
(6) OFF switch
(= isolate bus segments from each other, for example, for commissioning)
(7) LED for bus segment 2
(8) Terminating resistance for bus segment 2
(9) Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 2
(10) Slide for mounting and removing the RS 485 repeater on the DIN rail
(11) Interface for PG/OP on bus segment 1
(12) LED 24 V supply voltage

RS 485 repeater
10.4 RS 485 repeater in ungrounded and grounded operation
Grounded or ungrounded
The following applies to the RS 485 repeater:
● It is grounded, if all other nodes on the segment are also operated on ground potential
● It is ungrounded, if all other nodes in the segment are operated with an ungrounded potential
Note
Bus segment 1 is grounded if you connect a programming device with a pure MPI interface
to the PG/OP socket of the RS 485 repeater. The segment is grounded, because the MPI
in the PG is grounded, and the PG/OP socket of the RS 485 repeater is connected internally
with bus segment 1. This does not apply when the programming device has a combination
MPI/DP interface.
Grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, you must jump terminals "M" and "PE" on the
top of the RS 485 repeater.
Ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater

For ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, "M" and "PE" on the top of the RS 485
repeater must not be interconnected. In addition, the supply voltage to the RS 485 repeater
must be ungrounded.
Connection scheme
In a repeater configuration with ungrounded reference potential (ungrounded operation), any
interference currents and static charges are discharged to the protective conductor by means
of an RC network integrated in the repeater (refer to the figure below).
DC L+ M PE M 5.2 PE
24 V
22 nF 10 MΩ
A1 B1 A1 B1
Figure 10-1 RC network with 10 M Ohm for configuration with ungrounded reference potential

RS 485 repeater
(1) Ground busbar
Electrical isolation between bus segments

Bus segments 1 and 2 are electrically isolated. The PG/OP interface is connected internally
to the port for bus segment 1. The figure below shows the front panel of the RS 485 repeater.
DC
24 V L+ M PE M 5.2
A1 B1 A1 B1
ON
PG DP1
OFF
OP DP2
4
ON
SIEMENS
3 RS 485-REPEATER
2
A2 B2 A2 B2
Figure 10-2 Electrical isolation between the bus segments
(1) Terminals for bus segment 1

(2) Terminals for bus segment 2
(3) Isolation
(4) PG/OP interface
Amplification of bus signals

The amplification of the bus signals takes place between the port for bus segment 1 or the PG/
OP interface and the port for bus segment 2.

RS 485 repeater
10.5 Specifications
10.5 Specifications
Specifications of the RS 485 repeater
Specifications
Power supply
● Nominal voltage 24 VDC
Ripple 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
Current consumption at nominal voltage
● Without load on PG/OP socket 200 mA
● Load on PG/OP socket (5 V/90 mA) 230 mA
● Load on PG/OP socket (24 V/100 mA) 200 mA
Isolation Yes, 500 VAC
Connection of fiber-optic conductors Yes, via repeater adapters
Redundancy mode No
Transmission rate (automatically detected by the 9.6 Kbps, 19.2 Kbps, 45.45 Kbps, 93.75 Kbps,
repeater) 187.5 Kbps, 500 Kbps, 1.5 Mbps, 3 Mbps,
6 Mbps, 12 Mbps
Degree of protection IP 20
Weight (including packaging) 350 g
Pin assignment of the sub-D connector (PG/OP socket)
View Pin No. Signal name Designation

1 - -
2 M24V Ground 24 V
5 3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B
9 4 RTS Request to send
4
8 5 M5V2 Data reference potential (from station)
3 6 P5V2 Supply plus (from station)
7
2 7 P24V 24 V
6 8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A
1
9 - -
Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

● Bus segments 1 and 2 are electrically isolated.
● Bus segment 2 and the PG/OP socket are electrically isolated from each other.
● Signals are amplified
– Between bus segments 1 and 2
– Between PG/OP socket and bus segment 2

RS 485 repeater
10.5 Specifications
Segment 1 Segment 2
A1 A2
Logic
B1 B2
A1' + A2'
B1' B2'
OFF
OFF
ON ON
+ - + - -
PG/OP- 5V 1M 5V 1M
socket
24 V 24 V
L+ (24 V) L+ (24 V)
M M
A1
PE
B1
5V M 5.2
M5 V
Figure 10-3 Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

RS 485 repeater
10.5 Specifications

Parameter sets of signal modules A
A.1 How to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program
Parameter assignment in the user program

You have already assigned parameters to the modules in STEP 7.
In the user program, you can use an SFC:
● To assign new parameters to the module
● To transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed signal module
Parameters stored in data records

The signal module parameters are stored in data records 0 and 1.
Modifiable parameters
You can edit the parameters of data record 1, and then transfer these to the signal module
using SFC55. The CPU parameters are not changed by this action!
You cannot modify any parameters of data record 0 in the user program.
SFCs for parameter assignment

SFCs available for programming signal modules in the user program:
Table A-1 SFCs for assigning parameters to signal modules
SFC No. Identifier Application

55 WR_PARM Transfer modifiable parameters (data record 1) to the addressed
signal module.
56 WR_DPARM Transfer parameters (data record 0 or 1) from the CPU to the
addressed signal module.
57 PARM_MOD Transfer all parameters (data record 0 and 1) from the CPU to the
addressed signal module.

Parameter sets of signal modules
A.1 How to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program
Description of the parameters

The next chapters describe all modifiable parameters of the various module classes. The
parameters of the signal modules are described:
● In the online help of STEP 7
● In this reference manual
The sections dealing with the various signal modules also show you the corresponding
configurable parameters.
Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of assigning parameters to signal modules in the user
program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be found in the
STEP 7 manuals.

A.2 Parameters of digital input modules
Parameters
The table below lists the parameters you can set for digital input modules.
The comparison illustrates the parameters you can edit:
● In STEP 7
● Using SFC 55 "WR_PARM"
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module
(refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table A-2 Parameters of digital input modules
Parameters Data record Parameter assign‐ Parameter assign‐

number ment with SFC 55 ment with STEP 7
Destination CPU for interrupt No Yes
Input delay 0 No Yes
Diagnostics No Yes
Hardware interrupt enable Yes Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
Reaction to error* Yes Yes
Hardware interrupt at positive edge Yes Yes
Hardware interrupt at negative edge Yes Yes
Enable substitute value "1"* Yes Yes
* Only for 6ES7 421-7BH0x-0AB0
Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must
enable the diagnostics in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.
Structure of data record 1

A data record consists of several bytes, the bits of which can be active or inactive:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Figure A-1 For example, byte 1 with the bits 0 - 7
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 0, 1, 2 and 3) for the parameters
of digital input modules.

You enable a parameter by setting a logical "1" at the corresponding bit.
Table A-3 Data record 1 for parameters of digital input modules
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 0 7 Hardware interrupt enable
6 Diagnostics interrupt enable
0 Reaction to error1
Byte 1 7 On rising edge at channel 7
Hardware interrupt 6 On rising edge at channel 6
5 On rising edge at channel 5
Byte 2 7 On rising edge at channel 15
Hardware interrupt 6 On rising edge at channel 14
Byte 3 7 On falling edge at channel 7
Hardware interrupt 6 On falling edge at channel 6
5 On falling edge at channel 5
1
Only for 6ES7 421-7BH0x-0AB0
The following table shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 4, 5, and 6) for the parameters
of digital input modules.

Table A-4 Data record 1 for parameters of digital input modules
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 On falling edge at channel 15
Byte 5 7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7
Substitute value1 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6
5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5
Substitute value1 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14
1
Only for 6ES7 421-7BH0x-0AB0

A.3 Parameters of digital output modules
Parameters
The table below contains all parameters you can set for digital output modules. The comparison
shows:
● Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and
● Which parameters you can change using SFC 55 "WR_PARM".
Table A-5 Parameters of the digital output modules
Parameters Data record Parameter assignment Parameter assignment

no. with SFC 55 with STEP 7
Destination CPU for interrupt 0 No Yes
Diagnostics No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Reaction to CPU STOP 1 Yes Yes
Enable substitute value "1"* Yes Yes
Note

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 0, 1 and 2) for the parameters of
digital output modules.

Table A-6 Data record 1 for parameters of digital output modules
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 0 7
6 Diagnostics interrupt enable
5
4
3
2
1
0 Reaction to CPU STOP
Substitute 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6
value 5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5
The following table shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 3, and 4) for the parameters of
digital output modules.
Table A-7 Data record 1 for parameters of digital output modules
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 3* 7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 23

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4* 7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 31
* Bytes 3 and 4 are not relevant for SM 421;DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5A

A.4 Parameters of analog input modules
Parameters
The table below lists all parameters you can set for analog input modules.
The comparison illustrates the parameters you can edit:
● In STEP 7
● Using SFC 55 "WR_PARM"
Table A-8 Parameters of analog input modules
Parameters Data record Parameter assignment Parameter assignment

no. with SFC 55 with STEP 7
Destination CPU for interrupt No Yes
Measuring method No Yes
Measuring range No Yes
Diagnostics No Yes
Temperature unit 0 No Yes
Temperature coefficient No Yes
Noise suppression No Yes
Smoothing No Yes
Reference junction No Yes
End of cycle interrupt No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
Hardware interrupt enable Yes Yes
Reference temperature 1 Yes Yes
High limit 1 Yes Yes
Low limit 1 Yes Yes
Note

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of analog input
modules.

7 6 0
Byte 0
Diagnostics interrupt enable

Hardware interrupt enable
Byte 1 high byte Reference Temperature

Byte 2 low byte in 0,01 °C
Byte 3 high byte High limit
Byte 4 low byte Channel 0
Byte 5 high byte Low limit
•
•
•
•
•
•
Figure A-2 Data record 1 for the parameters of analog input modules
Note
The representation of limits and the reference temperature corresponds to the analog value
representation. Observe range limits when setting the limit values.

Diagnostic data of signal modules B
B.1 Evaluating diagnostic data of signal modules in the user program
This section
This section describes the diagnostic data structure in system data. You must be familiar with
this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the signal module in the STEP
7 user program.
Diagnostic data stored in data records

Module diagnostic data may have a length of max. 43 bytes, and are contained in data records
0 and 1:
● Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data describing the current state of an
automation system.
● Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained in data record
0 and as many as 39 bytes of module specific diagnostic data.
Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of evaluating the diagnostic data of signal modules in
the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be found
in the STEP 7 manuals.

Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.2 Structure and contents of diagnostic data bytes 0 and 1
B.2 Structure and contents of diagnostic data bytes 0 and 1
Overview
The section below describes the structure and content of the various bytes in diagnostic data.
General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to "1".
Bytes 0 and 1
Table B-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of diagnostic data
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 0 7 Incorrect parameter in the module
6 No module parameters
5 Front connector missing
4 External auxiliary voltage missing
3 Channel error
2 External error
1 Internal error
0 Module error
Byte 1 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 Channel information available
3
2 Module type (see table "Codes of the module types")
1
0
Module types
The table below lists the module type IDs (bits 0 to 3 in byte 1).
Table B-2 Codes of the module types
ID Module type
0101 Analog module
0110 CPU
1000 Function module
1100 CP
1111 Digital module

B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2
Overview
The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for special digital input
modules are described below. General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to
"1".
You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section
"Diagnostics of the modules".
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Table B-3 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 Module-internal supply voltage failure
3 0
2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
6 Hardware interrupt lost
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Table B-4 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#70: Digital input
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long
0
Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels
0
Byte 7 5 Channel error 7
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0

Byte Bit Meaning

6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8
Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 9 to 24. The figure
below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.
Table B-5 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 9 - 24 7 0
6 0
5 Sensor supply missing
4 Wire break
3 0
2 0
1 0
0 Configuring/parameter assignment error
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Table B-6 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
1 0
0 0

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 3 7 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0
Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Table B-7 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#70: Digital input
5
4
3
2
1
0
0

Byte Bit Meaning

6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0
6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8
Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Table B-8 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 9-24 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 Wire break
3 0
2 0
1 0

B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2
Overview
The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for special digital output
modules are described below. General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to
"1".
You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section on
the special module.
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
Table B-9 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

Table B-10 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#72: digital output
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0

Byte Bit Meaning

6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8

Table B-11 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 9 - 24 7 0
6 External load voltage missing
5 0
4 0
3 Short-circuit to M
2 0
1 0
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Table B-12 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 Module-internal supply voltage failure
3 0
1 0
0 0

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 3 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0
Bytes 4 to 10 of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Table B-13 Bytes 4 to 10 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0

Byte Bit Meaning

6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0
6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8
6 Channel error 22
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 17
0 Channel error 16
6 Channel error 30
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 25
0 Channel error 24

Bytes 11 to 42 of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 11 to 42. The
figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.
Table B-14 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 11 - 42 7 0
6 External load voltage missing
5 0
4 Wire break
2 Short-circuit to L+
1 0
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Table B-15 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Table B-16 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0

Byte Bit Meaning

6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8
Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Table B-17 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 9 - 24 7 0
6 0
5 Fuse blown
4 0
3 0
2 0
1 0

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2
Overview
The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for the special analog
input modules are described below. General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is
set to "1".
You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section on
the special module.
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit
Table B-18 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
1 0
0 Measuring range module incorrect or missing
Byte 3 7 0
5 0
4 ADC/DAC error
3 RAM error
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit
Table B-19 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#71: Analog input
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0

Byte Bit Meaning

6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8

Table B-20 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 9-24 7 Overflow
6 Underflow
5 Reference channel error
4 Wire break
2 0
1 0
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
Table B-21 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
1 0
0 0

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 3 7 0
5 0
4 ADC/DAC error
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0
Table B-22 Bytes 4 to 7 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0

Byte Bit Meaning

6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0

following table shows the assignment of the even diagnostic bytes (bytes 8, 10, to 22) for a
channel of the module.
Table B-23 Even diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8-23 7 Overflow
even 6 Underflow
5 0
4 Wire break
3 0
2 0
1 0
The following table shows the assignment of the odd diagnostic bytes (bytes 9, 11, to 23) for
a channel of the module.
Table B-24 Odd diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8-23 7 User calibration does not correspond to the parameter assignment
odd 6 Open conductor in the current source
5 0
4 Underrange or overrange
3 Run time calibration error
2 Open conductor in - direction
1 Open conductor in + direction
0 User connection not wired

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit
Table B-25 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
1 0
0 Thermocouple connection error
Byte 3 7 0
5 0
4 ADC/DAC error
3 RAM error
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0
Table B-26 Bytes 4 to 7 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
5
4
3
2
1
0

Byte Bit Meaning

0
6 Channel error 6
5 ......
4 ......
3 ......
2 ......
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0

following table shows the assignment of the even diagnostic bytes (bytes 8, 10, to 22) for a
channel of the module.
Table B-27 Even diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 8-23 7 Overflow
even 6 Underflow
5 Reference channel error
4 Wire break
3 0
2 0
1 0

The following table shows the assignment of the odd diagnostic bytes (bytes 9, 11, to 23) for
a channel of the module.
Table B-28 Odd diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8-23 7 User calibration does not correspond to the parameter assignment
odd 6 0
5 0
4 0
3 Runtime calibration error
2 0
1 0
0 0


Accessories and spare parts C
C.1 Accessories and spare parts
Accessories and spare parts
Accessories - spare parts Order number

For racks
Number wheel for slot labeling C79165-Z1523-A22
Spare slot covers (qty 10) 6ES7490-1AA00-0AA0
For power supplies
Spare connector for PS 405 (DC) 6ES7490-0A00-0AA0
Spare connector for PS 407 (AC) 6ES7490-0AB00-0AA0
Backup battery 6ES7971-0BA00
For digital modules/analog modules
Cover foil (10 x) for labeling strips of the SMs 6ES7492-2XX00-0AA0
Cover flap for fuse receptacle on the AC modules 6ES7422-0XX00-7AA0
Measuring range module for analog modules 6ES7974-0AA00-0AA0
Front connector screw-type connection 6ES7492-1AL00-0AA0
Front connector spring connection 6ES7492-1BL00-0AA0
Front connector crimp connection 6ES7492-1CL00-0AA0
Panel for front connector, 5 pieces 6ES7492-2XL00-0AA0
Crimping tool for crimp contacts 6XX3 071
Crimp contacts (package of 250) 6XX3 070
Extraction tool for crimp contacts 6ES5 497-8MA11
Fuses, 8 A, quick blow
● Wickmann 194-1800-0
Labeling sheet for the front connector, petrol blue 6ES7492-2AX00-0AA0
Labeling sheet for the front connector, light 6ES7492-2BX00-0AA0
Labeling sheet for the front connector, yellow 6ES7492-2CX00-0AA0
Labeling sheet for the front connector, red 6ES7492-2DX00-0AA0
For IMs
Terminator for IM 461–0 6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0
IM 463-, send IM, 600 m to IM 314 of the S5 6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 0,75 m 6ES7468-1AH50-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 1.5 m 6ES7468-1BB50-0AA0


IM cable with communication bus, 5 m 6ES7468-1BF00-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 10 m 6ES7468-1CB00-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 25 m 6ES7468-1CC50-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 50 m 6ES7468-1CF00-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 100 m 6ES7468-1DB00-0AA0
IM cable with current transmission, 0,75 m 6ES7468-3AH50-0AA0
IM cable with current transmission, 1.5 m 6ES7468-3BB50-0AA0
Package with plug adapters for IM 467 FO 6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0
Package with simplex plugs and polishing set for IM 467 FO 6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0
For interfacing / networking
Standard mounting rail 35 mm 6ES5710-8MA...
PROFIBUS 6XV1830-0BH10
6XV1830-3BH10
PROFIBUS bus connector without PG socket 6ES7972-0BA00-0XA0
PROFIBUS bus connector with PG socket 6ES7972-0BB10-0XA0
PROFIBUS bus connector without PG socket, with angled cable out‐ 6ES7972-0BA40-0X40
let
PROFIBUS bus connector with PG socket, with angled cable outlet 6ES7972-0BB40-0X40
PROFIBUS RS 485 bus terminal 6GK1500-0AA00
6GK1500-0AB00
6GK1500-0DA00
PC/MPI cable (5 m) 6ES7901-2BF00-0AA0
For fan subassembly
Spare fan for fan subassembly 6ES7408-1TA00-6AA0
Filters (qty 10) for fan subassembly 6ES7408-1TA00-7AA0
Monitoring PCB for fan subassembly 6ES7408-1TX00-6XA0
Power supply PCB for fan subassembly 6ES7408-1XX00-6XA0
Cabinets
Cabinet 2200 x 800 x 400 with extension set for SIMATIC S7- 8MC 2281-7FC11-8DA1
Extension set for SIMATIC S7- 8MC 1605–BS70–AA0
Cables for printers with
Cable for interface module
● 1m 6ES7368-3BB00-0AA0
● 2.5 m 6ES7368-3BC00-0AA0
● 5m 6ES7368-3BF00-0AA0
● 10 m 6ES7368-3CB00-0AA0
Connector housing, gray
● 9-pin V42254-A6000-G109
● 15-pin V42254-A6000-G115
● 25-pin V42254-A6000-G125
Connector housing, black


● 9-pin V42254-A6001-G309
● 15-pin V42254-A6001-G315
● 25-pin V42254-A6001-G325


Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices
(ESD) D
D.1 ESD: What are the directives for handling electrostatic sensitive
devices?
Definition
All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to
their design, these electronic components are highly sensitive to overvoltage, and thus to any
electrostatic discharge.
These Electrostatic Sensitive Devices/Modules are commonly abbreviated ESD.
Electrostatic sensitive devices are labeled with the following symbol:
CAUTION
Electrostatic sensitive devices can be destroyed by voltages far below the level perceived by
human beings. These voltages are generated when you touch a component or electrical
connections of a module without having discharged your body. In most cases, the damage
caused by overvoltage is not evident immediately, and results in damage only after a
prolonged period of operation.

Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)
D.2 Electrostatic charging of persons
D.2 Electrostatic charging of persons
Electrostatic charging
Any person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its surroundings may
be exposed to electrostatic charge.
The figure shows the maximum electrostatic voltage which may build up on a person coming
into contact with the materials indicated. These values are in conformity with the specifications
of IEC 61000-4-2.
1
(kV)
16
15
14
13
12 2
11
10
9
3
8
7
4
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Figure D-1 Electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person
(1) Voltage in kV
(2) Synthetic material
(3) Wool
(4) Antistatic materials, such as wood or concrete
(5) Relative air humidity in %

D.3 Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge
Ensure sufficient grounding

Make sure all persons, workplaces and packaging are sufficiently grounded when ESD
components are being handled. This prevents electrostatic charging.
Avoid direct contact

You should only touch ESD components if this is unavoidable (for example, during
maintenance work). Handle the modules without touching any chip pins or PCB traces. In this
way, the discharged energy can not affect the sensitive devices.
Discharge your body before you start taking any measurements on a module. Do so by
touching grounded metallic parts. Always use grounded measuring instruments.


List of abbreviations E
E.1 List of abbreviations
List of abbreviations
Abbreviations Explanations
AC Alternating current
ADC Analog-to-digital converter
AI Analog input
AO Analog output
AS Automation system
STL Statement list (type of representation in STEP 7)
BAF Battery failure
BUS1F; BUS2F LED bus failure on the MPI/PROFIBUS DP interface 1 or 2
CH Channel
COMP Compensation circuit
CP Communications processor
CPU Central processing unit of the PLC
CR Central rack
DAC Digital-to-analog converter
DB Data block
DC Direct current
DI Digital input
DO Digital output
ESD Electrostatic sensitive device
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
EPROM Erasable programmable read-only memory
ER Expansion rack
ID Input delay
SV Set substitution value
EXM Extension module
EXTF Error LED "external fault"
FB Function block
FC Function
FEPROM Flash erasable programmable read-only memory
FM Function module
FRCE Fiber-optic cable
FC Function block diagram

GD Global data communication
ES Sensor supply
IC Constant-current line
IFM1F; IFM2F LED error at interface module 1/2
IM Interface module
INTF Error LED "internal fault"
IP Intelligent I/O
L+ Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
HLV KLV
FOC Fiber-optic cable
LAD Ladder logic diagram
M Chassis ground
MANA Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
MPI Multipoint interface
MRES Master reset position of the toggle switch for general reset of the CPU
MSTR Master
OB Organization block
OP Operator panel
OS Operator system
PIO Process image of outputs
PII Process image of inputs
PG Programming device
PS Power supply
QI: Analog output current
RAM Random access memory
REDF Redundancy fault
RL: Load impedance
S+ Sensing line (positive)
S- Sensing line (negative)
SCL Structured control language
SFB System function block
SFC System function
SM Signal module
PLC Programmable logic controller
SSL Signal module
TD HMI (text display)
SSL Transducer
UC Universal current
TD Universal rack
UCM Common mode voltage

Uiso Potential difference between MANA and local ground
USR User
Vs Sensor voltage
Sign Sign
CR Central rack


Glossary
2-conductor/3-conductor/4-conductor connection
Method of connecting to the module, for example, connecting resistance thermometers or
resistors to the front connector of the analog module or loads to the voltage output of an analog
output module.
2-wire transducer/4-wire transducer

Type of transducer (2-wire transducer: Power supply via terminals of the
analog input module; 4-wire transducer: power supply via separate connectors of the
transducer)
Address
An address identifies a specific operand or range of operands, examples: input I 12.1; memory
word MW25; data block DB3.
Automation system
An automation system is a → programmable controller comprising a → central rack, a CPU and
various input/output modules.
Backplane bus
The backplane bus is a serial data bus over which modules communicate with each other and
over which they are supplied with the necessary voltage. The connection between modules is
established by bus connectors.
Backup battery
The backup battery ensures that the → user program on the → CPU is not lost in the event of
a power failure and that defined data areas, bit memory, timers, and counters are also retained.
Backup voltage, external

The same backup can be achieved as with a backup battery if a backup voltage (direct voltage
between 5 V and 15 V) is applied to the "EXT.-BATT." socket of the CPU.
The external backup voltage is required to replace a power supply module if the user program
and data stored in a RAM (for example, bit memory, timers, counters, system data, integrated
clock) needs to be backed up while the module is exchanged.

Glossary
Basic error limit

The basic error limit represents the operational limit at 25° C relative to the nominal range of
the analog module.
Baud rate
Speed of the data transmission (bps)
Central rack
An S7-400 consists of a central rack (CR) to which expansion racks (ER) can be assigned.
The central rack is the rack containing the → CPU.
Cold restart
→ Hot restart of the automation system and its user program after all dynamic data (variables
of the input/output image, internal registers, timers, counters etc. and their program sections)
have been reset to a predefined value.
A cold start can be triggered automatically (for example following power outage, loss of
information in the dynamic memory areas etc.).
Common mode voltage

Voltage common to all terminals of a group and that is measured between this group and any
reference point (usually ground).
Communication load
Load on cyclic program execution of a CPU caused by communication activities (PROFIBUS-
DP).
To prevent communication activities putting too much load on program execution, it is possible
to set the maximum permitted cycle load caused by communication in the parameter
assignment in STEP 7.
Communications processor
Programmable module for communication tasks, for example, point-to-point links.
Compensating box
Compensating boxes can be used when measuring temperatures with thermoelements
connected to analog input modules. The compensating box is a circuit for compensating
temperature fluctuations at the → reference junction.

Glossary
Constant bus cycle time

Constant bus cycle time means a DP bus cycle accurate to a few microseconds that can be
configured in STEP 7.
CP
→ Communications processor
Data block
Data blocks (DBs) are data areas in the user program that contain user data. There are shared
data blocks that can be accessed by all logic blocks and there are instance data blocks
assigned to a specific FB call.
Declaration
Definition of variables (for example parameters or local data of a block) with name, data type,
comment etc.
Default (setting)
The default is a practical basic setting that is always used when no other value is specified.
Destruction limit
Limit of the permitted input voltage/current. If this limit is exceeded, the measurement accuracy
can deteriorate. If the destruction limit is exceeded considerably, the internal measuring
circuitry can be destroyed.
Diagnostic buffer
The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area on the CPU in which the diagnostic events
are entered in the order in which they occur.
The user can read the precise cause of the problem from the diagnostic buffer with STEP 7
(PLC -> Module Information menu command) and start troubleshooting measures.
Diagnostic data
All diagnostic events that occur are collected on the CPU and entered in the → diagnostic
buffer. If an error OB exists, this is started.
Diagnostics-compliant modules signal detected system errors to the → CPU using diagnostic
interrupts. If a diagnostic interrupt occurs, the CPU calls OB82.

Glossary
Diagnostics
Generic term for → system diagnostics, process fault diagnostics and user-defined diagnostics.
Direct data exchange

Direct data exchange is sometimes also known as direct communication. In direct data
exchange, local input address areas of an intelligent DP slave (for example, CPU 315-2 with
PROFIBUS DP attachment) or a DP master are assigned to a PROFIBUS DP partner. The
intelligent DP slave or the DP master receives the input data that the PROFIBUS DP partner
sends to its DP master via these assigned input address areas.
DP master
A node with master functionality in PROFIBUS DP. A master that conforms to IEC
61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 with the DP protocol is known as a DP master. The token allowing
access to the bus is always passed on among the masters. The slaves, in this case DP slaves,
can only react when requested to by a master. The following distinction must be made:
DP master (class 1): handles user data exchange with the DP slaves assigned to it.
DP master (class 2): Provides services such as: reading input/output data, diagnostics, global
control.
DP slave
A → slave operated on PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS DP protocol is known as a DP slave.
Equipotential bonding
An electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that ties parts of electrical
equipment and extraneous conductive parts to the same or approximately the same potential
to prevent disturbing or dangerous voltages between these parts.
FB
→ Function block
FC
→ Function
Fiber-optic cable
The "force" function overwrites a variable (for example, memory bit, output) with a value defined
by the user.
At the same time, the variable is write-protected so that the value cannot be modified from any
other location (it cannot, for example, be overwritten by the user program). After removing the
programming device, this value is retained.

Glossary
The write-protection is canceled only after invoking the "unforce" function, following which the
variable can once again be written with the value set by the user program.
The "force" function can, for example, be used during commissioning to set specific outputs
to the "ON" state for any length of time even if the logic operation in the user program is not
true (due to missing wiring at inputs).
A fiber-optic cable is a transmission medium made of glass or plastic fiber. Fiber-optic cables
are insensitive to electromagnetic interference and allow high data transmission rates.
Fiber-optic cable
The "force" function overwrites a variable (for example, memory bit, output) with a value defined
by the user.
At the same time, the variable is write-protected so that the value cannot be modified from any
other location (it cannot, for example, be overwritten by the user program). After removing the
programming device, this value is retained.
The write-protection is canceled only after invoking the "unforce" function, following which the
variable can once again be written with the value set by the user program.
The "force" function can, for example, be used during commissioning to set specific outputs
to the "ON" state for any length of time even if the logic operation in the user program is not
true (due to missing wiring at inputs).
A fiber-optic cable is a transmission medium made of glass or plastic fiber. Fiber-optic cables
are insensitive to electromagnetic interference and allow high data transmission rates.
Floating
In the case of floating I/O modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuits are
electrically isolated from each other, for example, by optocouplers, relay contacts, or
transformers. The I/O circuits can be connected to a common potential.
FREEZE
Control command, inputs of the → DP slaves are frozen at their current values.
Function
According to IEC 1131-3, a function (FC) is a → logic block without → static data. A function
allows parameter passing in the user program. This makes them suitable for programming
commonly recurring complex functions such as calculations.
Function block
According to IEC 1131-3, a function block (FB) is a → logic block with → static data. An FB has
"memory" so that it is possible to access its parameters (for example outputs) from any part
of the user program.

Glossary
Functional grounding
Grounding with the sole purpose of ensuring the intended function of the electrical equipment.
Functional grounding, short-circuits interfering voltages that would otherwise have an
unacceptable influence on the equipment.
Fuse blown
Parameter in STEP 7 for digital output modules. When the parameter is enabled, the blowing
of one or more fuses is detected by the module. With suitable parameter assignment, a →
diagnostic interrupt is triggered.
Grounding
Grounding means connecting an electrically conductive part to the ground electrode (one or
more conductive parts that make good contact with ground) via a grounding system.
Hardware interrupt
A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules due to a particular event in
the process (violation of a limit value, module has completed the cyclic conversion of its
channels).
The hardware interrupt is signaled to the CPU. In keeping with the priority of this interrupt, the
corresponding → organization block is then executed.
Hold last value (HLV)

The module retains the last value output prior to changing to STOP mode.
Hot restart
When a CPU starts up (for example as a result of activating the mode selector or turning on
the power), cyclic program execution (OB1) initially processes either OB101 (hot restart),
OB100 (cold restart: hot restart) or OB102 (cold restart). Backup of the CPU is absolutely
necessary for a hot restart.
The following applies: all data areas (timers, counters, memory bits, data blocks) and their
content are retained. The → process image of the inputs is read in and the execution of the
STEP 7 user program is continued from the point at which it was last stopped (STOP, power
down).
The other startup modes available are → cold restart and → warm restart.
I/O bus
Part of the → backplane bus in the automation system optimized for fast exchange of signals
between the CPU or CPUs and the signal modules.
Useful data (for example, digital input signals of a signal module) and system data (for example
default parameter data records of a signal module) is transferred over the I/O bus.

Glossary
Input delay
Parameter in STEP 7 for digital input modules. The input delay is used to suppress coupled
interference. Spurious pulses of 0 ms up to the selected input delay are suppressed.
The selected input delay is subject to a tolerance that can be found in the technical
specifications of the module. A high input delay suppresses longer spurious pulses, a lower
delay suppresses shorter spurious pulses.
The permitted input delay depends on the length of the cable between sensor and module. If,
for example, there are long unshielded cables to the sensor (over 100 m), a high input delay
must be set.
Integration time
The integration time is the reciprocal of the → interference frequency suppression in ms.
Interrupt
SIMATIC S7 recognizes 28 different priority classes that control the execution of the
user program. These priority classes include interrupts, such as hardware interrupts. When an
interrupt occurs, the operating system automatically calls an assigned organization block in
which the user can program the required reaction (for example, in an FB).
Interrupt reaction time

The interrupt reaction time is the time from the first occurrence of an interrupt signal to
executing the first statement in the interrupt OB. General rule: Higher priority interrupts are
serviced first. This means that the interrupt reaction time is extended by the program execution
time of the higher priority interrupts and interrupts with the same priority that were called earlier
(queue).
Linearity error
The linearity error indicates the maximum deviation of the measured/output value from the
ideal linear relationship between measured/output signal and digital value. This is specified as
a percentage related to the nominal range of the analog module.
Load memory
The load memory is part of a programmable module (CPU, CP). It contains the objects
generated by the programming device (local objects). It is implemented either as a plug-in
memory card or as integrated memory.
Local data
Local data is the data assigned to a → logic block that is declared in its → declaration section
or in its variable declaration. It includes the following (block-specific): Formal parameters,
→ static data, → temporary data.

Glossary
Measuring principle, instantaneous value encoding

A module with instantaneous value encoding is always used for extremely fast measurement
methods or for values that change very quickly. With this technique, the module accesses the
variable to be measured as quickly as possible and returns an instantaneous recording of the
signal at a specific time. It should be remembered that due to this measurement method, the
modules are more "sensitive" than the modules using the integrating method. As a result,
interference affecting the measured value can lead to falsification. When using these modules,
you should make sure that the measurement signal is "clean", for example by adhering to the
installation instructions.
Measuring principle, integrating

A module with an integrating measurement technique is always used for measurements that
are not time-critical. The integration time is inversely proportional to the network frequency.
You set the network frequency in STEP 7 and this results in the integration time. At a network
frequency of 50 Hz, the integration time is 20 ms or even multiples of 20 ms. Since the
measured value is integrated over exactly this period, at least one or more entire periods of
the network frequency that may be superimposed on the measurement signal are also
recorded. The mean value of the interference is therefore integrated to zero (positive
component of the first half period = negative component of the second half period) and, as a
result of the principle, only the useful signal is detected.
Measuring range module

Measuring range submodules are plugged onto analog input modules to adapt them to various
measuring ranges.
Memory reset
During a memory reset, the following memory areas of the CPU are erased: Work memory,
write/read area of the load memory, system memory.
The MPI parameters and the diagnostic buffer are retained.
Mode
Mode means the following:
1. The mode in which the CPU operates as set by the mode selector or using a PG
2. The type of program execution on the CPU
Mode selector
Using the mode selector, the user can set the current mode of the CPU (RUN, STOP) or reset
the memory of the CPU (MRES).

Glossary
Noise suppression
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The frequency of the alternating voltage power
supply can interfere with the measured value, in particular when measuring small voltage
ranges and with thermoelements. With this parameter, the user specifies the predominant
power supply frequency in the system.
Non-isolated
With non-floating input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuits
are electrically interconnected.
Operating state
The automation systems of SIMATIC S7 recognize the following operating modes or simply
modes: STOP, → STARTUP, RUN and HOLD.
Operational limit
The operational limit is the measurement or output error of the analog module throughout the
entire temperature range related to the nominal range of the analog module.
Parameters
1. Variables of a → logic block
2. Variable for setting the properties of a module (one or more per module). When shipped,
every module has practical basic parameter settings that the user can modify in STEP 7.
Point-to-point link
On a point-to-point link, only two nodes are physically linked to each other. This type of
communications link is used when the use of a communication network is not practical or when
different types of nodes need to be connected (for example, PLC with process computer).
Priority class
The S7 CPU operating system provides up to 28 priority classes (= program execution levels"),
for example for cyclic program execution, hardware interrupt-controlled program execution.
Each priority class is assigned to → organization blocks in which the user can program a
reaction. The OBs have different default priorities and if the OBs are called at the same time,
the priority decides which executes first and which can interrupt another. The default priorities
can be modified by the user.
Process image
The signal states of the digital input and output modules are entered in a process image on
the CPU.

Glossary
A distinction is made between the process image of the inputs and the outputs. The process
image of the inputs (PII) is read from the input modules by the operating system prior to
execution of the user program. The process image of the outputs (PIQ) is transferred to the
output modules by the operating system on completion of program execution.
Product version
The product version distinguishes products with the same order number. The product version
is incremented when upwards-compatible functional enhancements are made, when there are
modifications relating solely to production (use of new components) and when bugs are fixed.
PROFIBUS DP
Digital, analog and intelligent modules, along with a wide range of field devices complying with
IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1, such as drives or valve clusters are moved away from the
automation system to the local process over distances of up to 23 km.
The modules and field devices are interconnected with the automation system over the
PROFIBUS DP Fieldbus and are addressed in the same way as centralized I/O.
Programming device
A programming device (PG) is a personal computer with a special compact design, suitable
for industrial conditions. A programming device is completely equipped for programming the
SIMATIC automation systems.
RC element
Connection of ohmic resistor and capacitor in series. When a consumer is turned off, an
overvoltage occurs in circuits with an inductive load that can cause an electric arc and can
reduce the life of the contacts. To extinguish this electric arc, the contact can be bridged by
an RC element.
Reaction time
The reaction time is the time from detecting an input signal to changing the output signal
associated with it.
The actual reaction time is between a longest and a shortest reaction time. When configuring
a plant, the longest reaction time must always be assumed.
Reference channel error

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. This parameter enables the error group
message of the reference junction when using thermoelements. A reference channel error
occurs when using thermoelements:
● When a fault occurs (for example broken wire) in a reference channel to which a
thermoresistor (RTD) is connected (channel 0) to compensate temperature drift.
● When the → reference temperature is outside the permitted range of values.

Glossary
Each input channel to which the reference junction "RTD on channel 0" is assigned has the
reference channel error in the situation described above - the measured temperature is no
longer compensated.
Reference junction
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. This parameter specifies the reference point
(point with known temperature) when using the thermoelements. Reference points can be:
Thermoresistor on channel 0 of the module; → compensating box, → reference temperature.
Reference potential
Potential on the basis of which the voltages of the circuits involved are measured.
Reference temperature
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The reference temperature is the temperature
of the reference junction of thermoelements. The reference temperature allows correct
temperature measurement with thermoelements. The temperature of the reference junction
must be known because a thermoelement always detects the temperature difference between
the measuring point and the reference junction.
Repeater
Device for amplifying bus signals and for linking → bus segments over long distances.
Repetition accuracy
The repetition accuracy is the maximum deviation of the measured/output values when the
same input signal is applied or the same output value is specified repeatedly. The repetition
accuracy relates to the nominal range of the module and applies to the settled state (in terms
of temperature).
Resolution
With analog modules, this is the number of bits that represent the digitalized analog value in
binary format. The resolution depends on the module and, with analog input modules, on the
→ integration time. The longer the integration time, the more precise the resolution of the
measured value. The resolution including sign can be up to 16 bits.
Retentive memory
Data areas in data blocks along with timers, counters and bit memory are retentive when their
content is retained through a warm restart or power cycle.

Glossary
S7 basic communication
Communication functions integrated in the CPU of SIMATIC S7/C7 that can be called up by
the user. These functions are called in the user program with → system functions. The user
data length is up to 76 bytes (small amounts of data). S7 basic communication is implemented
over → MPI.
S7 communication
Communication functions integrated in the CPU of SIMATIC S7/C7 that can be called up by
the user. These functions are called in the user program with → system function blocks. The
user data length is up to 64 Kbytes (large amounts of data). S7 communication provides a
network-independent interface between devices of the types SIMATIC S7/C7 and PG/PC.
Segment
→ Bus segment
Shunt
Conductor connected in parallel in electric circuits.
Signal module
Signal modules (SMs) form the interface between the process and the automation system.
There are input modules, output modules, input/output modules (in each case, digital and
analog)
Smoothing
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The measured values are smoothed by digital
filtering. It is possible to select between no, weak, medium and strong filtering for each
individual module. The stronger the smoothing, the higher the time constant of the digital filter.
Standard communication
Communication over standardized protocols such as PROFIBUS-DP, PROFIBUS-FMS.
Static data
Static data is data that is used only within a → function block. This data is stored in an instance
data block belonging to the function block. Data stored in this way is retained until the next
function block call.
Substitute value
Substitute values are values that are output to the process or are used in the user program
instead of a process value if a signal output module is defective.

Glossary
The substitute values can be selected by the user in the parameter settings in STEP 7 (retain
old value, substitute value 0 or 1). Are the values to be output at an output or outputs in the
CPU changes to STOP.
SYNC
Control command from the → master to the → slave: freezes the outputs at their current value.
System diagnostics
System diagnostics is the detection, evaluation and signaling of faults/errors occurring within
the automation system. Examples of such faults and errors include: Program errors or failures
on modules. System errors can be indicated by LEDs or in STEP 7.
Temperature coefficient
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules during when measuring temperature with
thermoresistors (RTD). The temperature coefficient is selected to suit the thermoresistor used
(according to DIN standard).
Temperature error
The temperature error is the drift of the measured/output values caused by changes in the
ambient temperature of the analog module. It is specified as a percentage per degree Kelvin
and relates to the nominal range of the analog module.
Temperature error of the internal compensation

The temperature error of the internal compensation occurs only when measuring with
thermoelements. It indicates the error that must be added to the actual temperature error when
the "internal reference" mode is selected. The error is specified either as a percentage of the
physical nominal range of the analog module or as an absolute value in °C.
Temporary data
Temporary data is → local data of a block that is entered in the L stack during execution of the
block and that is no longer available on completion of execution.
Total current
Total of all the currents of all output channels of a digital output module.
Unforce
→ Force

Glossary
Ungrounded
Without electrical connection to ground.
Warm restart
Warm restart following a power down with a set of dynamic data programmed by the user und
a user program component specified in the system.
A warm restart is characterized by the setting of a status bit or other suitable means that can
be read by the user program and indicate that the stoppage of the automation system caused
by a power down was detected in RUN mode.
Wire break
Parameter in STEP 7. A line continuity or wire break check is used to monitor the connection
from the input to the sensor or from the output to the actuator. If a broken wire is detected, the
module senses a current flow at the input/output set in the parameter assignment.
Work memory
The work memory is a → RAM area on the → CPU that is accessed by the processor during
execution of the user program.

Index
Conversion time, 196
Cycle time, 196
2 Measuring method, 189
Measuring range, 189
24 VDC fan subassembly
Representation of analog values, 169
Features, 384
Analog input module
Installation, 385
ADC-DAC error, 225
Specifications, 385
Auxiliary voltage missing, 225
wiring, 384
Causes of error and remedies, 225
2-conductor connection, 213
Channel error, 225
2-wire transducer, 208
Channel information available, 225
Configuration error, 225
Connecting resistance thermometers, 212
3 Connecting resistors, 212
3-conductor connection, 213 Connecting sensors, 204
Connecting thermocouples, 215
Diagnostic data, 420
4 Diagnostic interrupt, 201
diagnostic message in measured value, 223
4-conductor connection, 212
Diagnostic messages, 223
4-wire transducer, 210
Diagnostics, 201
EPROM error, 225
External error, 225
A Front connector missing, 225
Abbreviations, 437 Hardware interrupt lost, 225
AC Incorrect parameters, 225
Meaning, 437 Internal error, 225
Accessories isolated, 204
Order numbers, 429 Limit, 201
S7-400, 429 Measurement, 201
ADC Measuring method, 201
Meaning, 437 Measuring range, 202
ADC-DAC error Measuring range module incorrect/missing, 225
Analog input module, 225 Module error, 225
Additional support, 4 No parameters, 225
Address area Noise suppression, 202
Setting, 354 non-isolated, 204
Addressing Overflow, 226
S5 modules, 347 Parameter assignment error, 225
AI Parameters, 201, 403
Meaning, 437 potential difference, 204
Ambient conditions, 24 RAM error, 225
Climatic, 25 Reference channel error, 226
IM 463-2, 345 Reference junction, 202
Mechanical, 24 Reference temperature, 202
Analog functions Run time calibration error, 226
STEP 7 blocks, 163 Short-circuit to M, 225
Analog input channels SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 264
Basic execution time, 196 SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit, 229

Index
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 237, 253 AO

SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 303 Meaning, 437
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 292 Application
SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 273 IM 467/ IM 467 FO, 363
Smoothing of analog input values, 196, 202 RS 485 repeater, 388
STOP mode, 225 Area of application
Structure of data record 1, 403 IM 463-2, 345
Temperature coefficient, 202 AS
temperature unit, 202 Meaning, 437
Underflow, 226 ATEX Directive, 15
Wire break, 225 Australia
Wire break monitoring, 201 Marking, 15
Analog module Auxiliary voltage missing
Behavior, 192 Analog input module, 225
Commissioning steps, 167 Digital module, 91
Determination of the measuring error/output
error, 195
Diagnostics, 223 B
EXTF LED, 223
Backplane bus, 46
Interrupt, 227
Backup battery, 43
INTF LED, 223
Function, 43
Load voltage failure, 193
Shipping and storage conditions, 23
Parameter assignment, 199
Specifications, 44
Analog modules, 163
Storage, 23
Diagnostic interrupt, 227
Backup time, 44
Analog output channel
Calculating, 44
Conversion time, 198
BAF
Response time, 199
Meaning, 437
Analog output channels
Basic error limit, 195
Basic execution time, 198
Basic execution time
Cycle time, 198
Analog input channels, 196
Analog output module
Analog output channels, 198
Connecting loads to a voltage output, 220
Basic knowledge required, 3
Connecting loads to current outputs, 222
Battery, 23, 43
Connecting loads/actuators, 219
Battery type, 43
electrically isolated, 219
Battery voltage, 46
Output, 203
Bending radius
Output range, 203
For FOC, 374
Output type, 203
Block diagram
Parameters, 203
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 238, 254
Response time, 198
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 317
Settling time, 198
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 265
SM 432, AO 8 x 13 bit, 316
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 304
Analog output modules
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 293
Properties, 165
SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 274
Analog signals
Bus connector, 369
Cables, 219
BUS1F; BUS2F
Analog value
Meaning, 437
Converting, 167
Bytes 0 and 1
Sign, 168
of diagnostic data, 406
Analog-to-digital conversion, 196

Index
Commissioning digital modules

Steps, 85
C Communication bus, 29
Communication services
Cable
IM 467, 365
Plug in, 350
IM 467 FO, 365
Prepare, 350
COMP
Cable 721
Meaning, 437
Pin assignments, 357
Compatibility
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 342
Features, 377
Compensating
Cable length
Reference junction temperature for
IM 463-2, 347
thermocouples, 216
Segment, 388
Compensating box, 217
Selecting, 351
Connecting, 217
Cable length selector switch, 349
compensation
Cable Lengths
external, 217
For PROFIBUS DP, 369
Internal, 216, 217
Cables, 329
Configurable diagnostic messages, 88
for analog signals, 204, 219
Configuration
Calculating
IM 467, 368
Backup time, 44
IM 467 FO, 368
Calibration software, 293, 303
Interface modules, 325
Causes of error and remedies
S5 modules, 355
Analog input module, 225
Configuration error
Digital module, 91
CE marking, 13
Configuration in RUN, 86
Certifications, 13
CH
Changing, 199
Meaning, 437
Configuration of analog output circuits
Change
SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 323
Fuse, 148, 152
Connecting actuators
Changing
to analog output module, 219
Configuration in RUN (CiR), 199
Connecting loads
Fuse, 156
Parameter assignment in the user program, 199
Connecting loads to a voltage output
Rack number, 332
Changing the fuse, 152
Connecting loads to current outputs
Channel cable, 380
Function, 380
Connecting resistance thermometers
Specifications, 380
to analog input module, 212
Channel error
Connecting resistors
Digital module, 91
Connecting sensors
Channel information available
Connection
Digital module, 91
Compensating box, 217
CiR, 86
Connecting loads to current outputs, 222
Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit, 229
Electrically isolated sensors, 204
Climatic ambient conditions, 25
IM 463-2, 350
Commissioning analog modules
IM 467 FO with fiber-optic cable, 372
Steps, 167
Non-isolated sensors, 206

Index
Resistance thermometers and resistors, 212 Cycle time

rules, 327 Analog input channels, 196
Thermocouples to resistance thermometers, 218 Analog output channels, 198
Voltage sensors, 207
Connection and circuit diagram
SM 421, DI 32 x 24 V DC, 98 D
SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 138, 141
DAC
SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC, 101
Meaning, 437
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 113
Data record
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 123
for diagnostic data, 405
SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 127
for parameters, 395
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 130
Data record 1
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 150
Analog input module design, 403
SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A, 146
Digital input module configuration, 397
Connection diagram
Digital output module design, 400
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit, 231
DB
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 239, 255
Meaning, 437
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 318
DC
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 266
Meaning, 437
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 295
Definition
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 305
Electrostatic sensitive devices, 433
SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 275
Degree of protection, 26
Connection scheme
IP20, 26
RS 485 repeater, 390
Dependencies
Connector
Input values, 107
Mounting, 372
Output values, 145
Connector pin assignment, 370
Design
Contact, direct, 435
CR2, 33
Controlling
CR3, 35
Operating state, 366
ER1, ER2, 37
Conversion time
IM 467/ IM 467 FO, 363
Power supply, redundant, 41
Analog output channel, 198
Rack, 27
Converting
UR1, 29
Analog values, 167
UR2-H, 31
Courses, 5
Destination CPU for interrupt
Cover, 47
Digital output module, 88
CP
DI
Meaning, 437
Meaning, 437
CPU
Diagnostic data
Meaning, 437
Analog input modules:, 420
CR
Bytes 0 and 1, 406
Meaning, 437, 439
Data record, 405
CR2
Digital input modules, 407
Design, 33
Evaluating, 405
Specifications, 33
of the digital output modules, 412
CR3
of the SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V, 407
Design, 35
Signal modules, 405
Specifications, 35
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 409
cULus approval, 15
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 417
Relay modules, 16
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 412
SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 414

Index
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 422 SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V, 109

SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 420 SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 119, 122
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 425 SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 112
Diagnostic data entry, 194 SM 421, DI 32 x 24 V DC, 97
Diagnostic interrupt SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 126
Analog input module, 201 Structure of data record 1, 397
Analog modules, 227 Substitute a value, 87
Digital modules, 93 Substitute a value "1", 87
Diagnostic message, 90 Wire break monitoring, 87
Channel error, 90 Digital input modules
Channel information available, 90 Features, 83
EPROM error, 90 Digital module
External auxiliary voltage missing, 90 Auxiliary voltage missing, 91
External error, 90 Causes of error and remedies, 91
Front connector missing, 90 Channel error, 91
Fuse blown, 90 Channel information available, 91
Hardware interrupt lost, 90 Commissioning steps, 85
Incorrect parameters, 90 Diagnostic messages, 90
Internal error, 90 Diagnostics, 88
Internal voltage failure, 90 EPROM error, 91
Load voltage L+ missing, 90 External error, 91
Module error, 90 EXTF LED, 89
No module parameters, 90 Front connector missing, 91
Parameter assignment error, 90 Fuse blown, 92
Sensor supply missing, 90 Hardware interrupt, 93
Short-circuit to L+, 90 Hardware interrupt lost, 91, 94
Short-circuit to M, 90 Incorrect parameters, 91
Wire break, 90 Internal error, 91
Diagnostic messages, 89, 223 Internal voltage failure, 91
Analog input modules:, 223 Interrupt, 93
Digital modules, 90 interrupt-triggering channels, 94
Reading, 89, 223 INTF LED, 89
Diagnostics Load voltage L+ missing, 92
Analog input module, 201 Module error, 91
Analog modules, 223 No parameters, 91
Digital input module, 87 Parameter assignment, 85
Digital output module, 88 Parameter assignment error, 91
for digital modules, 88 Sensor supply missing, 92
Diagnostics interrupt enable Short-circuit to L+, 91
Digital input module, 87 Short-circuit to M, 91
Digital output module, 88 STOP mode, 91
Digital input module Wire break, 92
Diagnostic data, 407 Digital output module
Diagnostics, 87 Destination CPU for interrupt, 88
Diagnostics interrupt enable, 87 Diagnostic data, 412
Hardware interrupt enable, 87 Diagnostics, 88
Input delay, 87 Diagnostics interrupt enable, 88
Keep last value, 87 Fuse blown, 88
Load voltage L+ missing, 87 Keep last value, 88
Parameters, 87, 397 Load voltage L+ missing, 88
Sensor supply missing, 87 Parameters, 88, 400
SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC, 100 Short-circuit to L+, 88

Index
Short-circuit to M, 88 ER1 and ER2

SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 149 Specifications, 37
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 129 ER1, ER2
SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 137, 140 Design, 37
SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A, 145 Error
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 153 of an analog module, 195
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 132 Error messages
Structure of data record 1, 400 Power supply modules, 48
Substitute a value, 88 ES
Substitute a value "1", 88 Meaning, 438
Wire break monitoring, 88 ESD
Digital output modules Meaning, 437
Features, 84 Evaluating
Discharge of static electricity Diagnostic data, 405
Protective measures, 435 EXM
Discharge, electrostatic Meaning, 437
Persons, 434 External error
Displaying parameter assignment errors Analog input module, 225
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 301 Digital module, 91
DO EXTF
Meaning, 437 Meaning, 437
Documentation package, 4 EXTF LED
Dynamic parameters, 85 Analog module, 223
Digital module, 89
E
Edge, 87
F
EEPROM Failure
Meaning, 437 Supply voltage, 107
Electrical isolation, 391 Fan monitoring, 378
Electrically isolated sensors, 204 Fan subassemblies
Connecting, 204 120/230 VAC, 381
Electromagnetic compatibility, 20 24 VDC, 384
Electrostatic sensitive devices Fans, 378
Definition, 433 FB
EMC Meaning, 437
Definition, 20 FC
Meaning, 437 Meaning, 437
EMC definition, 20 Features
EMC directive, 14 24 VDC fan subassembly, 384
Emission of radio frequency interference, 21 Cable duct and fan subassemblies, 377
Enabling Digital input modules, 83
Interrupt, 93, 227 Digital output modules, 84
Ensuring Power supply modules, 39
Wire break monitoring, 106, 116 Power supply, redundant, 41
EPROM, 437 Relay output module, 84
EPROM error SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V, 109
Analog input module, 225 SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 119
Digital module, 91 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 153
ER SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 132
Meaning, 437 FEPROM
Meaning, 437

Index
Firmware, 367 HLV

FM Meaning, 438
Approval, 18 Hotline, 5
Meaning, 437
FOC
Meaning, 438 I
Reusing, 373
I/O bus, 29
FRCE
IC
Meaning, 437
Meaning, 438
Front connector missing
ID
Meaning, 437
Digital module, 91
Module types, 406
Function
IEC 61131-2, 13
Backup battery, 43
IFM1F; IFM2F
Channel cable, 380
Meaning, 438
IM 460-0 and IM 461-0, 330
IM
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 333
Meaning, 438
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 337
IM 460-0 and IM 461-0
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 340
Function, 330
Interface modules, 325
Operator controls and display elements, 330
Operator controls, 47
Functions
Technical specifications, 332
Power supply modules, 39
IM 460-1 and 461-1
Rack, 27
Specifications, 336
Fuse, 385
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1
change, 148
Function, 333
Changing, 156
Operator controls and indicators, 334
The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly, 381
Fuse blown
IM 460-3 and 461-3
Digital module, 92
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3
Function, 337
G Parameter assignment, 338
GD IM 460-4 and 461-4
Meaning, 438 Specifications, 342
Grounded operation IM 460-4 and IM 461-4
RS 485 repeater, 390 Compatibility, 342
Grounding, 435 Function, 340
Position of operator control and display
H elements, 340
IM 463-2
Hardware interrupt
Ambient conditions, 345
Digital modules, 93
Area of application, 345
End of scan cycle, 228
Cable 721, 357
when limit is exceeded, 227
Cable length, 347
Hardware interrupt enable
Connecting, 350
Digital input module, 87
EMC resistance, 345
Hardware interrupt lost
Indicators, 348
LEDs, 349
Digital module, 91, 94
Operator controls, 348

Index
Order number, 345 IM 461-1, 334

Rules for connecting, 347 IM 461-3, 337
Specifications, 361 Interface selector switch, 349
Terminator, 359 Interference
IM 467, 363 pulse-shaped, 20
Communication services, 365 sinusoidal, 21
Configuration, 368 Interference frequency suppression 10 Hz
Connection to PROFIBUS DP, 368 Step response, 312
Specifications, 374, 376 Interference frequency suppression 400 Hz
IM 467 FO, 363 Step response, 313
Communication services, 365 Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz
Configuration, 368 Step response, 312
Connection to PROFIBUS DP, 368 Interference frequency suppression 60 Hz
Fiber-optic cable, connecting, 372 Step response, 313
IM operating mode, 366 Internal error
IM 467/ IM 467 FO Analog input module, 225
Application, 363 Digital module, 91
Design, 363 Internal voltage failure
Incorrect parameters Digital module, 91
Analog input module, 225 Interrupt
Digital module, 91 Analog modules, 227
Indicators, 45 Digital modules, 93
IM 463-2, 348 Enabling, 93, 227
Input characteristic curve to IEC 61131 Interrupt-triggering channels
for digital inputs, 95 of the digital module, 94
Input delay, 108 INTF
Digital input module, 87 Meaning, 438
Input values INTF LED
Dependencies, 107 Analog module, 223
Installation Digital module, 89
24 VDC fan subassembly, 385 IP
RS 485 repeater, 388 Meaning, 438
Safety requirements, 19 IP20, 26
The 120/230 V DC fan subassembly, 382
Insulation resistance, 26
Insulation test, 26 K
Interface
Keep last value
Selecting, 350
Interface module
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 334
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 337
IM 460-4, 340
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 340
L
IM 461-4, 340 L+
Interface modules Meaning, 438
Configuration, 325 LAD
Function, 325 Meaning, 438
IM 460-0, 330 LED, 366
IM 460-1, 334 BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, 46
IM 460-3, 337 BAF, BATTF, 46
IM 461-0, 330 Parameter assignment error, 286

Index
LEDs, 45, 378 DAC:, 437

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT INDIC on DB:, 437
1BATT, 52 DC:, 437
BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT.INDIC on DI:, 437
2BATT, 52 DO:, 437
BAF, BATTF; BATT INDIC on BATT, 51 EEPROM:, 437
IM 463-2, 349 EMC:, 437
INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 49 EPROM:, 437
LEDs INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 46 ER:, 437
Limit ES, 438
Analog input module, 201 ESD:, 437
Line harmonics, 21 EXM:, 437
Load voltage failure EXTF:, 437
of the analog module, 193 FB:, 437
Load voltage L+ missing FC, 437
Digital input module, 87 FC:, 437
Digital module, 92 FEPROM:, 437
Digital output module, 88 FM:, 437
Low voltage directive, 14 FOC, 438
FRCE:, 437
GD, 438
M HLV, 438
IC, 438
M
ID:, 437
Meaning, 438
IFM1F; IFM2F, 438
M-
IM, 438
Meaning, 438
INTF, 438
M+
IP, 438
Meaning, 438
L+, 438
MANA
LAD, 438
Meaning, 438
M, 438
Manual
M-, 438
purpose, 3
M+, 438
Manual package, 4
MANA, 438
Marine approvals, 19
MPI, 438
Marking
MRES, 438
Australia, 15
MSTR, 438
New Zeeland, 15
OB, 438
Meaning
OP, 438
Abbreviations, 437, 438
OS, 438
AC:, 437
PG, 438
ADC:, 437
PII, 438
AI:, 437
PIO, 438
AO:, 437
PLC, 438
AS:, 437
PS, 438
BAF:, 437
QI, 438
BUS1F; BUS2F:, 437
QV, 438
CH:, 437
RAM, 438
COMP:, 437
REDF, 438
CP:, 437
RL, 438
CPU:, 437
S +, 438
CR, 439
SCL, 438
CR:, 437

Index
SFB, 438 Module overview, 164

SFC, 438 Digital modules, 83
Sign, 439 Module rack
SM, 438 UR1, 29
SSL, 438 UR2, 29
SSV:, 437 Module replacement, 368
STL:, 437 Module types
TD, 438 ID, 406
UC, 438 Modules
UCM, 438 Shipping and storage conditions, 23
UH, 439 Storage, 23
Uiso, 439 Mounting
USR, 439 Connector, 372
Vs, 439 MPI
Measured value resolution, 169 Meaning, 438
Measurement MRES
Analog input module, 201 Meaning, 438
Measuring method MSTR
Analog input channels, 189 Meaning, 438
Analog input module, 201 Multiprocessor operation, 368
Measuring methods
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 302
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 271 N
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 288
New Zeeland
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 236
Marking, 15
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 249, 262
No parameters
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 315
Measuring range
Digital module, 91
Noise suppression
Measuring range module, 189
Non-configurable diagnostic messages, 88
Replugging, 190
Non-isolated sensors, 205
Setting, 189
Connecting, 206
Measuring range module incorrect/missing
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 270
O
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 284 OB
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 247, 259 Meaning, 438
Measuring ranges OB 40, 93, 227
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 302 Start information, 228
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 272 OB 82, 93, 227
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 290 OP
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 236 Meaning, 438
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 252, 263 Operating conditions, 24
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 315 Operating state
Mechanical ambient conditions, 24 Controlling, 366
Testing, 25 the CPU, 193
Mode selector, 367 Operational limit, 195
Module error Operator controls, 45
Analog input module, 225 Function, 47
Digital module, 91 IM 463-2, 348

Index
Operator controls and display elements 6ES7 421-7BH01-0AB0, 100

IM 460-0 and IM 461-0, 330 6ES7 421-7DH00-0AB0, 112
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 337 6ES7 422-1BH11-0AA0, 129
PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R, 74, 76 6ES7 422-1BL00-0AA0, 137
PS 405 20A, 78, 80 6ES7 422-1FF00-0AA0, 145
PS 405 4A, 72 6ES7 422-1FH00-0AA0, 149
PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R, 60, 63 6ES7 422-1HH00-0AA0, 158
PS 407 20A, 66, 68 6ES7 422-5EH00-0AB0, 153
PS 407 4A, 54, 57 6ES7 422-5EH10-0AB0, 132
Receive IM, 331, 338 6ES7 422-7BL00-0AB0, 140
Send IM, 331 6ES7 431-0HH00-0AB0, 264
Operator controls and indicators 6ES7 431-1KF00-0AB0, 229
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 334 6ES7 431-1KF10-0AB0, 237
PS 405 4A, 70 6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0, 253
Receive IM, 335, 341 6ES7 431-7KF00-0AB0, 303
Send IM, 334, 338, 341 6ES7 431-7KF10-0AB0, 292
The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly, 381 6ES7 431-7QH00-0AB0, 273
Optimum 6ES7 432-1HF00-0AB0, 316
Signal propagation delays, 106 6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0, 330
Order number 6ES7 460-1BA00-0AB0, 334
6ES7 400-1JA01-0AA0, 29 6ES7 460-1BA01-0AB0, 334
6ES7 400-1JA11-0AA0, 29 6ES7 460-3AA01-0AB0, 337
6ES7 400-1TA01-0AA0, 29 6ES7 460-4AA01-0AB0, 340
6ES7 400-1TA11-0AA0, 29 6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0, 330
6ES7 400-2JA00-0AA0, 31 6ES7 461-1BA00-0AA0, 334
6ES7 400-2JA10-0AA0, 31 6ES7 461-1BA01-0AA0, 334
6ES7 401-1DA01-0AA0, 35 6ES7 461-3AA01-0AA0, 337
6ES7 401-2TA01-0AA0, 33 6ES7 461-4AA01-0AA0, 340
6ES7 403-1JA01-0AA0, 36 6ES7 467-5FJ00-0AB0, 363
6ES7 403-1JA11-0AA0, 36 6ES7 467-5GJ00-0AB0, 363
6ES7 403-1TA01-0AA0, 36 6ES7 467-5GJ01-0AB0, 363
6ES7 405-0KA01-0AA0, 74 6ES7 467-5GJ02-0AB0, 363
6ES7 405-0KA02-0AA0, 76 6ES7 408-1TB00-0XA0, 381
6ES7 405-0KR00-0AA0, 74 IM 463-2, 345
6ES7 405-0KR02-0AA0, 76 Power supply modules, redundant, 41
6ES7 405-0RA01-0AA0, 78 Order numbers
6ES7 405-0RA02-0AA0, 80 Spare parts, 429
6ES7 407-0DA01-0AA0, 54 OS
6ES7 407-0DA02-0AA0, 57 Meaning, 438
6ES7 407-0KA01-0AA0, 60 Output
6ES7 407-0KA02-0AA0, 63 Analog output module, 203
6ES7 407-0KR00-0AA0, 60 Output of analog values
6ES7 407-0KR02-0AA0, 63 STEP 7 blocks, 163
6ES7 407-0RA01-0AA0, 66 Output range
6ES7 407-0RA02-0AA0, 68 Analog output module, 203
6ES7 408-0TA00-0AA0, 380 Output ranges
6ES7 408-1TA01-0XA0, 384 SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 323
6ES7 421-1BL01-0AA0, 97 Output type
6ES7 421-1EL00-0AA0, 126 Analog output module, 203
6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0, 119 Output values
6ES7 421-1FH20-0AA0, 122 Dependencies, 145
6ES7 421-5EH00-0AA0, 109

Index
Overflow Pin assignments

Analog input module, 226 Cable 721, 357
Overload PIO
On 24 V, 51 Meaning, 438
On 5 V, 51 Plant changes in runtime, 86
PLC
Meaning, 438
P Plug in
Cable, 350
Position of operator control and display elements
Analog modules, 199
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 340
IM 460-0 and IM 461-0, 331
Potential difference, 347
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 335
with analog input modules,
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 338
Power module
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4, 341
PS 405 10A, 74, 76
to digital modules, 85
PS 405 10A R, 74, 76
User program, 395
PS 405 20A, 78, 80
Parameter assignment error
PS 405 4A, 72
PS 407 10A, 60, 63
Digital module, 91
PS 407 10A R, 60, 63
LED, 286
PS 407 20A, 66, 68
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 286
PS 407 4A, 54, 57
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 314
Power supply module
Parameters
Invalid slot, 40
Analog input module, 201, 403
PS 405 4A, 70
Analog output module, 203
Data record, 395
Error messages, 48
Digital input module, 87, 397
Features, 39
Digital output module, 88, 400
Functions, 39
Dynamic, 85, 199
Power supply, redundant
Editing in the user program, 85, 199
Design, 41
SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V, 105
Features, 41
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 116
Prepare
SM 421, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 136
Cable, 350
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 157
PROFIBUS DP, 365
SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 144
Cable Lengths, 369
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 299
PROFIBUS DP master interface, 363
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 270
Properties
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 284
Analog output modules, 165
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 235
SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC, 100
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 247, 259
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 122
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 310
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 112
SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 322
SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 126
Static, 85, 199
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 129
Parameters, modifiable, 395
SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 137, 140
PARM_MOD
SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A, 145
SFC 57, 395
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit, 229
PG
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 237, 253
Meaning, 438
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 303
PII
SM 432, AO 8 x 13 bit, 316
Meaning, 438
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 149
Pin assignment
SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A, 158

Index
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 264

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 292
SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 273 R
Protection class, 26
Rack
Protective measures
CR2, 33
Avoiding contact, 435
CR3, 35
Discharge of static electricity, 435
Design, 27
Grounding, 435
ER1, 36
PS
ER2, 36
Meaning, 438
Functions, 27
PS 405 4A
UR2, 29
Operator controls and indicators, 70
UR2-H, 31
Specifications, 70
Rack number
Changing, 332
PS 407
Radio frequency interference
Technical specifications 10A, 61, 64
Emission of, 21
PS 407 10A R
RAM
Technical specifications, 61, 64
Meaning, 438
PS 407 20A
RAM error
PS 407 4A
Rating plate, 13
RC network, 390
PS 405 10A
Reading
Diagnostic messages, 89, 223
PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R
Reading analog values
Operator controls and display elements, 74, 76
STEP 7 blocks, 163
PS 405 10A R
Receive IM
PS 405 20A
Operator controls and indicators, 335, 341
REDF
PS 405 20A technical specifications, 78, 80
Meaning, 438
PS 405 4A
Reducing
Vibrations, 24
PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R
Redundant operation, 41
Redundant power supply modules, 41
PS 407 20A
Reference channel error
PS 407 4A
Testing, 291
Reference junction
Pulse-shaped interference, 20
Reference junction temperature for thermocouples
Compensating, 216
Q Reference temperature
QI Analog input module, 202
Meaning, 438 Relay modules
QV cULus approval, 16
Meaning, 438 Relay output module
Features, 84
SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel.5 A, 158
Repeater see RS 485 repeater, 387
Replugging
Measuring range module, 190

Index
Representation of analog value RS 485 repeater, 387

for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Climatic, 179 Application, 388
Representation of analog values, 167 Connection scheme, 390
Binary representation of input ranges, 170 Design, 389
binary representation of output ranges, 185 grounded, 390
for ±1 V to ±10 V voltage measuring range, 172 grounded operation, 390
for ±25 to ±500 V voltage measuring range, 172 Installation rules, 388
For analog input channels, 169 Pin assignment, 392
for analog output channels, 185 Specifications, 392
for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Climatic, 179 Ungrounded, 390
for resistance thermometer Cu 10 standard, 179 ungrounded operation, 390
for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Standard, 178 Rules
for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Climatic, 177, Connection, 327
178 Run time calibration error
for resistance thermometers Pt 100, 200, 500, Analog input module, 226
1000, 177
for resistance-type sensors from 48 Ω to 6
kΩ, 176 S
for thermocouple type E, 180
S-
for thermocouple type L, 182
Meaning, 438
for thermocouple type N, 182
S+
for thermocouple type T, 183
Meaning, 438
for thermocouple type U, 184
S5 expansion unit
for thermocouple types R, S, 183
Setting, 353
for thermocouples type B, 180
S5 interface modules, 346
for thermocouples type J, 181
S5 modules
for thermocouples type K, 181
Addressing, 347
for voltage measuring ranges, 172
Configuration, 355
for voltage output ranges, 187
S7 functions, 365
for voltage output ranges ± 10 V, 187
S7-400
in current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA, 174
Accessories, 429
in current measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA, 175
Spare parts, 429
in the 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA current output
Safety requirements
ranges, 188
Installation, 19
in the 0 V to 10 V and 1 V to 5 V voltage measuring
SCL
ranges, 187
Meaning, 438
in the 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V voltage measuring
Scope
ranges, 173
of the manual, 3
in the current output range ±20 mA, 188
Segment
in the current output ranges, 188
Cable length, 388
Representation of analog values in the ±3.2 mA to
Selecting
±20 mA current measuring ranges, 174
Cable length, 351
Resistance measurement
Interface, 350
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 251, 263
Send IM
Resistance thermometers and resistors
Connecting, 212
Operator controls and indicators, 334, 338, 341
Resolution, 168
Sensor
Response time, 198, 199
Supply voltage, 208
Reusing
Sensor supply missing
FOC, 373
RL
Digital module, 92
Meaning, 438

Index
Sensors SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

electrically isolated, 204 Diagnostic data, 409
Non-isolated, 205 Properties, 112
Setting SM 421, DI 32 x 24 V DC
Address area, 354 Connection and circuit diagram, 98
Measuring range module, 189 Technical specifications, 98
S5 expansion unit, 353 SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V
Settling time, 198 Properties, 126
SFB SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Meaning, 438 Parameters, 116
SFC SM 421, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
Meaning, 438 Parameters, 136
SFC 51, 93, 227 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
SFC 55 WR_PARM, 395 Diagnostic data, 417
SFC 56 WR_DPARM, 395 SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
SFC 57 PARM_MOD, 395 Diagnostic data, 412
SFC 59, 93, 227 SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A
Shielding clamps, 385 Properties, 129
Shipping, 23 SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Short-circuit Connection and circuit diagram, 138, 141
Vs Sensor supply, 107 Diagnostic data, 414
Short-circuit to L+ Properties, 137, 140
Digital module, 91 Technical specifications, 138, 141
Digital output module, 88 SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A
Short-circuit to M Properties, 145
Analog input module, 225 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Digital module, 91 Features, 153
Digital output module, 88 Parameters, 157
Sign Specifications, 154
Analog value, 168 Wiring diagram, 154
Meaning, 439 SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
Signal modules Features, 132
Diagnostic data, 405 Specifications, 133
Signal propagation delays Wiring diagram, 133
Optimum, 106, 117 SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Signaling concept, 384 Parameters, 144
Sinusoidal interference, 21 SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit
SM Block diagram, 229
Meaning, 438 Connection diagram, 231
SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC Properties, 229
Properties, 100 Technical specifications, 232
Technical specifications, 102 SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit
SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V Block diagram, 238, 254
Features, 109 Connection diagram, 239, 255
Specifications, 110 Properties, 237, 253
Wiring, 110 Technical specifications, 240, 256
SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit
Diagnostic data, 407 Properties, 303
Parameters, 105 SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V Diagnostic data, 422
Features, 119 Displaying parameter assignment errors, 301
Properties, 122 Measuring methods, 302

Index
Measuring ranges, 302 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

Parameters, 299 Properties, 149
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A
Measuring methods, 271 Connection and circuit diagram, 130
Measuring range modules, 270 Technical specifications, 130
Measuring ranges, 272 SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A
Parameters, 270 Technical specifications, 159
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A
Diagnostic data, 420 Properties, 158
Measuring methods, 288 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A
Measuring range modules, 284 Connection and circuit diagram, 150
Measuring ranges, 290 Technical specifications, 150
Parameter assignment error, 286 SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A
Parameters, 284 Connection and circuit diagram, 146
Wire break monitoring, 291 Technical specifications, 146
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit
Measuring methods, 236 Block diagram, 317
Measuring ranges, 236 Connection diagram, 318
Parameters, 235 Technical specifications, 319
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit
Measuring methods, 249, 262 Block diagram, 265
Measuring range modules, 247, 259 Connection diagram, 266
Measuring ranges, 252, 263 Properties, 264
Parameters, 247, 259 Technical specifications, 267
Resistance measurement, 251, 263 SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit Block diagram, 304
Diagnostic data, 425 Connection diagram, 305
Measuring methods, 315 Technical specifications, 306
Measuring ranges, 315 SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
Parameter assignment error, 314 Block diagram, 293
Parameters, 310 Connection diagram, 295
SM 432, AO 8 x 13 bit Properties, 292
Configuration of analog output circuits, Technical specifications, 296
Output ranges, SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit
Parameters, Block diagram, 274
Properties, 316 Connection diagram, 275
SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC Properties, 273
Connection and circuit diagram, 101 Technical specifications, 276
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V Smoothing of analog input values, 196
Specifications, 120 Analog input module, 202
Wiring and block diagrams, 120 Spare parts
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V Order numbers, 429
Connection and circuit diagram, 123 S7-400, 429
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V Specifications
Connection and circuit diagram, 113 24 VDC fan subassembly, 385
Technical specifications, 113 Backup battery, 44
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V Channel cable, 380
Technical specifications, 123 CR2, 33
SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 CR3, 35
Connection and circuit diagram, 127 ER1 and ER2, 37
SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V IM 460-1 and 461-1, 336
Technical specifications, 127 IM 460-4 and 461-4, 342

Index
IM 463-2, 361 Technical specifications

IM 467, 374, 376 IM 460-0 and 461-0, 332
PS 405 4A, 70 IM 460-3 and 461-3, 339
RS 485 repeater, 392 PS 405 10A, 74, 76
SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V, 110 PS 405 10A R, 74, 76
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 154 PS 405 20A, 78, 80
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 133 PS 405 4A, 72
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 120 PS 407 10A, 61, 64
The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly, 382 PS 407 10A R, 61, 64
UR1, 30 PS 407 20A, 67, 69
UR2, 30 PS 407 4A, 55, 58
UR2-H, 32 SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC, 102
SSL SM 421, DI 32 x 24 V DC, 98
Meaning, 438 SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 138, 141
Standards, 13 SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit, 232
Start information SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 240, 256
OB 40, 228 SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 113
Static parameters, 85 SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 123
STEP 7 blocks SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 127
for analog functions, 163 SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 130
Step response SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A, 159
Interference frequency suppression 10 Hz, 312 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 150
Interference frequency suppression 400 Hz, 313 SM 422, DO 8 x AC 120/230 V/5 A, 146
Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz, 312 SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 319
Interference frequency suppression 60 Hz, 313 SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 267
STL SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 306
Meaning, 437 SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 296
STOP mode SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 276
Analog input module, 225 Technical support, 5
Digital module, 91 Temperature coefficient
Storage, 23 Analog input module, 202
Backup battery, 23 temperature unit
Modules, 23 Analog input module, 202
Substitute a value Terminator, 327
Digital input module, 87 IM 463-2, 359
Digital output module, 88 Test voltages, 26
Substitute a value "1" Testing
Digital input module, 87 Mechanical ambient conditions, 25
Digital output module, 88 Reference channel error, 291
Supply voltage Underflow, 292
Failure, 107 The 120/230 V DC fan subassembly
Sensor, 208 Installation, 382
support The 120/230 VAC fan subassembly
Additional, 4 Fuse, 381
SV Operator controls and indicators, 381
Meaning, 437 Specifications, 382
Thermal voltage, 215
Thermocouple
T Connecting to an analog input module, 215
Design, 215
TD
Operating principle, 215
Meaning, 438

Index
Thermocouples to resistance thermometers Digital output module, 88

Connecting, 218 Ensuring, 106, 116
Training center, 5 SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 291
Wiring
24 VDC fan subassembly, 384
U SM 421, DI 16 x AC 120 V, 110
Wiring and block diagrams
UC
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 120
Meaning, 438
Wiring diagram
UCM
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 154
Meaning, 438
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 133
UH
WR_DPARM
Meaning, 439
SFC 56, 395
Uiso
WR_PARM
Meaning, 439
SFC 55, 395
Underflow
Testing, 292
Ungrounded operation
UR1
Design, 29
Specifications, 30
UR2
Specifications, 30
UR2-H
Design, 31
Specifications, 32
User program
USR
Meaning, 439
V
Vibrations, 24
Reducing, 24
Voltage sensors
Connecting, 207
Vs
Meaning, 439
Vs Sensor supply
Short-circuit, 107
W
Wire break
Digital module, 92
Wire break monitoring


Module Data en en-US

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Module Data en en-US

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Preface

Accessories and spare parts C

Siemens AG A5E00850736-08 Copyright © Siemens AG 2016.

Purpose of this manual

Basic knowledge required

Scope of the manual

Changes compared to the previous version

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Position in the information landscape

System Documentation package

Recycling and disposal

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Service & Support on the Internet

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

4.20 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A (6ES7422-5EH00-0AB0)..........153

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

5.19.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit............................................................................235

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

7.4 Installing and connecting the IM 463-2................................................................................350

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

B Diagnostic data of signal modules............................................................................................................405

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Information on the type plate

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Table 1-1 Use in industry

Area of application Noise emission requirements Noise immunity requirements

Low voltage directive

Name Order number

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres;

Marking for Australia and New Zealand

Our products meet the requirements of standard EN 61000-6-4.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with

or cULus approval, Hazardous Location

CULUS Listed E248953 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

APPROVED for Use in

or cULus Approvals, Hazardous Location for Relay Modules

CULUS Listed E223122 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

(1) Battery or supply voltage

Figure 1-1 Back-up voltage supply

The following conditions apply to the performance characteristics of this connection:

Voc (no load voltage) = 15 V Vmax = 15 V

Battery/Power supply CPU input "Ext. Batt." with cable

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I, Division 2,

(1) Battery or supply voltage

Figure 1-2 Back-up voltage supply

The following conditions apply to the performance characteristics of this connection:

Voc (no load voltage) = 15 V Vmax = 15 V

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Battery/power supply CPU input "Ext. Batt." with cable

Safety requirements for installation

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Table 1-3 Pulse-shaped interference

Pulse-shaped interference Test voltage Corresponds to

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Pulse-shaped interference Test voltage Corresponds to

Table 1-4 Sinusoidal interference